Home

RAID_Firmware_Users_..

1. The empty drive entry is removed from the SCSI drive table Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement If there is a failed drive replace the failed drive with a new drive to keep the logical drive working Caution If a drive in a logical drive fails it is important to remove the failed drive If you mistakenly remove the wrong drive from the same logical drive you will have failed a second drive and may cause a critical failure of the logical drive To locate a failed drive identify a single drive or test all drive activity LEDs you can flash the LEDs of any or all drives in an array Since a defective drive does not flash this provides a good way for you to visually identify a failed drive before replacing it Note The following procedure works only if there is no I O activity v To Identify a Drive 1 Terminate media scan for the logical drive that contains the drive you wish to identify or terminate media scan for all logical drives Terminating media scan prevents the drive LEDs from flashing green which otherwise would make it difficult to identify the drive See To Terminate a Media Scan on page 143 for more information 2 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 3 Select the drive you want to identify 176 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 4 Choose Identify scsi drive flash All drives to flash the activity LEDs of all of the driv
2. Yes Rebuild using the local spare drive No Any global spare drive assigned to logical drive Yes Rebuild using the global spare drive No Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time Enabled Waiting for spare drive to be No added or manual rebuild Yes Has the failed drive been replaced Yes Rebuild using the swapped drive No Keep detecting if drive has been replaced or spare drive has been added FIGURE 14 1 Automatic Rebuild Manual Rebuild When a user applies forced manual rebuild the controller first determines whether there is a local spare drive assigned to the logical drive If a local spare drive is available the controller automatically starts to rebuild onto the spare drive 300 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 If no local spare drive is available the controller searches for a global spare drive If there is a global spare drive the controller begins to rebuild the logical drive immediately FIGURE 14 2 illustrates this manual rebuild process If neither local spare nor global spare drive is available the controller monitors the channel and ID of the failed drive After the failed drive has been replaced with a healthy one the controller begins to rebuild the logical drive rebuild onto the new drive If no drive is available for rebuilding the controller does not attempt to rebuild until
3. For more information see Step 1 of Planning for 128 LUNs on a SCSI Array Optional on page 158 Chapter8 Host LUNs 159 2 Ensure that four default host channels CH 0 1 4 and 5 are configured as host channels 3 Create eight host IDs per host channel four primary controller IDs and four secondary controller IDs per host channel for a total of 32 host IDs See To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID on page 91 4 Create 32 logical drives See Creating Logical Drives on page 95 5 Partition each logical drive into 32 partitions 32 logical drives x 32 partitions per logical drive 1024 partitions 6 Link the 1024 partitions to the 32 host IDs See Partitions on page 70 and LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only on page 111 for more information TABLE 8 1 Configuration for 1024 LUNs Configuration Item Number Maximum number of host channels 4 channels 0 1 4 5 Required number of host IDs per channel 8 4 PIDs and 4 SIDs Maximum number of logical drives per RAID array 32 Maximum number of partitions per logical drive 32 Maximum number of LUNs assigned to each host ID 32 Planning for 64 LUNs in Redundant FC or SATA Point to Point Configurations For FC arrays in point to point configurations that use redundant controllers to ensure maximum reliability accessibility and serviceability RAS you can have a maximum of 64 LUNs To achieve this redundancy with a maximum number of LUNs
4. From the Main Menu choose system Functions Controller maintenance gt Save nvram to disks A confirmation prompt is displayed lt Main Menu gt and edit Logical drives and edit logical Volumes and edit Host luns and edit Drives and edit channe l and edit Configuration parameters and edit Peripheral devices Save nvram to disks NURAM To Disks Yes No Save Choose Yes to confirm A message confirms that the NVRAM information has been successfully saved To restore the configuration refer to Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk on page 280 Chapter 13 System Functions and Event Logs 279 280 Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk If you have saved your configuration to disk and want to apply that same configuration to another array or reapply it to the array that had the configuration originally you must be certain that the channels and IDs in the configuration are correct for the array where you are restoring the configuration The NVRAM configuration restores all configuration settings such as channel settings and host IDs but does not rebuild logical drives See Saving Your Configuration NVRAM to Disk on page 276 for information about how to save a configuration file including advice about saving controller dependent configuration whenever a configuration change is made See Record of Settings on page 323 for a convenient way to kee
5. In single controller configurations do not set the controller as a secondary controller The primary controller controls all firmware operations and must be the assignment of the single controller In a single controller configuration if you disable the Redundant Controller function and reconfigure the controller with the Autoconfigure option or as a secondary controller the controller module becomes inoperable and will need to be replaced After a logical drive has been created it can be assigned to the secondary controller Then the host computer associated with the logical drive can be mapped to the secondary controller see Mapping a Partition to a Host LUN on page 72 To Change a Controller Assignment Optional Caution Only assign logical drives to primary controllers in single controller configurations 68 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select the drive you want to reassign 3 Choose logical drive Assignments and then choose Yes to confirm the 2 3 reassignment The reassignment is evident from the view and edit Logical drives screen A P in front of the LG number such as PO means that the logical drive is assigned to the primary controller An S in front of the LG number means that the logical drive is assigned to the secondary controller Logical Drive Name
6. SAF TE and SES Polling Period SAF TE and SES Temperature Value Display On Board Controller Voltage Monitors On Board Controller Temperature Sensors Data Safety Continued Supported Performs read after write during normal write processes to ensure data is properly written to drives Supported Performs read after write during rebuild write to ensure data is properly written to drives Supported Performs read after write during logical drive initialization to ensure data is properly written to drives Supported Default Detect and Clone Replace Users can choose to clone data from a failing drive to a backup drive manually Description Supported Supported After a specific period of time without any user interaction the password is requested again This prevents unauthorized operation when the user is away Environment Management Description Supported User configurable 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 60 sec Supported Displays the temperature value provided by enclosure SAF TE module if available Supported Monitors the 3 3V 5V and 12V voltage status Event trigger threshold user configurable Supported Monitors the CPU and board temperature status Event trigger threshold user configurable Enclosure Monitoring of Redundant Power Supply Status Fan Status UPS Status and Temperature Status Supported Fault Bus SAF TE SES ISEMS Appendix B Firmware Specifications 321
7. Stripe Size menu option enables you to specify the stripe size for the logical drive you are creating These menu options are described in the remainder of this section 6 Optional Set the maximum logical drive capacity using the following procedure Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 61 62 a Choose Maximum Drive Capacity Note Changing the maximum drive capacity reduces the size of the logical drive and leaves some disk space unused b Type in the maximum capacity of each physical drive that makes up the logical drive you are creating Size seaeus a 2fp o e tosazs coon fele Em o NME a a 1 Sa Ld a i Maximum Available Drive Capacity NB gt Maximum Drive Capacit y MH gt z 34476 1024 i E x ae id ei E A logical drive should be composed of physical drives with the same capacity A logical drive can only use the capacity of each drive up to the maximum capacity of the smallest drive 7 Optional Add a local spare drive from the list of unused physical drives by following these steps a Choose Assign Spare Drives to display a list of available physical drives you can use as a local spare Note A global spare cannot be created while creating a logical drive Note A logical drive created in NRAID or RAID 0 which has no data redundancy or parity does not support spare drive rebuilding The spare chosen here
8. To Enable or Disable Reporting Inconsistent Parity Errors as System Events From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives Select the logical drive whose inconsistent parity you want to enable or disable as a system event The default value is Enabled To toggle between enabling and disabling this menu option choose reGenerate parity Generate Check Parity Error Event and then choose Yes to confirm the change Clearing a Fatal Fail Logical Drive Condition With a RAID array system your system is protected with the RAID parity drive and a global spare or spares A FATAL FAIL condition occurs when more drives fail than your RAID redundancy can accommodate The redundancy of your RAID array depends on your configuration In a RAID 3 or RAID 5 configuration two or more drives must fail for a FATAL FAIL status In a RAID 1 configuration you can lose multiple drives without fatal failure if all the failed drives reside on one side of a mirrored pair It is sometimes possible to recover the RAID array from a FATAL FAIL For the detailed procedure to use refer to the Recovering From Fatal Drive Failure section in the Troubleshooting Your Array chapter of the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for Sun StorEdge 3510 FC and 3511 SATA Arrays Chapter 6 Logical Drives 139 The Fatal Fail condition remains after the drive problem is fixed and the controller is
9. A controller that replaces a failed unit in a dual controller system often has a newer release of the firmware installed than the firmware in the controller it replaced To maintain compatibility the surviving primary controller automatically updates the firmware running on the replacement secondary controller to the firmware version of the primary controller Note When you upgrade your controller firmware in the Solaris operating system the format 1M command still shows the earlier revision level To correct this you must update the drive label using the autoconfigure option option 0 of the format 1M command When you select label the drive is labelled with the updated firmware version Upgrading SES and PLD Firmware When you replace an I O controller the new controller might have a version of SES or PLD firmware different from the other controller in your array If this mismatch occurs when you install a controller you hear an audible alarm and see a blinking amber Event LED To synchronize the SES firmware and hardware PLD versions you must download new SES firmware through Sun StorEdge Configuration Service or the Sun StorEdge CLI If you have not installed this software you must install it from the software CD that shipped with your array Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for your array to see instructions for downloading firmware for devices Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family C
10. CHL _ ID _ SCSI Drive ALERT Unexpected Drive Not Ready __B Drive installed does not respond with Ready 350 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 CHL ID SCSI Drive ALERT Bad Block Encountered Block_number Sense_key Sense_code Hard drive media error reported A bad block is encountered in the specified hard drive The RAID controller will ask the hard drive to retry If the host attempts a read to this location a media error status will be returned If it attempts a write the block will be recovered and the recovered message will be displayed CHL _ ID _ SCSI Drive ALERT Drive HW Error Sense_key Sense_code Drive Side SCSI drive unrecoverable hardware error reported CHL ID SCSI Target ALERT Unit Attention Received Sense_key Sense_code Unit attention received on the SCSI drive target CHL ID SCSI Drive ALERT Aborted Command Sense_key Sense_code SCSI drive aborted command reported CHL _ ID _ SCSI Drive ALERT Unexpected Sense Received Sense_key Sense_code Drive side SCSI drive unexpected sense data received Note The three digit code in parentheses provides additional information about the drive error The first of these three digits represents the SCSI Sense Key The remaining two digits represent the Additional Sense Code ASC For more information about SCSI sense codes refer to http sunsolve sun com handbook_pub System
11. Effect As above WARNING Controller BBU Absent or Failed As above WARNING Controller BBU Failure Detected As above WARNING Controller BBU Not Fully Charged Battery under charge and unable to support a configuration change WARNING Controller BBU Thermal Shutdown Enter Sleep Mode There is a temperature sensor on the charger board The upper threshold is 65 C The controller will resume charging when normal temperature is restored Force Controller Write Through on Trigger Cause Forcing the controller to adopt a safe caching mode on conditions such as battery failure or overheated ambient The safety trigger can shutdown the controller or change the caching mode The trigger causes for safety mechanisms are user configurable including battery condition overheated board temperature or peripheral device failure 348 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Controller Notifications Controller NOTICE NVRAM Factory Defaults Restored Firmware settings have been restored to factory defaults Options for restoring defaults are not available to users and are only reserved for qualified engineers Controller BBU Present BBU has once been removed and is now installed Controller BBU Back On Line Battery once was absent or failed and is now restored to normal functionality charging has resumed Controller BBU Fully Charged The battery has been recharged
12. LUNs per Host SCSI ID to display a list of values 2 Choose a value and then choose Yes to confirm your choice This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 3 Choose Yes to reset the controller Maximum Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connections Use Max Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connection to determine the maximum number of concurrently supported host LUN connections Change this menu option setting only if you have more than four logical drives or partitions Maximum concurrent host LUN connections determines the controller internal resources that are available for use with a specific number of the concurrent connections 230 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 For example you can have four hosts A B C and D and four host IDs LUNs IDs 0 1 2 and 3 in a configuration where Host A accesses ID 0 Host B accesses ID 1 Host C accesses ID 2 Host D accesses ID 3 These connections are all queued in the cache If there is I O in the cache with four connections and another host I O operation arrives that is different from the four that are currently in the cache for example host A accesses ID 3 the controller returns busy This occurs with the concurrent act
13. Through The logical drive s write policy is changed Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAPTER Logical Volumes This chapter explains how to creating and using logical volumes using the view and edit logical Volumes menu option While the ability to create and manage logical volumes remains a feature of Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays for legacy reasons the size and performance of physical and logical drives have made the use of logical volumes obsolete Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations and do not work in those configurations In particular the use of logical volumes is not supported in Sun Cluster environments Note Avoid using logical volumes and use logical drives instead For more information about logical drives see Chapter 6 Topics covered in this chapter include m Understanding Logical Volumes Multilevel RAID on page 148 Logical Volume Limitations on page 148 Logical Drive and Logical Volume Partitions on page 149 RAID Expansion on page 149 Multilevel RAID Arrays on page 150 Spare Drives on page 150 Viewing the Logical Volume Status Table on page 151 Creating a Logical Volume on page 151 Deleting a Logical Volume on page 153 Expanding a Logical Volume on page 154 147 Understanding Logical Volumes Multilevel RAID A logical volume LV is a combination of RAID 0 str
14. to either specify the appropriate number of cylinders heads and sectors or to use the Variable menu option for one or more of these settings When you use the Variable menu option the firmware calculates the appropriate settings Leaving the cylinder head and sector settings at Variable ensures that all three values are calculated automatically If you choose a specific value for one of these settings and leave the other two set to Variable the firmware calculates the other two settings If you set two the firmware automatically calculates the third For the Solaris operating system you can choose and 64 heads and either the lt 65536 cylinder setting or the Variable cylinder setting to cover all logical drives over 253 GByte and under the maximum limit The controller automatically adjusts the sector count and then the operating system can read the correct drive capacity After changing the size of a disk in the Solaris operating system run the format utility and choose the 0 autoconfigure option from the menu This enables the host to reconfigure the size of the disk appropriately and relabel the disk with the current firmware revision level To Configure Sector Ranges Head Ranges and Cylinder Ranges From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration Sector Ranges to display a list of sector ranges Select a value and
15. wiae u ose asme ewro serian wal 1 cnz serian 2 Note changes you want to make to the existing configuration Deleting Logical Drives To assign a different RAID level or a different set of drives to a logical drive or to change local spare drives you must first unmap and delete the logical drive and then create a new logical drive Caution This operation erases all data on the logical drive Therefore if any data exists on the logical drive copy it to another location or back it up before it is deleted Note You can delete a logical drive only if it has first been unmapped v To Unmap and Delete a Logical Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns to display a list of channel and host IDs 2 Choose a channel and host ID combination from the list A list of channel and host IDs is displayed You might need to scroll through the list to display some of the channels and host IDs Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 49 3 Select a host LUN and choose Yes to unmap the host LUN from the channel host ID view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes nn ea era EJ EEEEJ T TSi CHL 1 ID Primary Controll v CHL 3 ID i Secondary Contro u CHL 3 ID 12 Primary Control view system Information view and edit Event logs lt Main Menu gt in v7in anv Parcieion size 4 Repeat Step 3 to unmap all remaining host LUNs th
16. 34732 20 MB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36C c Press Escape to return to the menu of logical drive options Note The Disk Reserved Space option is not supported while you are creating a logical drive If you use two controllers for a redundant configuration you can assign a logical drive to either of the controllers to balance the workload By default all logical drives are assigned to the primary controller Logical drive assignments can be changed later but that operation requires that you unmap host LUNS and reset the controller Optional For dual controller configurations you can assign this logical drive to the secondary controller by following these steps Caution In single controller configurations assign logical drives only to the primary controller a Choose Logical Drive Assignments Redundant Controller Logical Drive Assign to Secondary Controller Lives No b Choose Yes to assign the logical drive to the redundant controller Optional Configure the logical drive s write policy Write back cache is the preconfigured global logical drive write policy which is specified on the Caching Parameters submenu See Enabling and Disabling Write Back Cache on page 227 for the procedure on setting the global caching parameter This option enables you to assign a write policy per logical drive that is either the same as or different than the global setting Write policy i
17. 8 GB Partition 2 5 GB Partition O 2 5 GB Partition 1 1 5 GB Logical drive 1 RAID 3 6 GB Partition 2 2 GB FIGURE 5 1 Partitions in Logical Drives v To Partition a Logical Drive Optional Caution Make sure any data that you want to save on this partition has been backed up before you partition the logical drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select the logical drive you want to partition 3 Choose Partition logical drive If the logical drive has not already been partitioned the following warning is displayed This operation may result in the LOSS OF ALL DATA on the Logical Disk Partition Logical Drive 4 Choose Yes to continue A list of the partitions on this logical drive is displayed If the logical drive has not yet been partitioned all the logical drive capacity is listed as partition 0 5 Select a partition 108 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 6 Type the desired size of the selected partition The following warning is displayed This operation will result in the LOSS OF ALL DATA on the partition Partition Logical Drive 7 Choose Yes to partition the drive The remaining capacity of the logical drive is automatically allocated to the next partition In the following example a partition size of 20000 Mbyte was entered the remaining storage of 20000 Mbyte is allocated to the partiti
18. Chapter 9 Physical Drives 171 Viewing Physical Drive Information The drive revision number serial number and disk capacity of each individual drive can be displayed If you select a SCSI Enclosure Services SES chip rather than a drive the View drive information menu option also displays the worldwide node name WWN From this information you can determine the serial number of the chassis as described in the following procedure v To View Physical Drive Information 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select the physical drive whose information you want to view 3 Choose View drive information to display the drive s revision number serial number and disk capacity in blocks of 512 Kbyte a Ee Size tMH gt LG_DRU Vendor and Product ID 34732 200NB A ON LINE SEAGATE 8133675 3FSUN36G pe a ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G I d Revision Number 349 36753 FSUN366 Serial Number SHABY EUT HRA 7349 Disk Capacity Chlocks gt 71132958 36753FSUN36G Hode Name WWHN gt 26 8H AA AC 5A 33 2B FD Redundant Loop ID 6 36753 FSUN36G StorEdge 3516F A If you selected the SES chip rather than a drive the Node name WWN shows the worldwide name assigned to the enclosure Sret om 1 sizecm speeaie_pma sratus vendor and Produce 1D BP 34732 2Q0MB A ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G Revision Mumber 1648 36753 FSUN36G6 Serial Number Disk Capacity hlocks gt H 36753 FSUN36G6
19. Cooling fan locations are identified in FIGURE 12 5 TABLE 12 7 Location of Cooling Fans Cooling Element Fan and Power Supply Module Cooling Fan 0 FANS 0 AND 1 PS 0 Cooling Fan 1 FAN 2 AND FANS PS 1 Cooling fan 0 Cooling fan 1 FIGURE 12 5 Cooling Fan Locations SAF TE Temperature Sensor Locations SCSI Only Monitoring temperature at different points within the array is one of the most important SAF TE functions High temperatures can cause significant damage if they go unnoticed There are a number of different sensors at key points in the enclosure 260 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 The following table shows the location of each of those sensors The Element ID corresponds to the identifier shown when you choose view and edit Peripheral devices View Peripheral Device Status gt SAF TE Device TABLE 12 8 Temperature Sensor Locations SCSI Temp Sensor ID Description 0 Port A Drive Midplane Temperature 1 1 Port A Drive Midplane Temperature 2 2 Port A Power Supply Temperature 1 PS 0 2 Port B EMU Temperature 1 left module as seen from back 4 Port B EMU Temperature 2 right module as seen from back 5 Port B Drive Midplane Temperature 3 6 Port B Power Supply Temperature 2 PS 1 CPU Temperature CPU on Controller Board1 Temperature Controller Board2 Temperature Controller SAF TE Power Supply Sensors SCSI Only Each Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI
20. Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled SCSI Default Setting Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Range of Values DHCP client RARP client or type IP address netmask and gateway Range of Values Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Do not change this setting Enabled Disabled TABLE D 8 Communication Parameters gt Network Protocol Support Continued SNMP DHCP Ping TABLE D Communication Parameter gt Telnet Inactivity Timeout Time User Defined Parameter Telnet Inactivity Timeout Time Disabled Enabled Enabled FC and SATA Default Setting Disabled TABLE D 10 Caching Parameters User Defined Parameter Write Back Cache Optimization for Random Sequential Periodic Cache Flush Time FC and SATA Default Setting Enabled Sequential Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled SCSI Default Setting Disabled SCSI Default Setting Enabled Sequential Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Range of Values Disabled or 60 seconds through 2700 seconds Range of Values Disabled Enabled Sequential or Random Disabled Continuous Sync 1 2 minute 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes Appendix D Parameter Summary Tables 335 TABLE D 11 Peripheral Device Type Parameters User Define
21. Enable 244 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Controller Parameters Procedures for viewing and displaying controller parameters are described in this section Configuring a Controller Name The controller name is displayed only in the firmware application and is used to identify controllers Note The controller s name and password jointly share a 16 character alphanumeric field If you set up a password ensure that both the controller name and any password can fit in a 16 character field v To View and Display the Controller Name 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Controller Parameters gt Controller Name to name or rename the controller Depending on the controller s current settings you are prompted to either enter a new name or modify the existing name for the designated controller view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives Sra Hame TECH FC led Default L F Hew Controller Name Hew Hame C 5 view and edit Logical drives Set Controller Date and Time Controller Parameters 2 Type a name for the controller and press Return Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 245 AN Password Validation Timeout This menu option sets a timeout value that determines how many minutes of inactivity elapse before the password is requested again This security measure helps avo
22. HTML format at the following location http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup You can view print or purchase a broad selection of Sun documentation at http www sun com documentation Xxxii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Contacting Sun Technical Support For late breaking news and troubleshooting tips review the release notes for your array available at the locations shown in Accessing Sun Documentation on page xxxii If you have technical questions about this product that are not answered in the documentation go to http www sun com service contacting To initiate or check on a USA only service request contact Sun support at 800 USA4SUN To obtain international technical support contact the sales office of each country at http www sun com service contacting sales html Section 508 Accessibility Features The Sun StorEdge 3000 family documentation is available in Section 508 compliant HTML files that can be used with assistive technology programs for visually impaired personnel These files are provided on the Documentation CD for your product as well as on the web sites identified in Accessing Sun Documentation on page xxxii Additionally the software and firmware applications provide keyboard navigation and shortcuts that are documented in the user s guides Sun Welcomes Your Comments Sun is inter
23. Introducing Default Parameters on page 331 Basic Default Parameters on page 332 Default Configuration Parameters on page 333 Default Peripheral Device Parameters on page 340 Default System Functions on page 342 Keeping Specific Parameter Defaults on page 343 Introducing Default Parameters Although the factory defaults provide optimized controller operation you might want to fine tune your array through minor modifications to the following parameters listed Some parameters can be changed only at the initial array configuration other parameters can be changed at any time Note the listing of parameters defaults that should not be changed unless directed by technical support 331 Basic Default Parameters These parameters are the primary settings for each array TABLE D 1 Logical Drive Parameters View and Edit Logical Drives FC and SATA Default User Defined Parameter Setting SCSI Default Setting Range of Values Create Logical Drives 1 RAID 0 per array 1 RAID 0 per array No spares per array No spares per array 1 32 drives per array 1 16 drives per array Change a Logical Drive Primary Secondary Controller Assignment TABLE D 2 Logical Volume Parameters View and Edit Logical Volumes FC and SATA Default User Defined Parameter Setting SCSI Default Setting Range of Values Create a Logical Volume Primary controller Primary controller Secondary TABLE D 3 Host LUN Parameters
24. LUN masking LVD management port Mbyte media scan mirroring RAID 1 multiple block striping 390 with distributed parity NDMP NVRAM N port OBP Logical Unit Number The major and minor device numbers make up the logical unit numbering sequence for a particular device connected to a computer The ability to change the virtual LUN as presented to the server from storage This enables such benefits as the ability of a server to boot from the SAN without requiring a local disk drive The characteristic that enables an administrator to dynamically map an HBA to a specified LUN This provides an individual server or multiple servers access to an individual drive or to multiple drives and prohibits unwanted server access to the same drives Low Voltage Differential A low noise low power and low amplitude signaling technology that enables data communication between a supported server and storage devices LVD signaling uses two wires to drive one signal over copper wire and requires a cable that is no longer than 25 meters 82 ft The 10 100BASE T Ethernet port that is used to configure a RAID array Megabyte 1024 Kbyte or 1 048 576 bytes A background process that continuously checks physical drives for bad blocks or other media errors Data written to one disk drive is simultaneously written to another disk drive If one disk fails the other disk can be used to run the array and reconstruct the failed di
25. LUNs per Host SCSI ID 16 Max Humber of Concurrent Host LUM Connection 128 Humber of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connectio 1 LUH Peripheral Device Type Parameters 2 LUNs T Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration 4 LUNs a C In band EI management Enabled amp LUNs uj C 16 LUNs fat Host side SCSI Parameters 32 LUNs Drive side SCSI Parameters Disk Array Parameters Change LUNs per Host SCSI ID Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters Yes Ho 5 Create at least four logical drives See Creating Logical Drives on page 57 for more information 6 Create partitions on each logical drive until you reach a total of 128 partitions 7 Map those partitions created in Step 6 to the host IDs created in Step 1 See Partitions on page 70 and Planning for 128 LUNs on a SCSI Array Optional on page 158 for more information Planning for 1024 LUNs on an FC or SATA Array Optional Loop Mode Only If you want to create 1024 LUNs on a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array which represent the maximum number of storage partitions that can be mapped for these arrays you must map 32 IDs to the array s host channels There are several ways you can meet this requirement For example you can set up the following configuration described below v To Create 1024 LUNs 1 If necessary edit Host side Parameters so LUNs Per Host SCSI ID is 32
26. Navigation key help PC GraphictAN 1 Color Mode Show Transfer RatetShow Cache Status s gt Move Cursori amp Rate Range FIGURE 2 1 Initial Firmware Screen The following table describes the components in the initial firmware screen TABLE 2 1 Firmware Screen Components Component Description Date and time Shows the controller date and time Controller name or inquiry Identifies the type of controller This is also where the string controller name entered using view and edit Configuration parameters Controller Parameters gt Controller Name is displayed Cache status Indicates the percentage of controller cache that differs from what is saved to disk Battery charging status Battery status ranges from BAD to charging to fully charged See Battery Operation on page 283 Transfer rate indicator Indicates the current data transfer rate of communication between the array and the connected hosts Select Show Transfer Rate Show Cache Status from the list of screen display options and press or to increase or decrease the transfer rate Gauge range from its default of 10 Mbyte per second 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 TABLE 2 1 Firmware Screen Components Continued Component Description Progress indicator Indicates the progress of various tasks as a percentage of completion The percentage is preceded by an abbreviation of the
27. This guide provides an overview of redundant array of independent disks RAID functionality and explains the use of controller firmware commands to configure and monitor Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays Note Different versions of controller firmware apply to different Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays Even if the same version number is used the SunSolve patch number differs for each hardware platform as does the binary filename Before downloading new firmware be sure to check the README file or appropriate release notes to make sure you are upgrading a supported version of the firmware for your array This guide is written for experienced system administrators who are familiar with Sun Microsystems hardware and software products Caution Read the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Safety Regulatory and Compliance Manual before beginning any procedure in this guide How This Book Is Organized This book covers the following topics m Chapter 1 explains what you need to know before you begin accessing and using the firmware application Chapter 2 introduces the initial firmware screen menu structure and navigation and screen conventions Chapter 3 describes first time array configuration XX X m Chapter 4 summarizes common procedures for the first time configuration of Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI arrays and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI arrays m Chapter 5 summarizes common procedures for the first time configuration of Sun Sto
28. a Configuring Drive Motor Spin Up Reserved m Configuring Disk Access Delay Time m Configuring Drive I O Timeout m Configuring the Maximum Tag Count Tag Command Queuing m Configuring Periodic Drive Check Time m Configuring Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time a Configuring Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time m Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART m Auto Assign Global Spare Drive FC and SATA Only These parameters are user configurable However they should not be changed from their preset values without good reason and without an understanding of potential impacts on performance or reliability Configuring Drive Motor Spin Up Reserved Caution Do not use the Drive Motor Spin Up menu option It is reserved and should be used only by qualified technicians The Drive Motor Spin up menu option determines how the physical drives in a disk array are started When the power supply is unable to provide sufficient current for all physical drives and controllers that are powered on at the same time spinning up the physical drives serially requires less current If Drive Motor Spin Up is enabled the drives are powered up sequentially and some of these drives might not be ready for the controller to access when the array powers up Increase the disk access delay time so that the controller will wait longer for the drive to be ready v To Spin Up SCSI Hard Drives Reserved From the Main Menu choose view
29. avoiding failure 149 creating 151 default parameters 332 defining 305 deleting 153 deleting partitions of 149 expanding 149 154 limitations 148 partitions 149 partitions deleting 149 RAID levels 150 spare drives 150 status table 151 understanding 148 loop connection 94 loop DAS configuration 39 loop options 234 loopback error statistics 268 low level formatting of a physical drive 190 LUNs adding WWN entries 164 creating 1024 in loop mode 159 creating host filters for FC and SATA 115 default parameters 332 deleting a mapping 161 labelling FC and SATA 121 labelling SCSI 76 mapping FC and SATA 109 mapping SCSI 72 mapping logical drive partitions to SCSI 73 mapping partitions to 156 maximum concurrent host connections 230 maximum number 22 number of tags reserved for 231 number supported per host ID 230 overview FC and SATA 110 overview SCSI 72 Solaris device files for FC and SATA 122 Solaris device files for SCSI 77 M main menu firmware 14 manual rebuild 300 mapping cylinders heads and sectors 232 mapping partitions FC and SATA 109 mapping partitions SCSI 72 maximum drive capacity FC and SATA 100 maximum drive capacity SCSI 62 maximum number of drives 22 maximum queued I O count 229 maximum tag count 238 maximum usable capacities 23 maximum usable capacity per logical drive 23 media scan aborting 143 continuous 143 for bad
30. background LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Off Line Expansion Start expanding the logical drive Data re striping is carried out immediately On Line Expansion of Logical Drive_ Completed Logical drive expansion completed Off Line Expansion of Logical Drive_ Completed Logical drive expansion completed 362 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Add Drive Operation Expansion by adding new drive has started Add Drive to Logical Drive_ Completed The expansion by adding new drive is completed LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Add SCSI Drive Operation Paused The expansion process is halted because of one of the following events Logical drive expansion canceled by user One of the member drives failed during the Add Drive operation Bad blocks encountered on one of the member drives Hardware failure LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Continue Add Drive Operation The Add Drive process had once been paused and is now resumed The target logical drive has been restored to its previous status and the system can continue with the Add Drive operation LGs Logical Drive NOTICE CHE TDs Starting Clone This message is displayed when a member drive is manually cloned to a spare or a spare is automatically applied to clone a faulty member on SMART detected errors LG Logical Drive NOTICE CHL _ ID _ Copy and Replace
31. considerations or the amount of disk space available Caution In FC and SATA configurations with large drive capacities the size of the logical drive might exceed the device capacity limitation of your operating system Be sure to check the device capacity limitation of your operating system before creating the logical drive If the logical drive size exceeds the capacity limitation you must partition the logical drive TABLE 3 5 shows the usable capacity of the drives available in Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays Note The 250 Mbyte of reserved space on each drive used for storing controller metadata is not included in this table since it is not available for storing data TABLE 3 5 Actual Capacities per Drive Drive Size Usable Capacity Mbyte 36 Gbyte 34 482 73 Gbyte 69 757 146 Gbyte 139 759 250 Gbyte 238 216 300 Gbyte 285 852 400 Gbyte 381 291 Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 23 TABLE 3 6 shows the maximum usable storage capacity for Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI arrays Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI arrays Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays using the maximum number of expansion units fully populated with the largest currently available drives TABLE 3 6 Maximum Usable Storage Capacity Determined by RAID Level Number RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 3 or RAID 5 Array of Disks Drive Size Tbyte Tbyte Tbyte Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and 36 300 Gbyte 9 81 4 90 9 54 Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI
32. instead For more information about logical drives see Chapter 6 A logical volume can be divided into a maximum of 32 partitions for Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays During operation the host sees an unpartitioned logical volume or a partition of a partitioned logical volume as one single physical drive Channels Partitions and LUN Mapping A SCSI channel can connect up to 15 devices excluding the controller itself when the Wide function is enabled 16 bit SCSI Fibre Channel enables the connectivity of up to 125 devices in a loop Each device has one unique ID A logical drive consists of a group of SCSI or Fibre Channel drives Physical drives in one logical drive do not have to come from the same SCSI channel Also each logical drive can be configured for a different RAID level A drive can be assigned as the local spare drive to one specified logical drive or as a global spare drive A spare is not available for logical drives that have no data redundancy RAID 0 Appendix A Basic RAID Concepts 305 Drive channel 0 Drive channel 1 73 73 73 aB o7 e SY ID6 IDO ID14 Local spare for LD1 Global spare RAID 3 146 GB Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 FIGURE A 2 Allocation of Drives in Logical Drive Configurations You can divide a logical drive or logical volume into several partitions or use the entire logical drive as a single partition 306 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guid
33. multipathing software is required on each host accessing the array Note Multipathing for FC arrays is provided by Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software Refer to the release notes for your array for information about which versions of Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software are supported on which platforms 160 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 For example to set up 64 LUNs with multipathing enabled you can map 32 LUNs to channel 0 on one controller and channel 1 on the other controller and map the other 32 LUNs to channel 4 on one controller and channel 5 on the other controller TABLE 8 2 Example of ID Assignments for 64 LUNs With Multipathing Enabled Channel Controller Port PID SID 0 Top 40 NA 1 Bottom 41 NA 4 Top NA 50 5 Bottom NA 51 Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual for your array to see more information about point to point and loop storage area network SAN and direct attached storage DAS configurations Mapping a Partition toa LUN See Mapping a Partition to a Host LUN on page 72 for information about how to map a partition to a LUN on a SCSI array See To Map a Logical Drive Partition on page 113 for information about how to map a partition to a LUN on an FC or SATA array Deleting a Host LUN Mapping This section provides the procedure for deleting a host LUN mapping v To Delete a Host LUN Mapping 1 Choose view and edit
34. policy is restored This change affects the write policy of all logical drives except those whose individual policy has been changed to override the global default write policy for the array Except for the Temperature exceeds threshold menu option these trigger operations toggle between being enabled and being disabled each time you change the setting Configuring the Controller Failure Event Trigger If the array has been configured with the write back cache mode enabled enable this menu option if you want the array to automatically revert to write through cache mode write back disabled if one controller in a dual controller array fails Chapter 12 Peripheral Devices 263 264 See Enabling and Disabling Write Back Cache on page 227 for more information about write back and write through cache policies To Enable or Disable the Controller Failure Event Trigger From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Set Peripheral Device Entry Event Trigger Operations Controller Failure and choose Yes to confirm the change Configuring the Battery Backup BBU Low Event or BBU Failed Event Trigger If the array has been configured with the write back cache mode enabled enable this menu option if you want the array to automatically revert to write through cache mode write back disabled if an array s battery backup fails or falls below its lower threshold To Enable or Disable the BBU L
35. press Escape Several optional menu options are displayed You can choose these menu options to define aspects of the logical drive you are creating a Maximum Drive Capacity enables you to specify the size of the logical drive Assign Spare Drives enables you to specify a local spare drive to be used if an existing physical drive in the logical drive you are creating becomes defective a Disk Reserved Space displays the size of the reserved space used to store logical drive metadata While it is possible to delete or change reserved space size do not do so See To Specify Disk Reserved Space on page 192 for more information Logical Drive Assignments enables you to assign the logical drive you are creating to either the primary or secondary controller a Write Policy enables you to set the cache write policy for the logical drive you are creating a Initialize Mode enables you specify whether the logical drive you are creating is initialized online or offline a Stripe Size enables you to specify the stripe size for the logical drive you are creating These menu options are described in the remainder of this section Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 99 100 7 Optional Set the maximum logical drive capacity using the following procedure a Choose Maximum Drive Capacity Note Changing the maximum drive capacity reduces the size of
36. see Progress In dicators on page 17 If an array is connected to a host using a serial port connection and powered on the host terminal window displays a series of messages as shown in the following example Chapter 2 Basic Firmware Components 13 3510 Disk Array 1S installed with 1024MBytes SDRAM Total channels 6 Channel host channel Channel host channel Channel drive channel Channel drive channel Channel host channel id 70 Channel is a host channel id 71 Scanning channels Please wait a few moments Preparing to restore saved persistent reservations Type skip to skip id ids 10 1d 40 41 14 14 is is 15 T5 is is is Navigating Firmware Menus To access the firmware menu options use the up and down arrow keys to choose a screen display mode and then press Return to enter the Main Menu The firmware menus described in this document along with the steps you follow are the same regardless of whether you have connected to the controller IP address using the telnet command or through a serial port connection Once you have chosen the screen display mode the Main Menu is displayed lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit Drives view view view and edit and edit and edit channel Configuration parameters Peripheral devices system Functions view syste
37. status windows checking 285 logical drive table 285 physical drive status table 288 stripe size configuring FC and SATA 103 configuring SCSI 65 Sun StorEdge 3000 family product descriptions 2 sync transfer clock speed SCSI 199 system functions 271 default parameters 342 T tag command queuing 238 tag count maximum 238 tags number reserved per host LUN 231 telnet enabling and disabling 211 inactivity timeout 212 temperature exceeds threshold trigger 265 temperature sensor locations SAF TE 260 SES 255 temperature status controller 266 terminology basic 304 terminology navigation 16 threshold trigger temperature exceeds 265 timeout password validation 246 telnet inactivity 212 transfer clock speed setting SCSI 199 transfer rate indicator 12 transfer width SCSI 200 troubleshooting 297 U unique identifier controller 246 units of device capacity 18 upgrading firmware 293 V verification on writes 243 voltage status controller 266 W worldwide name See also WWNs worldwide names finding 162 write errors avoiding 243 write policy 227 guidelines 30 selecting FC and SATA 101 selecting SCSI 64 write back cache 285 write back cache enabling and disabling 227 write through cache enabling and disabling 227 WWN See also worldwide name WWNs 172 manually adding entries 164 selecting while creating a host filter 116 402 Sun StorEd
38. when you create a filter for a worldwide name that has been added using the Edit Host ID WWN Name List menu option you also create the filter on a channel where the HBA is connected Note You can also manually add worldwide names using the Manual add host filter entry menu option when you are configuring a host filter When you use the Manual add host filter entry option the worldwide name you add is only displayed in the worldwide name list when you create a filter on the channel where that worldwide name was entered Viewing and Modifying Host Filter Information Once you have created host filter entries you can display detailed information about them Note If you have host filter entries for two or more WWNs an asterisk next to an entry indicates that more information is available than is currently displayed To display the additional information select the entry and press Enter v To View or Modify Host Filter Information 1 Choose view and edit Host luns 2 Select the channel and ID mapped to the host LUN 164 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Select the filtered LUN Choose View and edit host filtering Select the Host ID WWN whose information you want to view or edit Choose View Host Filter Information to see detailed information about that filter Choose Add Host Filter Entry to add another filter See LUN Fil
39. 1 regardless of the event severity 214 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 SNMP Trap Objects The information carried by the trap is given by a list of variables or object value pairs The array sends one object value pair The Object ID OID for the variable has the form SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 42 2 180 product ID 1 2 3 1 1 where product ID is the Sun StorEdge array product number 3310 3320 3510 or 3511 For example a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array has the following trap OID SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 42 2 180 3510 1 2 3 1 1 The value for the object is a string and contains the following information Source IP address Controller unique identifier Event severity Time stamp Event text string Primary secondary controller Examples RAID Event Host 192 168 0 1 Serial Unique 5BF Severity Notification Time 10 31 2005 15 37 19 LG 3 Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Creation Primary RAID Event Host 192 168 0 2 Serial Unique 4504 Severity Alert Time 10 31 2005 15 34 35 Controller BBU Absent or Failed Secondary Note The format and contents of this string are subject to change All SNMPv1 messages include the SNMP version and community name The community name for Sun StorEdge 3000 products is public The SNMP trap listener snmptrapd is used to show the enterprise specific trap and the variable OID and value Chapter 11 Configuration Parameter
40. 1 logical drives ma RAID 30 Logical volume with RAID 3 logical drives m RAID 50 Logical volume with RAID 5 logical drives Spare Drives A local spare cannot be assigned to a logical volume If a drive fails it fails as a member of a logical drive therefore the controller allows local spare assignment to logical drives rather than logical volumes 150 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Viewing the Logical Volume Status Table To check and configure logical drives from the Main Menu choose view and edit logical Volumes to display the status of all logical volumes is displayed The following table describes the categories of information shown in the status table TABLE 7 1 Parameters Displayed in the Logical Volume Status Window Parameters Description LV Logical volume number P primary controller S secondary controller ID Logical volume ID number controller generated Size MB Capacity of the logical volume in Mbyte LD The number of logical drives in this logical volume Creating a Logical Volume A logical volume consists of one or several logical drives To Create a Logical Volume From the Main Menu choose view and edit logical Volumes The current logical volume configuration and status are displayed If mixed drive support is enabled a menu of drive types is displayed If mixed drive support is disabled proceed with Step 3 See Enabling Suppor
41. 1 to 32 1 to 1024 1 to 1024 FC 1 to 256 SCSI Enabled Disabled 32 64 127 255 Variable sectors 64 127 255 Variable heads 1024 32768 65536 Variable cylinders FC Range of Values Point to point only Loop only 337 TABLE D 12 Host Side and Drive Side Parameters Continued User Defined Parameter Drive side Parameters Drive Motor Spin Up Disk Access Delay Time Drive I O Timeout Queue Depth Maximum Tag Count Periodic Drive Check Time Periodic SAF TE and SES Check Time Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Auto Assign Global Spare Drive Media Scan at Power Up FC and SATA Default Setting Disabled 15 seconds 30 seconds 32 32 30 seconds 30 seconds Disabled Detect and Clone Replace Disabled Disabled SCSI Default Setting Disabled 15 seconds 30 seconds 32 32 30 seconds 30 seconds Disabled Detect and Clone Replace Disabled Disabled 338 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Range of Values Do not change this parameter Enabled Disabled Do not change this parameter None to 75 seconds 500 milliseconds to 30 seconds 32 1 256 or Disabled 1 2 to 30 seconds Disabled to 60 seconds 5 to 60 seconds Disabled Detect Only Detect and Perpetual Clone Detect and Clone Replace Enabled
42. 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array It is important for point to point configurations to also specify only a primary ID PID or a secondary ID SID for each host channel For loop configurations with failover it is important to specify both a PID and SID See Deleting a Host Channel SCSI ID on page 197 for more information about creating host IDs Note The following steps show you how to change a loop configuration to a point to point configuration v To Confirm or Change the Fibre Connection for the Array 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters Fibre Connection Option Caution Do not choose the Loop preferred otherwise point to point menu option This option is reserved for special use and should be used only if directed by technical support 2 Choose Loop only or Point to point only depending on how your network is configured and then choose Yes to confirm your choice This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 3 Choose Yes to reset the controller Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 235 Drive Side Parameters Menu The Drive Side Parameters menu options include
43. 3310 SCSI array expansion units and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 108 1 array and8 32 32 32 128 point to point mode 3510 FC array expansion units 64 point to point mode redundant configuration 1024 loop mode 512 loop mode redundant configuration Sun StorEdge 72 1 array and5 32 32 32 128 point to point mode 3511 SATA array expansion units 64 point to point mode redundant configuration 1024 loop mode 512 loop mode redundant configuration Sun StorEdge 72 1 array and5 32 32 32 128 point to point mode 3510 FC array with Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA expansion units expansion units 64 point to point mode redundant configuration 1024 loop mode 512 loop mode redundant configuration 1 Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA expansion units can be connected to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array either alone or in combination with Sun StorEdge 3510 FC expansion units 22 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Maximum Number of Disks and Maximum Usable Capacity per Logical Drive The following tables show the maximum number of disks per logical drive and the maximum usable capacity of a logical drive depending on RAID level and optimization mode The maximum capacity per logical drive supported by the RAID firmware is m 16 Tbyte with random optimization m 64 Tbyte with sequential optimization Actual logical drive maximum capacities are usually determined by practical
44. 345 event trigger operations 263 expansion of logical drives 131 external interface enabling and disabling 234 F failed drives identifying 176 failover controller 297 fan status identifying 252 fans identifying 259 fault management default parameters 343 fault protection measures cloning a failing drive 179 perpetual clone 181 SMART 179 verifying written data 243 FC arrays configuration and reconfiguration of 79 Fibre Channel error statistics 268 Fibre Connection options loop 234 point to point 234 Fibre protocol 94 filter mode FC and SATA 119 filter type FC and SATA 118 firmware advanced features 318 basic components 11 enabling and disabling external interface of 234 initial window 12 main menu 14 navigation keys 15 upgrading 293 firmware downloads 293 firmware specifications 317 firmware window components 12 first time configuration for FC and SATA arrays 79 for SCSI arrays 47 first time configuration summary 43 FTP enabling and disabling 211 G global spare drives 5 adding 174 auto assigning FC SATA 241 deleting 174 H head ranges changing FC and SATA 96 head ranges changing SCSI 59 host applications planning 4 host channel defaults 20 Index 397 host channel IDs deleting 197 host configuration setting communication parameters 9 host cylinder head sector mapping changing FC and SATA 96 host cylinder head sector mapping changin
45. Choose Yes to reset the controller If you do not reset the controller now the optimization mode remains unchanged Physical Drive Status Before configuring physical drives into a logical drive you must determine the availability of the physical drives in your enclosure Only drives with a status of FRMT DRV are available Note A drive that does not show a status of FRMT DRV needs to have reserved space added See Changing Disk Reserved Space on page 192 for more information v To Check Physical Drive Availability 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives to display a list of all installed physical drives Size MB LG_DRU Vendor and Product ID fe a f ______ 74772 1GOME NONELFRMT DRUISEAGATE STIG6GH7LSUNIGG 34732 160MB FRMT DRU SEAGATE T336687LSUN36G FRMT DRU SEAGATE T336687LSUN36G 34732 166ME FRMT DRY SEAGATE ST336687LSUN36G NONE NONE 34732 16 MB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE ST3366Q7LSUN36G NONE ee NONE j j ie m fe 34732 166ME FRAT DRY SEAGATE ST336687LSUN36G i SAF TE SUN StorEdge 3310 A 34732 16 ME FRMT DRU SEAGATE ST3366 O7LSUN26G 52 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 2 Use the arrow keys to scroll through the table and check that all installed drives are listed When the power is initially turned on the controller scans all installed physical drives that are connected through the drive channels Note If a
46. Default Channel Settings Primary Controller ID Secondary Controller Channel Default Mode PID ID SID 0 Host Channel 40 NA 1 Host Channel NA 42 2 Drive Channel 14 15 RCCOM Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 TABLE 3 2 Channel 3 Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array default channel settings are shown in TABLE 3 3 TABLE 3 3 Channel 0 1 2 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Default Channel Settings Continued Default Mode Drive Channel RCCOM Host Channel Host Channel Primary Controller ID PID 14 44 NA Secondary Controller ID SID 15 NA 46 Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array Default Channel Settings Default Mode Host Channel Host Channel Drive Channel RCCOM Drive Channel RCCOM Host Channel Host Channel Primary Controller ID PID 40 NA 44 NA Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines Secondary Controller ID SID NA 42 15 15 NA 46 21 Maximum Drive Configurations per Array TABLE 3 4 lists the maximum number of physical and logical drives partitions per logical drive and logical volume and maximum number of logical unit number LUN assignments for each array TABLE 3 4 Maximum Number of Supported Physical and Logical Drives Partitions and LUN Assignments Array Physical Logical Partitions per Partitions per LUN Assignments Drives Drives Logical Drive Logical Volume Sun StorEdge 36 1 array and2 16 32 32 128
47. Drive i Partition A Host ID WWN amp x21010BERSB2139EA Host ID WWH Mask amp xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Filter Type Include Access Mode Read Write Hame Hot Set 11 Verify all filter entries and press Escape 12 Choose Yes to add the host filter entry lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns T CHL A ID 46 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 50 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Mame List E Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 119 120 Note Unlike most firmware operations where you must complete each entry individually and repeat the procedure if you want to perform a similar operation you can add multiple WWNs to your list before you actually complete the host filter entry in Step 14 13 At the server list repeat the previous steps to create additional filters or press Escape to continue lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes T CHL 6 ID 486 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 50 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Mame List Host ID WWH WUPH Ax2161 BHERS B2139EA Host ID WWN 8x747365 7468656574 CsseceMgr gt Host ID WWAN 8x21 688HCHPFSH4DE2 Cserverld gt Host IDZWWH 0xHHAAHHAHHAAHHHHA CseceMgr gt eenece 14 Choose Y
48. Drives 6 Using Both Local and Global Spare Drives 7 Accessing the Firmware Application 8 Setting anIP Address 8 v To Setan Array s IP Address 9 Basic Firmware Components 11 Viewing the Initial Firmware Screen 11 Navigating Firmware Menus 14 Navigation Terminology and Conventions 16 Menu Options That Toggle Between Conditions 17 Progress Indicators 17 iv Device Capacities 18 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 19 Default Configurations 19 Default Logical Drive Configuration 20 Default Channel Configurations 20 Maximum Drive Configurations per Array 22 Maximum Number of Disks and Maximum Usable Capacity per Logical Drive 23 Controller Operation Guidelines 26 Dual Controller Guidelines 26 Single Controller Guidelines 27 Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines 28 Cache Write Policy Guidelines 30 Fibre Connection Protocol Guidelines 31 A Sample SAN Point to Point Configuration 33 v To Set Up a Typical Point to Point SAN Configuration 37 A Sample DAS Loop Configuration 39 v To Set Up a Typical DAS Loop Configuration 42 Array Configuration Summary 43 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 47 Existing Logical Drive Configuration 48 v To View the Logical Drive Configuration 48 v To View the Channel Configuration 49 Deleting Logical Drives 49 v To Unmap and Delete a Logical Drive 49 Cache Optimization Mode SCSI 50 v To Verify the Optimization Mode 51 v To Change the Optimization Mode 51 Sun StorEdge
49. Hode Name CWWNN gt 26 46 6H CH FF HA 2F if Redundant Loop ID 12 3675 3FSUN36G6 NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G SES SUN storEdge 3510F A The world wide name is shown in hexadecimal format for example 172 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Node Name WWNN 20 40 00 CO FF 00 2F 18 The last six hexadecimal digits of the WWN indicate the serial number of the chassis which is the same as the chassis field replaceable unit identifier FRU ID This number is sometimes shown as only the last four hexadecimal digits In the example above the FRU ID is 002F18 or simply 2F18 Assigning a Local Spare Drive A local spare drive is a standby drive assigned to serve a single specified logical drive If a member drive of that logical drive fails the local spare drive becomes a member drive and automatically starts to rebuild the logical drive Note Logical drives configured with a nonredundant RAID level NRAID and RAID 0 do not support spare drive rebuild To Assign a Local Spare Drive From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives Select the drive you want to designate as a spare Choose add Local spare drive Select the logical drive to which you want to assign the local spare and then choose Yes to assign the local spare to that logical drive Assigning a Global Spare A global spare drive automatically replaces a failed drive in any logical drive in the a
50. Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server to automatically configure IP information for devices on the network you can specify the appropriate protocol instead of typing in the information manually 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Note If you assign an IP address to an array to manage it out of band for security reasons consider using an IP address on a private network rather than a publicly routable network Using the controller firmware to set a password for the controller limits unauthorized access to the array Changing the firmware s Network Protocol Support settings can provide further security by disabling the ability to remotely connect to the array using individual protocols such as HTTP HTTPS telnet FTP and SSH See Communication Parameters on page 208 for more information To Set an Array s IP Address To set the IP address subnet mask and gateway addresses of the RAID controller perform the following steps Access the array through the COM port on the controller module of the array Refer to the Connecting Your Array chapter of the Installation Operation and Service manual for your array for information about the communication parameters to use to ensure communication Refer to the Configuring a Sun Server Running the Solaris Operating System appendix in the same document if you want to configure a tip session to use the COM port Choose view and
51. Level Dependency to Each Logical Drive Logical Drive Identification Maximum Number of LUNs per Host ID Concurrent I O Tag Command Queuing Dedicated Spare Drive Description 0 1 1 0 3 5 10 30 and 50 Enhanced RAID levels supported with logical volume implementation 32 Independent Logical drive configured in different RAID levels can coexist in an array Unique controller generated logical drive ID logical drive name is user configurable Up to 32 user configurable Supported Supported Supported defined as the spare drive specifically assigned to a logical drive 317 TABLE B 1 Global Spare Drive Auto Rebuild Onto Spare Drive Auto Scan of Replacement Drive Upon Manually Initiated Rebuild One Step Rebuild Onto Replacement Drive Auto Rebuild Onto Failed Drive Replacement Auto Recovery From Logical Drive Failure TABLE B 2 Feature Drive Low Level Format Drive Identification Drive Information Listing Drive Read Write Testing Configuration on Disk Save and Restore NVRAM to and From Disks User Configurable Geometry Range Drive Motor Spin Up Drive Side Tag Command Queue Advanced Features Basic RAID Management Continued Supported the spare drive is available for all logical drives Supported Supported Supported Supported With no spare drive assigned the controller auto scans the failed drive and starts to rebuild automatically once
52. Logical Volume Limitations 148 Logical Drive and Logical Volume Partitions 149 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 RAID Expansion 149 Multilevel RAID Arrays 150 Spare Drives 150 Viewing the Logical Volume Status Table 151 Creating a Logical Volume 151 v To Create a Logical Volume 151 Deleting a Logical Volume 153 v To Delete a Logical Volume 153 Expanding a Logical Volume 154 v To Expand a Logical Volume 154 Host LUNs 155 Mapping Logical Drive Partitions to Host LUNs 156 Planning for 128 LUNs ona SCSI Array Optional 158 v ToCreate 128 LUNs 158 Planning for 1024 LUNs on an FC or SATA Array Optional Loop Mode Only 159 v To Create 1024 LUNs 159 Planning for 64 LUNs in Redundant FC or SATA Point to Point Configurations 160 Mapping a PartitiontoaLUN 161 Deleting a Host LUN Mapping 161 v To Delete a Host LUN Mapping 161 Creating Host Filter Entries FC and SATA Only 162 Determining a Host World Wide Name 162 v To Determine a WWN for the Solaris Operating System 162 v To Determine a WWN for the Linux Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 Operating System 163 Manually Adding WWN Entries Using the Host ID WWN Name List 164 Viewing and Modifying Host Filter Information 164 Contents ix v To View or Modify Host Filter Information 164 9 Physical Drives 167 Viewing the Status of a Physical Drive 168 v To View the Physical Drive Status Table 168 SCSI Drive IDs SCSI Only 169 FC Drive
53. Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs 111 Example of LUN Filtering 112 Example of Deleted Partitions 129 xxiii FIGURE 6 2 FIGURE 7 1 FIGURE 8 1 FIGURE 8 2 FIGURE 9 1 FIGURE 9 2 FIGURE 9 3 FIGURE 12 1 FIGURE 12 2 FIGURE 12 3 FIGURE 12 4 FIGURE 12 5 FIGURE 14 1 FIGURE 14 2 FIGURE A 1 FIGURE A 2 FIGURE A 3 FIGURE A 4 FIGURE A 5 FIGURE A 6 FIGURE A 7 FIGURE A 8 FIGURE A 9 FIGURE A 10 Expansion by Copy and Replace 141 Logical Volume Composed of Multiple Drives 148 Filing Cabinet Represents the SCSI or FC ID 157 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs_ 157 Flashing the Drive LED of a Selected Drive 177 Flashing All Drive LEDs to Detect a Defective Non Flashing Drive 178 Flashing All Drive LEDs Except a Selected Drive LED 178 View Peripheral Device Status 250 FC and SATA Cooling Fan Locations 254 Example of the SAF TE Device Status Window for a Single Bus Configuration 259 Example of SAF TE Device Status Window for a Split Bus Configuration 259 Cooling Fan Locations 260 Automatic Rebuild 300 Manual Rebuild 301 Logical Drive Including Multiple Physical Drives 304 Allocation of Drives in Logical Drive Configurations 306 Partitions in Logical Drive Configurations 307 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs 307 Mapping Partitions to LUNs Under an ID 308 RAID O Configuration 311 RAID 1 Configuration 312 RAID 1 0 Configuration 313 RAID 3 Configuration 314 RAID 5 Configuration 3
54. Memory is Now Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config Memory is now sufficient to support current configuration Force Controller Write Through on Trigger Cause An environmental trigger event occurred that caused the controller to switch the cache policy to write through see the following message Controller Default Write Policy Restore The environmental event that caused the cache policy switch see above message was corrected and the previous write policy was reestablished Appendix E Event Messages 34 Drive Events Physical drive event messages include the following I 2 lt a gt z eS r V CHL _ ID _ SCSI Target ALERT Unexpected Select Timeout Drive SCSI target select timeout The specified hard drive cannot be selected by the controller The drive has been removed or the cabling termination canister is out of order CHL _ ID _ SCSI Target ALERT Gross Phase Signal Error Detected Drive side SCSI phase signal abnormality detected CHL ID _ SCSI Target ALERT Unexpected Disconnect Encountered Drive side SCSI target unexpected disconnect detected CHL ID _ SCSI Target ALERT Timeout Waiting for I O to Complete Drive side SCSI target I O timeout Possible drive side cabling termination and canister connection abnormal or drive malfunctioning CHh ID SCSI Target ALERT SCS Parity CRC Error Detected SCSI parity CRC error detected while communicating with the specified hard drive
55. Status Window for a Single Bus Configuration The SAF TE protocol does not support a split bus configuration and recognizes only one bus half the drives if you have a split bus configuration As a result in a 12 drive split bus configuration you see the message Unknown for six drives on one channel but you see the ID numbers for the six drives on the other channel as shown in FIGURE 12 4 Note See Viewing the Status of a Physical Drive on page 168 for instructions on how to determine whether you have all slots filled in a split bus configuration Froduct ID StorEdge 3318 Revision Level 1168 i 3636324134430 A Operational Operational Power Supply A Operational and On Power Supply 1 Operational and On Sensor 68 Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor e fee ET a a By jal ET pfii Gd Pt emt OFF or No Speaker Drive Slot B Unknown FIGURE 12 4 Example of SAF TE Device Status Window for a Split Bus Configuration Identifying Fans SCSI Only You can view the status of SAF TE components including the pair of fans located in each power supply module A pair of fans is identified in the SAF TE Device Status window as Cooling Fan 0 or Cooling Fan 1 Chapter 12 Peripheral Devices 259 If a fan fails and the Status field does not display the Operational value you must replace the power supply module and fan Cooling elements in the status table can be identified for replacement as shown in TABLE 12 2
56. Supported Yes Cache memory is dynamically allocated not fixed Supported Supported Workload can be flexibly divided between different controllers by assigning logical drives to different controllers Supported Channel modes are configurable as HOST or DRIVE in both single controller and redundant controller mode Firmware upgrade can be downloaded to the primary controller and then be adopted by both controllers In the event of controller failure a replacement controller running a different version of firmware can restore a redundant array with a failed controller Different firmware versions can be autosynchronized later Description Supported Can be performed periodically by the user to ensure that bad sectors do not cause data loss in the event of drive failure Supported Automatic reassignment of bad blocks Supported The battery backup solutions provide long lasting battery support to the cache memory when power failure occurs The unwritten data in the cache memory can be committed to drive media when power is restored 320 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 TABLE B 6 Verification on Normal Writes Verification on Rebuild Writes Verification on LD Initialization Writes Drive SMART Support Clone Failing Drive TABLE B 7 Security Feature Password Protection User Configurable Password Validation Timeout TABLE B 8 Feature SAF TE and SES Support
57. TB lt 65536 default 64 default variable default Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 95 After settings are changed they apply to all logical drives in the chassis Note Refer to your operating system documentation for limitations on device sizes v To Change Cylinder and Head Settings 1 Choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration Sector Ranges Variable and then choose Yes to confirm your choice 2 Choose Head Ranges 64 Heads and then choose Yes to confirm your choice 3 Choose Cylinder Ranges lt 65536 and then choose Yes to confirm your choice v To Create a Logical Drive Note To reassign drives and add local or global spare drives on your preconfigured array you must first unmap and then delete the existing logical drives For more information about deleting a logical drive see Deleting Logical Drives on page 81 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives Unassigned logical drives show a RAID level of NONE 96 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 2 Select the first available unassigned logical drive LG You can create as many as 32 logical drives using physical drives on any loop If mixed drive support is enabled a menu of drive types is displayed If mixed drive support is disabled proceed to t
58. To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID on page 56 for SCSI arrays See To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID on page 91 for FC or SATA arrays The IDs assigned to controllers take effect only after the controller is reset 8 Delete default logical drives and create new logical drives as required See Deleting Logical Drives on page 49 and Creating Logical Drives on page 57 for SCSI arrays See Deleting Logical Drives on page 81 and Creating Logical Drives on page 95 for FC or SATA arrays 9 Optional In dual controller configurations only assign logical drives to the secondary controller to load balance the two controllers See Controller Assignment on page 68 for a SCSI array See Controller Assignment on page 105 for FC or SATA arrays 10 Optional Partition the logical drives See Partitions on page 70 for SCSI arrays See Partitions on page 107 for Fibre Channel and SATA arrays 11 Map each logical drive partition to an ID on a host channel For more information see Mapping a Partition to a Host LUN on page 72 for SCSI arrays Note Each operating system has a method for recognizing storage devices and LUNs and might require the use of specific commands or the modification of specific files Be sure to check the information for your operating system to ensure that you have performed the necessary procedures For information about different operating system procedures re
59. To Enable and Disable Network Protocols From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Communication Parameters Network Protocol Support to display the list of network protocols you can enable or disable and show the current status of each protocol The following sample configuration is appropriate for most situations e TELNET Enabled means that telnet access to the IP address is enabled Note If you enable telnet access users connecting to the array using telnet are prompted for a password If a password has been set for the controller type it at that time If no password has been set press Return m HTTP Disabled means that the Hypertext Transport Protocol access is disabled m HTTPS Disabled means that the Secure Hypertext Transport Protocol access is disabled m FTP Disabled means that File Transfer Protocol access is disabled Note If you enable FTP access users connecting to the array using FTP are prompted for a password If a password has been set for the controller type it at that time If no password has been set press Return m SSH Disabled means that Secure Shell protocol access is disabled Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 211 m PriAgentAll Enabled means that an important internal communication protocol used by the controller is enabled This protocol must remain enabled for Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and the Sun StorEdge CLI to receive informa
60. View and Edit Host LUNs User Defined Parameter FC and SATA Default Setting SCSI Default Setting Host LUN IDs 16 IDs per channel maximum in loop 2 IDs per channel maximum mode 1 ID per channel in point to Channel 1 ID 0 primary point mode Channel 1 ID NA secondary Channel 0 ID 40 primary Channel 3 ID NA primary Channel 1 ID 42 secondary Channel 4 ID 44 primary Channel 5 ID 46 secondary Channel 3 ID 1 secondary TABLE D 4 Drive Parameters View and Edit Drives FC and SATA Default User Defined Parameter Setting SCSI Default Setting Range of Values FC Drive ID Switch Settings 0 0 0 7 332 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 TABLE D 5 User Defined Parameter Host Channel Settings Drive Channel Settings Sync Transfer Clock Wide Transfer Parity Check FC and SATA Default Setting 0 1 4 5 Host Channels 2 and 3 80 MHz Enabled Enabled Channel Parameters View and Edit Channels SCSI Default Setting 1 3 Host Channels 0 and 2 80 MHz Enabled Enabled Range of Values Vary by product Vary by product Do not change this parameter 2 5 MHz to 80 MHz and Async Do not change this parameter Enabled Disabled Do not change this parameter Disabled Enabled Default Configuration Parameters The parameters in the following tables can be set using the View and Edit Configuration Parameters menu Introducing Def
61. _ resides may have occurred Channel Notifications CHL LIP __ Detected Fibre Loop LIP issued on CHL _ CHL SCSI Host Channel Notification SCSI Bus Reset Issued SCSI bus reset issued on CHL _ CHL NOTICE Fibre Channel Loop Connection Restored CHL _ loop connection restored Logical Drive Events Logical drive event messages often begin with the letters LG an abbreviation for Logical Group that identifies the logical drive number to which the message applies Logical drive event messages include the following Appendix E Event Messages 357 Logical Drive Alerts LG Logical Drive ALERT CHL _ ID _ SCSI Drive Missing A member hard drive in the specified logical drive is missing LG _ Logical Drive ALERT CHL _ ID _ Drive Failure A member hard drive in the specified logical drive has failed LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Creation Aborted The creation process of logical drive LG_ is aborted LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Creation Failed The creation process of logical drive LG_ has failed LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Initialization Failed The initialization process of logical drive LG_ has failed LG Logical Drive ALERT Expansion Failed A member drive or other hardware failed bad blocks were encountered or the user cancelled the operation LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Rebuild Aborted The rebuilding operation on logical drive LG_ is aborted 358 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Use
62. a media error while reading from the drive platter it retries the previous reading or recalibrates the head When the drive encounters a bad block on the media it reassigns the bad block to a spare block However all of this takes time The time required to perform these operations can vary between brands and models of drives During SCSI bus arbitration a device with higher priority can use the bus first A device with lower priority sometimes receives a SCSI I O timeout when devices of higher priority continue to use the bus To Choose Drive I O Timeout From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Drive I O Timeout to display a list of timeout intervals Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 237 2 Select a timeout interval and then choose Yes to confirm your choice This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 3 Choose Yes to reset the controller Configuring the Maximum Tag Count Tag Command Queuing The maximum tag count is the maximum number of tags that can be sent to each drive at the same time Each drive has built in cache that is used to sort all of the I O requests tags that are sent to the drive so the drive can finish the r
63. amp Sun microsystems Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide Sun Microsystems Inc www sun com Part No 817 3711 16 May 2006 Revision A Submit comments about this document at http www sun com hwdocs feedback Copyright 2002 2006 Dot Hill Systems Corporation and others 2200 Faraday Avenue Suite 100 Carlsbad California 92008 USA All rights reserved Sun Microsystems Inc and Dot Hill Systems Corporation might have intellectual property rights relating to technology embodied in this poo or document In particular and without limitation these intellectual property rights might include one or more of the U S patents isted at http www sun com patents and one or more additional patents or pending patent applications in the U S and other countries This product or document is distributed under licenses restricting its use copying distribution and decompilation No part of this product or document might be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Sun and its licensors if any Third party software is copyrighted and licensed from Sun suppliers Parts of the product might be derived from Berkeley BSD systems licensed from the University of California UNIX is a registered trademark in the U S and in other countries exclusively licensed through X Open Company Ltd Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo Sun StorEdge AnswerBook2 docs sun com and Solaris are trade
64. back or write through 227 status 12 cache optimization FC and SATA 82 cache optimization SCSI 50 caching parameters 227 capacities maximum 23 channel event messages 354 channel status table 290 channels default parameters 20 333 default settings SCSI 54 defining 305 deleting host IDs 197 drive IDs 198 ID ranges FC and SATA 92 setting host and drive FC and SATA 86 setting host and drive SCSI 54 setting termination SCSI 198 status table 196 transfer clock speed SCSI 199 transfer width SCSI 200 viewing and editing 195 chip information 201 clock speed SCSI 199 cloning a failing drive 179 cloning viewing status 184 COM port baud rate 208 communication parameters 208 concurrent host LUN connections maximum 230 concurrent rebuild 302 395 396 configuration saving NVRAM to disk FC and SATA 122 saving NVRAM to disk SCSI 78 configuration parameters 207 configurations adding physical drives to logical drives 135 creating 1024 LUNs in loop mode 159 DAS loop example FC SATA 39 default parameters 333 default parameters that should not change 343 drive side parameters 236 expanding the capacity of logical drives 131 identifying a failed drive 176 loop 94 234 maximum number of drives 22 maximum number of logical drives and LUNs 22 other default parameters 339 point to point 234 point to point FC and SATA 94 redundant point to point confi
65. battery is bad or missing The LED blinks green if the battery is charging and is solid green when the battery is fully charged 283 Battery Status Battery status is displayed at the top of the initial firmware screen BAT status displays somewhere in the range from BAD to charging to fully charged For maximum life lithium ion batteries are not recharged until the charge level is very low indicated by a status of Automatic recharging at this point takes very little time A battery module whose status shows one or more signs can support cache memory for 72 hours As long as one or more signs are displayed your battery is performing correctly TABLE 14 1 Battery Status Indicators Battery Display Description a Discharged the battery is automatically recharged when it reaches this state Adequately charged to maintain cache memory for 72 hours or more in case of power loss Automatic recharging occurs when the battery status drops below this level 90 charged adequate to maintain cache memory for 72 hours or more in case of power loss 92 charged adequate to maintain cache memory for 72 hours or more in case of power loss 95 charged adequate to maintain cache memory for 72 hours or more in case of power loss Over 97 charged adequate to maintain cache memory for 72 hours or more in case of power loss Your lithium ion battery should be changed every tw
66. blocks in drives 143 one time 143 priority 143 terminating 143 using on individual drives 188 messages controller events 346 drive 350 event 345 logical drive events 357 messages event types 345 messages See also event messages MISSING drive status 289 mixed drive support enabling and disabling FC and SATA 85 N naming a controller 245 naming a logical drive FC and SATA 107 Index 399 naming a logical drive SCSI 69 navigation keys 15 network protocol support 211 NEW DRV drive status 289 node name 172 NVRAM restoring configuration from disk 280 saving configuration to disk 276 saving configuration to disk FC and SATA 122 saving configuration to disk SCSI 78 O offline initialization FC and SATA 102 offline initialization SCSI 64 online initialization FC and SATA 102 online initialization SCSI 64 optimization modes FC and SATA 82 SCSI 50 random and sequential FC and SATA 83 random and sequential SCSI 51 verifying and changing FC and SATA 83 verifying and changing SCSI 51 over temp controller shutdown 265 over temperature battery limit 284 P parameters communication 208 configuration 207 controller 245 disk array 242 drive side 236 host side 229 host side FC and SATA 94 peripheral device type 232 redundant controller 244 summary of default 331 parity checking 137 enabling and disabling reporting inconsistent 139 overwrit
67. cache configuration It does not save LUN mapping information The NVRAM configuration file can restore all configuration settings but does not rebuild logical drives Note A logical drive must exist for the controller to write NVRAM content onto it To Save a Configuration to NVRAM Choose system Functions Controller maintenance Save nvram to disks and choose Yes to save the contents of NVRAM to disk A prompt confirms that the NVRAM information has been successfully saved To restore the configuration see Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk on page 280 If you want to save and restore all configuration data including LUN mapping information use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service or the Sun StorEdge CLI in addition to saving your NVRAM controller configuration to disk The information saved this way can be used to rebuild all logical drives and therefore can be used to completely duplicate an array configuration to another array Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for information about the save configuration and load configuration features Refer to the sccli man page or to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide for information about the reset nvramand download controller configuration commands Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 123 124 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAP
68. charge percentage _ Go Appendix E Event Messages 37 374 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 APPENDIX F SNMP Management Using HP OpenView HP OpenView is a complete enterprise network management maintenance and monitoring solution Included with the HP OpenView software are tools for sending SNMP GET and SET messages and tools for listening for SNMP traps This appendix discusses using HP OpenView for SNMP management with Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays Topics covered include Loading MIBs on page 376 Configuring Events on page 379 Viewing and Setting System Group Objects on page 381 Viewing Enterprise Objects on page 384 375 Loading MIBs By itself OpenView can listen for and dispatch SNMP traps However MIBs are supplied to make the best use of the management feature Note The agent ini file must be configured with trap destinations in order to receive traps See To Create and Save the NPC Configuration File agent ini on page 223 It is assumed that HP OpenView has discovered the Sun StorEdge 3000 family nodes Refer to your HP OpenView documentation for details on node discovery On Solaris type the following command to launch OpenView opt OV bin ovw amp From the Root dialog navigate to the network segment on which the Sun StorEdge nodes reside The following screen shows a typical network segment displayed by OpenView wit
69. controller can reconstruct data from a failed drive and write it to a standby or replacement drive A logical drive that provides protection of data in the event of a single drive failure by employing RAID 1 1 0 3 or 5 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL is implemented as either a loop or a Fabric A loop can contain up to 126 nodes accessible through only one or two servers A cost effective gigabit communications link deployed across a wide range of hardware Fibre channel adapters of a host computer server or workstation Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Fibre hubs FRU Gbyte GBIC global spare group HBA hot spare hot swappable ID initialization JBOD LAN LD logical drive An Arbitrated Loop Hub is a wiring concentrator Arbitrated means that all nodes communicating over this Fibre loop are sharing a 100 Mbyte sec segment Whenever more devices are added to a single segment the bandwidth available to each node is further divided A loop configuration allows different devices in the loop to be configured in a token ring style With a Fibre hub a Fibre loop can be rearranged in a star like configuration because the hub itself contains port bypass circuitry that forms an internal loop Bypass circuits can automatically reconfigure the loop once a device is removed or added without disrupting the physical connection to other devices field replaceable u
70. controller for event notifications It consists of three components a SNMP traps to be received by SNMP based monitoring software m Email messages m Broadcast messages The array can send SNMP traps about mass storage events to an enterprise management console that uses SNMP such as HP OpenView or Sun Management Center It can also send events as email messages or broadcast them to a number of servers You specify the SNMP traps email messages and broadcast messages you want to use and configure the recipients of these events by creating a text file called agent ini and storing it in reserved space on your array Note The agent ini file must be configured with trap destinations in order to receive traps See To Create and Save the NPC Configuration File agent ini on page 223 222 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 10 11 IZ 13 For information about the alternative approach of configuring Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to use SNMP refer to the Email and SNMP appendix of the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide To Create and Save the NPC Configuration File agent ini Enable FTP on your array by choosing view and edit Configuration parameters Communication Parameters Network Protocol Support FTP and verifying that it is enabled Create a new text file using a plain text editor Type in the necessary info
71. controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 10 Choose Yes to reset the controller Channel ID Ranges The ID values of 0 to 125 are available when you assign a channel ID These IDs are accessed in the eight ranges shown in TABLE 5 1 TABLE 5 1 ID Values Assigned to Each ID Range Range Available ID Numbers 0 to 15 16 to 31 32 to 47 48 to 63 64 to 79 80 to 95 96 to 111 N AoA a A QU N eae O 112 to 125 Once an ID is assigned to a channel if you decide to add an ID the only IDs that are initially displayed are those in the range of the first ID you assigned For example if you initially assign an ID of 40 to host channel 0 when you add IDs to host channel 0 only IDs in Range 2 32 to 47 are available v To Assign an ID From a Different Range 1 Choose view and edit channelS to display the Channel Status table 92 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Select the channel whose ID range you want to change Choose view and edit scsi Id Select a controller Note To change an ID you must first delete it and then add the new ID Choose Delete Channel SCSI ID and then choose Yes to confirm the deletion This change does not take effect until the controller is reset
72. controller locations however the primary controller and secondary controller locations can occur in either slot and depend on controller resets and controller replacement operations TABLE 3 11 summarizes the primary and secondary host IDs assigned to logical drives 0 and 1 based on FIGURE 3 1 and FIGURE 3 2 36 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 TABLE 3 11 Example Point to Point Configuration With Two Logical Drives in a Dual Controller Array Logical LUN Channel Primary ID Secondary Task Drive IDs Number Number ID Number Map 32 partitions of LG 0 to CH 0 LG 0 0 31 0 40 N A Duplicate map 32 partitions of LG0 LG 0 0 31 1 41 N A to CH 1 Map 32 partitions of LG 1 to CH 4 LG 1 0 31 4 N A 50 Duplicate map 32 partitions of LG1 LG1 0 31 5 N A 51 to CH 5 To Set Up a Typical Point to Point SAN Configuration Perform the following steps which are described in more detail later in this guide to set up a typical point to point SAN configuration based on FIGURE 5 1 and FIGURE 5 2 Check the position of installed small form factor pluggable transceivers SFPs Move them as necessary to support the connections needed You need to add SFP connectors to support more than four connections between servers and a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array For example add two SFP connectors to support six connections and add four SFP connectors to support eight connections Connect expansion u
73. detected on the channel path used for redundant controller communications CHL _ Drive SCSI Channel ALERT Unexpected Disconnect Encountered Unexpected disconnect detected on the drive channel CHL _ CHL RCC Channel ALERT Timeout Waiting for I O to Complete I O timeout on the channel path used for redundant controller communications Possible channel path cabling termination and canister connection abnormal or malfunctioning CHL _ Drive SCSI Channel ALERT Timeout Waiting for I O to Complete I O timeout on the drive channel path CHL _ 354 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 CHL _ RCC Channel ALERT SCSI Parity CRC Error Detected SCSI parity CRC error detected on the channel path used for redundant controller communications CHL _ SCSI Drive Channel ALERT SCSI Parity CRC Error Detected SCSI parity CRC error detected on the drive channel path CHL _ CHL RCC Channel ALERT Unit Attention Received Unit attention received on the channel path used for redundant controller communications CHL SCSI Drive Channel ALERT Unit Attention Received Unit attention received on the drive channel CHL _ CHL RCC Channel ALERT Data Overrun Underrun Detected Data overrun or underrun detected on the channel path used for redundant controller communications CHL Drive SCSI Channel ALERT Data Overrun Underrun Detected Data overrun or underrun detected on the drive channel CHL _ CHL RCC C
74. drive channel IDs 198 drive check time periodic 239 drive event messages 350 drive firmware 293 drive IDs FC and SATA 171 drive IDs SCSI 169 drive swap check time periodic 240 drives adding and deleting entries SCSI 175 adding to a logical drive 135 cloning a failing 179 cloning status 184 combining FC and SATA 85 default parameters 332 337 flashing to identify good or bad 177 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 global or local spare identified 289 I O timeout 237 identifying failed 176 local and global spare 5 maximum number per array 22 media scan for bad blocks 143 motor spin up 236 number supported by RAID level 309 periodic check time 239 perpetual clone 181 read write testing 191 reformatting 190 replacing after cloning 180 reserved space 192 revision number serial number and disk capacity 172 scanning SCSI 174 status table 168 USED DRV drive status 289 vendor ID 289 viewing available FC and SATA 84 viewing available SCSI 52 drive side parameters 236 DRV FAILED status 286 DRV MISS status 286 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP E email using SNMP to send event messages 222 error statistics Fibre Channel 268 error statistics loopback 268 event logs viewing 281 event messages 345 channel 354 controller 346 drive 350 logical drive 357 sending using SNMP 222 types of
75. edit channelS menu provides two menu options to change the default drive SCSI IDs m Primary controller scsi id m Secondary controller scsi id These menu options are normally not used However when reassigning drive channels as Drive RCCOM for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array it is necessary to assign a new secondary controller ID See To Configure Channels 4 and 5 as Additional DRV RCCOM Channels on page 88 for more information Caution If you edit a drive channel SCSI ID you might create conflicts with the controller communication channels and create confusion tracking the status of drive IDs gt Setting SCSI Channel Termination SCSI Only Reserved Do not use this menu option It is reserved and should be used only by qualified technicians Typically the default setting is not changed 198 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 v To Enable or Disable SCSI Channel Termination SCSI Only 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS 2 Select the channel for which you want the terminator enabled or disabled 3 Choose scsi Terminator and choose Yes to change the setting The controller is reset and the channel configuration is updated Setting Transfer Clock Speed SCSI Only Typically the default setting for sync transfer Clock is not changed for host or drive channels Do not use this menu o
76. example BROADCAST ENABLED 1 SEVERITY 1 RECEIVERI 192 RECEIVER2 192 RECEIVER3 192 RECEIVER4 192 agent ini File Parameters The parameters you can specify in the agent ini file are defined below The configuration file is comprised of three major sections SNMP Email and Broadcast Each notifying method can be separately enabled or disabled The SNMP_TRAP Section SNMP_TRAP section header ENABLED 1 enabled 0 disabled applies to this section only SEVERITY level of severity of the messages to be received 1 covers events of all levels 3 sends only the most serious events m 1 notification m 2 warning m 3 alert Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 225 COMMUNITY SNMP community name of the destination receiver RECEIVER The IP address of the receiver computer Add additional lines to specify multiple receivers Up to 4 receivers can be configured The EMAIL Section EMAIL section header ENABLED 1 enabled 0 disabled applies to this section only SEVERITY level of severity of the messages to be received notification 2 warning 3 alert 1 covers events of all levels 3 sends only the most serious events SUBJECT add a topic to email This can be used to specify the location of the RAID system if there are many SENDER_MATL_BOX a valid email address to be used as the from part of the email message SMTP_SERVER SMTP ser
77. for a logical drive determines the channels to which the physical drives are assigned If you want drives to be mirrored over two channels select them in the appropriate order For example The first drive you select is assigned to channel 0 ID 0 The second drive you select is assigned to channel 1 ID 0 The third drive you select is assigned to channel 0 ID 1 a a E m The fourth drive you select is assigned to channel 1 ID 1 98 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Note Logical drives that include both Fibre Channel drives and SATA drives are not supported If you have enabled mixed drive support only the appropriate drive types are displayed a Use the up and down arrow keys and press Return to select the drives you want to include in the logical drive An asterisk mark is displayed in the Chl Channel column of each selected physical drive ena 1o size cn evecare ono status vendor and Product 1D my EEE eee eee eee eee 34732 200MB MONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G l C ee eS SAES EEE A SE 8 34732 260NB NONE FRMI DRU SEAGATE 1T336753FSUN36G aa 34732 20 MB NONE RMI DRU SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G b To deselect a drive press Return again on the selected drive The asterisk marking that drive disappears c After all physical drives have been selected for the logical drive
78. for newly mapped LUNs on hosts in the Solaris 8 and Solaris 9 operating system For additional operating system information see the Installation Operation and Service manual for your Sun StorEdge 3000 family array v To Create Device Files for Newly Mapped LUNs 1 To create device files type usr sbin devftsadm v 2 To display the new LUNs type format 3 If the format command does not recognize the newly mapped LUNs perform a configuration reboot reboot r Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 77 Saving Configuration NVRAM toa Disk The controller configuration information is stored in non volatile RAM NVRAM When you save it the information is stored in the disk reserved space of all drives that have been configured into logical drives Back up the controller configuration information whenever you change the array s configuration Saving NVRAM controller configuration to a file provides a backup of controller configuration information such as channel settings host IDs and cache configuration It does not save LUN mapping information The NVRAM configuration file can restore all configuration settings but does not rebuild logical drives Note A logical drive must exist for the controller to write NVRAM content onto it v To Save a Configuration to NVRAM Choose system Functions Controller maintenance Save nvram to disks and choose Yes to save the contents o
79. have been mapped save the updated configuration to nonvolatile memory See Saving Configuration NVRAM to a Disk on page 122 for more information Solaris operating system only For the Solaris operating system to recognize a LUN you must first manually write the label using the Auto configure option of the format 1M utility as described in To Label a LUN on page 121 To Create Host Filters FC and SATA Arrays Only From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns A list of available channels and their associated controllers is displayed Select a channel and host ID If the Logical Drive and Logical Volume menu options are displayed choose Logical Drive Select the LUN for which you want to create the host filter A list of available logical drives is displayed Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 115 116 5 Select the logical drive LD for which you want to create a host filter 6 Select the partition for which you want to create a host filter 7 Choose Create Host Filter Entry Add from current device list lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes T CHL 6 ID 486 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 50 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Mame List LU LD DRU Partition Size MB LD eenece This step automatically performs a discovery of the
80. information for devices on the network you can specify the appropriate protocol instead of typing in the information manually Note If you assign an IP address to an array to manage it out of band for security reasons consider using an IP address on a private network rather than a publicly routable network Using the controller firmware to set a password for the controller limits unauthorized access to the array Changing the firmware s Network Protocol Support settings can provide further security by disabling the ability to remotely connect to the array using individual protocols such as HTTP HTTPS telnet FTP and SSH Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 209 v To Set an Array s IP Address To set the IP address subnet mask and gateway addresses of the RAID controller perform the following steps 1 Access the array through the COM port on the controller module of the array 2 Choose view and edit Configuration parameter Communication Parameters gt Internet Protocol TCP IP 3 Select the chip hardware address 4 Choose Set IP Address gt Address 5 Configure the Ethernet port You can specify an IP address and the related Netmask and Gateway addresses manually If your network is configured so that system addresses can be automatically provided by a DHCP server or RARP server you can enable this automatic provisioning by typing either DHCP or RARP in place of the IP address To configure
81. is underway you can view the progress of the cloning and the identity of the source and target drives You can also cancel the cloning process v To View the Status of a Cloning Operation 1 Choose view and edit Drives from the Main Menu 2 Select the target drive whose status is CLONING 3 Choose clone Failing drive to identify the source drive that is being cloned and to see options for displaying progress or cancelling the operation SizeCMB gt Speed LG DRVU Status Yendor and Product ID c Se eae EEFE ECHI A CLONING SEAGATE 1T336753FSUN3JEG O y O Uiew drive information a MH LINE SEAGATE 1T336753FSUH36G Identif 4 scsi drive clone Failing drive ON LINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G Sg eee oe eee ee MT DRU SEAGATE S T336753FSUN36G Uiew clone progress Abort clone H LIHE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G UH StorEdge 3510F A Note With the SMART Detect and Perpetual Clone option the spare drive stays mirrored to the source drive the drive whose failure has been predicted but does not replace it until the source drive fails While the spare drive is mirroring the source drive and no other spare drive is available any drive failure forces the spare drive to give up the mirrored data and resume its original role It becomes a spare drive again and rebuilds the failed drive 184 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Note If you are viewing an active monitoring session with
82. one of these arrays are noted in the section headings as SCSI Only or FC and SATA Only Configuring Channels as Host or Drive This menu option is described in Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 m For SCSI arrays see Channel Settings on page 54 m For FC or SATA arrays see Channel Settings on page 86 Creating Additional Host IDs This menu option is described in Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 m For SCSI arrays see To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID on page 56 m For FC or SATA arrays see To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID on page 91 Deleting a Host Channel SCSI ID This section describes how to delete a host channel SCSI ID To Delete a Host Channel SCSI ID From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS Select the host channel with the SCSI ID you want to delete Choose view and edit scsi Id to display existing IDs Select the ID you want to delete Chapter 10 Host and Drive Channels 197 5 Choose Delete Channel SCSI ID and then choose Yes to confirm the deletion This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 6 Choose Yes to reset the controller Drive Channel SCSI IDs When a drive channel or DRV RCCOM channel is selected the view and
83. or as currently part of a logical drive If you attempt to change disk reserved space on a drive that is a member of a logical drive the controller displays an error message Since disk reserved space is a feature of the physical drive rather than of a logical drive the information in disk reserved space is not RAID protected v To Remove Reserved Space from a Drive 1 Choose view and edit Drives from the Main Menu 2 Select the drive whose reserve space you want to change Ensure that the drive is not part of a logical drive 3 Choose disk Reserved space and then choose Yes to remove the reserve space The disk Reserved space menu option now indicates that the reserved space is unformatted v To Specity Disk Reserved Space 1 Choose view and edit Drives from the Main Menu The SCSI drive status table is displayed 192 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 2 Select the drive whose reserve space you want to restore The drive s status will be NEW DRV 3 Choose disk Reserved space 256 MB to allocate reserved space and then choose Yes to confirm The drive s status changes to FRMT DRV Chapter 9 Physical Drives 193 194 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 1 0 Host and Drive Channels This chapter explains how to view and edit channels for Fibre Channel SATA and SCSI arrays Note Wher
84. own sensors that report its overall status and its overall temperature Chapter 12 Peripheral Devices 251 3 Select other attributes in which you are interested and press Return to learn more about the SES device Selecting the Element Descriptor in the following illustration displays the descriptive name of the element view and edit Logical drives view an view an view an view an view an rameters lement Descriptorjie Qverall Status T Element Enclosure Descriptor wt Element I A Element STATUS LOCATION G Element Element Failback Complete Element Enclosure Device Channel 2 ID i2 In this case the descriptor is Disk Drives view an view an view an view an view an Fame ters 5 Overall Status v eT Element wt S Element A Element STATUS LOCATION G Element Element Failback Complete Element Enclosure Device Channel 2 ID 12 Identifying Fans FC and SATA Only You can view the status of SES components including the pair of fans located in each power supply module A fan is identified in the SES Device menus as a cooling element 252 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 v To View the Status of Each Fan 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices View Peripheral Device Status SES Device Cooling element In some cases you have to drill down to display information about componen
85. panel LED flashes green You can change the priority of a particular media scan operation to specify the frequency of drive scanning To Terminate a Media Scan From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives Select the logical drive that is currently being scanned Choose Media Scan Abort Media Scan and then choose Yes to terminate the media scan To Perform a Media Scan From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives Select a logical drive Choose Media scan to display a menu of media scan options Optional You can determine the priority of media scanning as related to other CPU tasks Chapter 6 Logical Drives 143 a Choose Media Scan Priority The Media Scan Priority menu is displayed a Low Media scan is not performed until other tasks have been completed a Normal Media scan is typically performed within three seconds Improved Media scan is typically performed within one second a High Media scan is performed immediately b Select a priority 5 Optional Configure the media scan iteration count to specify whether the physical drives that make up the selected logical drive are checked one time or continuously by choosing Iteration Count and then choosing Yes to confirm the change 6 When media scan is satisfactorily configured press Escape and then choose Yes to begin the media scan The front panel LEDs for the drives being s
86. parameters gt Controller Parameters Set Controller Date and Time Time Zone to display the currently set time zone as an offset from Greenwich Mean Time GMT Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 247 2 Type the appropriate offset from Greenwich Mean Time for your location in the format hour minute hh mm and press Return Your time zone is specified as Greenwich Mean Time GMT followed by a plus or minus sign and the number of hours earlier or later your location is from the Greenwich mean time For instance the time zone setting for Japan is GMT 9 and the time zone for New York is GMT 4 or 5 depending on daylight savings lt Main Menu gt and edit Logical drives and edit logical Volumes and edit Host luns and edit Drives and edit channel Controller Name TECH FC LCD Title Display Controller Logo Pass Cont S DRA Default TimeZone GMT 88 868 New TimeZone GMT _ CT a a Date and Time v To Set the Controller Date and Time 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Controller Parameters Set Controller Date and Time Date and Time 2 Type the current date and time in the format MMDDhhmmyYYYY and press Return For example enter 072511052004 for 11 05 a m July 25 2004 view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives Controller Name TECH SCSI S
87. policy for individual logical drives using the Write policy menu option A logical drive s write policy can be changed at any time v To Configure a Logical Drive s Write Policy 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drive to display a list of logical drives in the Logical Drive Status table 2 Select the logical drive that you want to configure 3 Choose Write policy The following write policy options are displayed a Default default Chapter 6 Logical Drives 145 146 This menu option assigns the global write policy to the selected logical drive If the global setting for write policy is changed automatically changes the write policy for this logical drive As described in Cache Write Policy Guidelines on page 30 the array can be configured to dynamically switch write policy from write back cache to write through cache if specified events occur Write policy is only automatically switched for logical drives with write policy configured to Default See Event Trigger Operations on page 263 for more information Write Back This menu option assigns write back cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy a Write Through This menu option assigns write through cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy Change Write Policy Weite Back Weite Through 4 Choose a write policy option Change Write Policy Default Write Back Weite
88. provides RAID terminology and definitions used throughout the product documentation xxx Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Using UNIX Commands This document does not contain information on basic UNIX commands and procedures such as shutting down the system booting the system and configuring devices Refer to the following for this information m Software documentation that you received with your system m Solaris operating system documentation which is at hCCp docs sun com Shell Prompts Shell C shell C shell superuser Bourne shell and Korn shell Bourne shell and Korn shell superuser Prompt machine name machine name Preface XXXI Typographic Conventions Typeface Meaning Examples AaBbCc123 The names of commands files Edit your login file and directories on screen Use ls a to list all files a a You have mail AaBbCc123 What you type when contrasted su with on screen computer output password AaBbCc123 Book titles new words or terms Read Chapter 6 in the User s Guide words to be emphasized These are called class options Replace command line variables You must be superuser to do this with real names or values To delete a file type rm filename 1 The settings on your browser might differ from these settings Accessing Sun Documentation All Sun StorEdge 3000 family documentation is available online in both PDF and
89. redundant controller shows a status of Scanning This is correct behavior and enables the firmware to discover a second controller whenever it is added without the necessity of rebooting the primary controller a After booting the controllers autonegotiate and designate one controller as primary and the other controller as secondary m The two controllers behave as one primary controller Once redundancy takes effect configuration can be applied only to the primary controller The secondary controller then synchronizes with the configuration of the primary controller making the configurations of the two controllers exactly the same Caution Major upgrades of controller firmware or replacing a controller with one that has a significantly different version of firmware might involve differences in non volatile RAM NVRAM that require following special upgrade procedures For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide and to the release notes for your array The two controllers continuously monitor each other When either controller detects that the other controller is not responding the working controller immediately takes over and disables the failed controller m In an active to active configuration standard configuration you can assign any logical drive to either of the controllers and then map the logical configurations to host channel IDs and LUNs I O requests from a host computer are directed
90. reset A Clear state menu option enables you to wait until you are sure the drive problem has been corrected before clearing the Fatal Fail logical drive condition and rebuilding the logical drive if necessary 1 From the controller firmware s Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select the logical drive with the FATAL FAIL status and press Enter 3 Select Clear state 4 Choose Yes when the Back to degraded or Back to normal prompt is displayed After clearing the FATAL FAIL the status changes to DRV FAILED Copying and Replacing Drives With Drives of Larger Capacity For logical drives configured for RAID levels 0 3 and 5 you can copy and replace existing physical drives with drives of the same or higher capacity Because the logical drive uses the capacity size of its smallest size all drives must be replaced with drives of the same or higher capacity For example as shown in FIGURE 6 2 a logical drive that originally contains three 36 Gbyte physical drives can be replaced with three new 73 Gbyte physical drives Note To use the additional capacity provided by drives with higher capacity you must expand the capacity as explained in To Expand a Logical Drive on page 131 140 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 2 a a e 36 GB 36 GB 36 GB New drive RAID 5 72 GB 73 GB 20G 73 GB 73 GB 73 GB RAID 5 146 GB FIGURE 6 2 Ex
91. scan feature sequentially checks a physical drive in a logical drive block by block for bad blocks If a bad block is encountered the controller rebuilds the data from the bad block onto a good block if one is available on the physical drive If no good blocks are available on the physical drive the controller designates the physical drive BAD generates an event message and if a spare drive is available will begin rebuilding data from the bad physical drive onto the spare If a spare drive is not immediately available you can add a physical drive assign it as a global spare and then manually clone the failing drive to the spare See m Assigning a Global Spare on page 173 m Cloning a Failing Drive on page 179 In addition to performing media scan on individual drives you can select a logical drive and change media scan settings for all physical drives in that logical drive See Scanning Drives for Bad Blocks on page 143 for more information v To Perform a Media Scan You can perform media scans on an individual physical drive assigned to a logical drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select a physical drive that is part of a logical drive 3 Choose mediA scan to display a menu of media scan options 4 Optional You can determine the priority of media scan as related to other CPU tasks a Choose Media scan priority The Media Scan Priority menu is displayed
92. spare drive is present in the array the logical drive begins an automatic rebuild of a degraded logical drive when the firmware detects replacement of the bad drive The drive swap check time is the interval at which the controller checks to see whether a failed drive has been replaced When a logical drive s member drive fails the controller detects the failed drive at the specified time interval Once the failed drive has been swapped with a drive that has adequate capacity to rebuild the logical drive the rebuild begins automatically The default is Disabled When Disabled is selected the controller does not auto detect the replacement of a failed drive The controller is then not able to detect any drive removal that occurs after the controller has been powered on The controller detects drive removal only when a host attempts to access the data on the drive Note This feature requires system resources and can impact performance Note The periodic auto detect failure drive swap check does not force the scanning of a drive that has been added to a SCSI array See Scanning Drives SCSI Only on page 174 for more information 240 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 v To Set the Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time A list
93. stripe size for a logical drive you are creating on a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array See Optional Configure the logical drive stripe size on page 103 for information about how to set the stripe size for a logical drive you are creating on a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 29 30 Cache Write Policy Guidelines The cache write policy determines when cached data is written to the disk drives The ability to hold data in cache while it is being written to disk can increase storage device speed during sequential reads Write policy options include write through and write back When write through cache is specified the controller writes the data to the disk drive before signaling the host operating system that the process is complete Write through cache has slower write operation and throughput performance than write back cache but it is safer with minimum risk of data loss on power failure Because a battery module is installed power is supplied to the data cached in memory and the data can be written to disk after power is restored When write back cache is specified the controller receives the data to write to disk stores it in the memory buffer and immediately sends the host operating system a signal that the write operation is complete before the data is actually written to the disk drive Write back caching improves
94. striping where data is broken into logical blocks and is striped across several drives Unlike other RAID levels there is no facility for redundancy In the event of a disk failure data is lost In block striping the total disk capacity is equivalent to the sum of the capacities of all drives in the array This combination of drives appears to the system as a single logical drive RAID 0 provides the highest performance It is fast because data can be simultaneously transferred to and from every disk in the array Furthermore reads and writes to separate drives can be processed concurrently Logical drive Physical disks BI ock 1 Blo 3 Block 3 E Block 4 Boas lt Srono gt Block 5 E Block 6 E Block 7 5 Er 8 FIGURE A 6 RAID 0 Configuration RAID 1 RAID 1 implements disk mirroring where a copy of the same data is recorded onto two drives By keeping two copies of data on separate disks data is protected against a disk failure If at any time a disk in the RAID 1 array fails the remaining good disk copy can provide all of the data needed thus preventing downtime In disk mirroring the total usable capacity is equivalent to the capacity of one drive in the RAID 1 array Thus combining two 1 Gbyte drives for example creates a single logical drive with a total usable capacity of 1 Gbyte This combination of drives appears to the system as a single logical drive Appendix A Basic RAID Con
95. task being performed e i on line initialization progress e I off line initialization progress e R rebuild progress e A add physical drive progress e P regenerate parity progress e S media scan progress E off line expansion progress e e on line expansion progress Gauge range Use or keys to change the gauge range of the transfer rate indicator when Show Transfer Rate Show Cache Status is selected The default is 10 Mbyte per second Navigation key help Explains the keyboard combinations that enable navigation of the interface The up and down arrow keys Enter or Return Ctrl L and the Escape key enable navigation For details see Navigating Firmware Menus on page 14 PC graphic ANSI mode Enters the Main Menu and operates in ANSI mode Terminal VT100 mode Enters the Main Menu and operates in VT100 mode PC graphic ANSI color mode Enters the Main Menu and operates in ANSI color mode Show transfer rate show cache Changes the current data transfer rate of communication status between the array and the connected hosts With I O running select this display option press Enter and then press the or key to increase or decrease the transfer rate gauge range The progress of only 8 9 processes are reported at one time To see complete progress results see Progress In dicators on page 17 t The progress of only 8 9 processes are reported at one time To see complete progress results
96. the Maximum Queued I O Count From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters Maximum Queued I O Count to display a list of values Select a value and then choose Yes to confirm your choice This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now Choose Yes to reset the controller Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 229 LUNs Per Host SCSI ID Use this function to change the number of LUNs supported per host SCSI ID Each time a host channel ID is added it supports the number of LUNS allocated in this setting no matter how many LUNs are actually mapped to it The default setting is 32 LUNs with a predefined range of 1 to 32 LUNs per logical drive available Note For the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array the maximum number of LUN assignments is 128 If you use the default setting of 32 LUNs per host ID you can only add four host channel IDs 4 x 32 128 If you want to allocate more than four host channel IDs you must set the LUNs per Host SCSI ID parameter to a value less than 32 v To Change the Number of LUNs Per Host SCSI ID 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters
97. the Write Back Cache Option Choose view and edit Configuration parameters Caching Parameters Write Back Cache and then choose Yes to confirm that you want to change the write back cache setting Setting Optimization m For SCSI arrays see Cache Optimization Mode SCSI on page 50 m For Fibre Channel and SATA arrays see Cache Optimization Mode FC and SATA on page 82 Setting Periodic Cache Flush Time Set Periodic Cache Flush Time so that the controller flushes cache to logical drive storage at specified intervals This safety measure prevents the accumulation of data in cache that could be lost in the event of power loss Note that setting this value to an interval of less than one minute 1 2 minor Continuous Sync may diminish performance v To Set Periodic Cache Flush Time 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Caching Parameters Periodic Cache Flush Time to display the intervals m Disabled Terminate periodic cache flush so the controller flushes cache only after data in cache is written to disk m Continuous Sync Continuously flush data from cache to logical drive storage m 1 2 min Flush cache to logical drive storage after each 30 second interval m 1 min Flush cache to logical drive storage after each one minute interval m 2 min Flush cache to logical drive storage after each two minute interval m 5 min Flush cache to logical drive storage af
98. the advantages of using a dual controller However you still need to disable the Write Back Cache in case one of the single controllers fails to avoid the risk of data corruption For this reason a dual controller configuration is preferable m For a single controller configuration the Peripheral Device Status shows a status of Scanning which indicates that the firmware is scanning for primary and secondary controller status and redundancy is enabled even though it is not used There is no performance impact m If you are using a single controller save your NVRAM after any configuration changes so that you can restore it in the event of a controller failure and replacement See Saving Your Configuration NVRAM to Disk on page 276 and Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk on page 280 for more information Caution Major upgrades of controller firmware or replacing a controller with one that has a significantly different version of firmware might involve differences in non volatile RAM NVRAM that require following special upgrade procedures For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide and to the release notes for your array Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 27 m Also keep a written record of your configuration including the firmware version number using tables similar to those found in Appendix C Major firmware upgrades or downgrades can require manually re
99. the battery is offline due to battery failure or a disconnected battery but you can set an event trigger to make this happen See Configuring the Battery Backup BBU Low Event or BBU Failed Event Trigger on page 264 for more information Checking Status Windows The status windows used to monitor and manage the array are described in the following sections m Logical Drive Status Table on page 285 m Physical Drive Status Table on page 288 m Channel Status Table on page 290 Logical Drive Status Table To check and configure logical drives from the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives and press Return lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit Drives view and edit channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Array 285 286 The status of all logical drives is displayed ie fiw aro sizecnm gt scars afefe parm saar coon C ee L 44006 GOOD S S S S e e S S o e eee TABLE 14 2 shows definitions and values for logical drive parameters TABLE 14 2 Parameters Displayed in the Logical Drive Status Window Parameter LG ID LV RAID SIZE MB Status1 COPYING CREATING GOOD DRV FAILED FATAL FAIL INCOMPLETE Descriptio
100. the decimal version of an arbitrated loop physical address AL_PA The lowest number loop ID is the lowest priority address on the loop Use the ID switch on the left front side of the expansion unit to set the loop IDs for the disk drives to different ranges of ID values so that the same disk IDs are not repeated on the same Fibre loop Caution An ID conflict can occur if the ID is changed while the expansion unit is in use or if it is not power cycled after the setting has been changed Change the switch ID only when the expansion unit is powered off or not in use Power the expansion unit on after the switch setting is changed or power cycle it if it is already powered up By default the ID switch on all RAID arrays is set to 0 so that the range of IDs is 0 to 11 for 12 drives IDs 12 15 are not used for drives By default the ID switch on all RAID expansion units is set to 1 The ID switch offers eight ID ranges Each set contains 16 IDs the last four IDs in each range are not used for drives except for the last set which contains 15 IDs the last three of which are not used These ranges are shown in TABLE 9 1 Refer to the Installation Operation and Service manual for your array to see the procedure for configuring the loop ID on your array TABLE 9 1 ID Switch Settings for FC Expansion Units ID Switch Setting Range of IDs 0 15 16 31 32 47 48 63 80 95 0 1 2 3 4 64 79 5 6 96 111 7 112 125
101. the failed drive has been replaced Supported When a user accidentally removes the wrong drive to cause the second drive failure of a one drive failed RAID 5 or RAID 3 logical drive switches off the controller puts the drive back and powers on the controller The logical drive is restored to one drive failed status Description Supported Supported Forces the drive to light the activity indicator so the user can recognize the correct drive Supported Supported Supported The logical drive information is recorded on drive media Supported Saves all the settings stored in the controller NVRAM to the logical drive members Sector 32 64 127 255 or Variable Head 64 127 255 or Variable Cylinder lt 1024 lt 32784 lt 65536 or Variable Supported The controller sends spin up start unit command to each drive at four second intervals Supported User adjustable up to 128 for each drive 318 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 TABLE B 2 Host Side Maximum Queued I O Count Maximum Concurrent Host LUN Connection Number of Tags Reserved for Each Host LUN connection Drive I O Timeout TABLE B 3 Feature Write Back and Write Through Cache Supported Memory Type Scatter Gather I O Sorting Variable Stripe Size TABLE B 4 RAID Expansion Feature On Line RAID Expansion RAID Expansion Add Drive RAID Expansion Copy and Replace Drives Cachin
102. to the primary or the secondary controller accordingly The total drive capacity can Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 be grouped into several logical drives and assigned to both controllers so that they share the workload This active to active configuration engages all array resources to actively maximize performance An active to standby configuration is also available but is not usually selected In this configuration assigning all the logical drives to one controller means that the other controller remains idle becoming active only if the primary controller fails Single Controller Guidelines Keep the following operation details in mind when configuring a single controller array m The controller must be the primary controller or the controller cannot operate The primary controller controls all logical drive and firmware operations Keep the controller as the primary controller at all times and assign all logical drives to the primary controller A secondary controller is used only in dual controller configurations for redistributed I O and for failover m Ina single controller configuration disable the Write Back Cache feature to avoid the possibility of data corruption in the event of a controller failure This has a negative effect on performance To avoid either issue use dual controllers Using two single controllers in a clustering environment with host based mirroring provides some of
103. to a logical drive on a SCSI array See To Assign a Logical Drive Name Optional on page 106 for the procedure for assigning a name to a logical drive on a FC or SATA array Rebuilding a Logical Drive If no spare drive is available for logical drive rebuilding replace the failed drive immediately with a new drive and initiate the rebuild process manually For more information about manually and automatically rebuilding logical drives see Rebuilding Logical Drives on page 298 v To Rebuild a Logical Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select the logical drive that has a failed member drive 3 Choose Rebuild logical drive and then choose Yes to rebuild the logical drive Note The Rebuild logical drive option only displays when the selected logical drive with RAID level 1 3 or 5 includes a failed physical drive Status DRV FAILED NRAID and RAID 0 configurations provide no data redundancy The rebuilding progress is displayed on the screen Yaz Completed When rebuilding has already started or the logical drive has been automatically rebuilt by a local spare drive or global spare drive choose Rebuild progress to view the rebuilding progress To cancel a rebuild operation choose Abort rebuild A notification message informs you when the process is complete 130 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Rebui
104. view and edit Logical drives Select the logical drive that has a partition you want to delete Choose Partition logical drive Partitions of the logical drive are displayed in a table Select the partition you want to delete Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 5 Type 0 to delete this partition Of FsetCMB gt Size MB HAME Pie ia anfri EE 68952 A warning prompt is displayed This operation will result in the LOSS OF ALL DATA on the partition Partition Logical Drive As illustrated in FIGURE 6 1 the capacity of the deleted partition 1 200 MB is added into the partition above the deleted partition partition 0 which combines 100 MB and 200 MB for a total of 300 MB Logical drive 1 000 MB Logical drive 1 000 MB C _ i Partition 0 100 MB Partition 1 200 MB n A pe Partition 0 300 MB 100 200 Partition 1 300 MB aA Partition 2 300 MB Delete ____ Partition 1 Partition 3 400 MB Partition 2 400 MB eee A FIGURE 6 1 Example of Deleted Partitions Caution If a partition has been changed you must reconfigure all host LUN mappings All the host LUN mappings are removed with any partition change Chapter 6 Logical Drives 129 Changing a Logical Drive Name See To Assign a Logical Drive Name Optional on page 69 for the procedure for assigning a name
105. 003 Operating System 1 Boot a specific host and note the BIOS version and HBA card models connected to your host 2 Access the HBA card s BIOS with the appropriate command such as Alt Q or Ctrl A If the host has multiple HBA cards select the card that is connected to the storage For more information about accessing your BIOS refer to your system or HBA documentation 3 Scan the card to look for devices attached to it usually with the Scan Fibre Devices or the Fibre Disk Utility The node name or similar label is the WWN The following example shows the node name for a Qlogic card ID Vendor Product Rev Node Name Port ID 0 Qlogic QLA22xx Adapter B 210000E08B02DE2F OOOOEF Note Refer to appendixes in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your FC or SATA array to see information about determining the WWN for servers running HP UX or IBM AIX and for more detailed information regarding WWNs on all supported platforms Chapter8 Host LUNs 163 Manually Adding WWN Entries Using the Host ID WWN Name List Use the view and edit Host luns Edit Host ID WWN Name List menu option to manually add to the current device list any HBA worldwide names that have not been automatically propagated to the array You can add up to 64 WWWNs per array Note that when you add a worldwide name using this menu option that worldwide name appears to be available to all channels Ensure that
106. 006 Note Neither the Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time menu option nor the Periodic Drive Check Time menu option force the scanning of a SCSI drive v To Scan a New SCSI Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select the drive you wish to scan 3 Choose Scan scsi drive to display the available SCSI channels 4 Select a SCSI channel to display the available drive IDs 5 Select the ID of the drive you want to scan and then choose Yes to scan the drive Adding or Deleting Drive Entries SCSI Only Use the add drive Entry menu option to add an additional record to the drive table of a SCSI array prior to adding a SCSI drive Use the Clear drive status menu option if you want to remove an empty drive designation from the table later v To Add a Drive Entry 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select the drive to which you want to add a drive entry 3 Choose add drive Entry to display a list of available channels 4 Select a channel to display a list of available IDs on that channel 5 Select an ID and then choose Yes to create a drive entry The drive entry is created Its status is displayed as ABSENT Chapter9 Physical Drives 175 v lo Remove an Empty Drive Entry 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select an empty SCSI drive whose status is ABSENT 3 Choose Clear drive status
107. 06 Example sccli 192 168 0 2 set controller name my array scclay selected ses 0002 192 1638 0 2258632 TSUN StorEdge 33 10 SN 0005BF snmpget c public v 2c 192 168 0 2 sysName 0 SNMPv2 MIB sysName 0 STRING my array snmpset c public v 2c 192 168 0 2 sysName 0 s my other array SNMPv2 MIB sysName 0 STRING my other array sccli 192 168 0 2 show controller name sc li selected ses 0003 7192 163202758632 SUN StorEdge 33 10 SN 0005BF controller name my other array sysLocation This object specifies the physical location of the array such as a floor or room number Example snmpset c public v 2c 192 168 0 2 sysLocation 0 s 1st floor SNMPv2 MIB sysLocation 0 STRING 1st floor snmpget c public v 2c 192 168 0 2 sysLocation 0 SNMPv2 MIB sysLocation 0 STRING 1st floor sysServices The value of this object specifies layers of the TCP IP architecture offered This value is hard coded at 72 Example snmpget c public v 2c 192 168 0 2 sysServices 0 SNMPv2 MIB sysServices 0 INTEGER 72 Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 219 Enterprise Objects Certain array information can be obtained from Sun StorEdge 3000 products via SNMP These objects are located under the following subtree 1s0 org dod internet private enterprises sun prod storEdgeEL or defined numerically as follows o Ow det oe re a8 This node is further branched by product ID as follo
108. 1 812V Upper I O Module Midplane 5V Upper I O Module Midplane 12V Lower I O Module 1 8V Lower I O Module 2 5V Lower I O Module 3 3V Lower I O Module 1 812V Lower I O Module Midplane 5V Lower I O Module Midplane 12V Alarm Condition lt 3 00V or gt 3 60V lt 1 71V or gt 1 89V lt 4 00V or gt 6 00V lt 11 00V or gt 13 00V lt 1 71V or gt 1 89V lt 2 25V or gt 2 75V lt 3 00V or gt 3 60V lt 1 71V or gt 1 89V lt 4 00V or gt 6 00V lt 11 00V or gt 13 00V SES Power Supply Sensors FC and SATA Only Each Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array has two fully redundant power supplies with load sharing capabilities The sensors monitor the voltage temperature and fan units in each power supply TABLE 12 6 Power Supply Sensors FC and SATA Element ID 0 Description Left Power Supply 0 Right Power Supply 1 Location Left viewed from the rear Right viewed from the rear Alarm Condition Voltage temperature or fan fault Voltage temperature or fan fault Chapter 12 Peripheral Devices 257 Viewing Peripheral Device SAF TE Status SCSI Only A SCSI array s SAF TE processor is located on the SCSI I O module It controls environmental monitoring of SAF TE devices contained in the chassis such as temperature sensors cooling fans the beeper speaker power supplies and slot status These chassis sensors are separate
109. 15 xxiv Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 TABLE 2 1 TABLE 2 2 TABLE 2 3 TABLE 2 4 TABLE 3 1 TABLE 3 2 TABLE 3 3 TABLE 3 4 TABLE 3 5 TABLE 3 6 TABLE 3 7 TABLE 3 8 TABLE 3 9 TABLE 3 10 TABLE 3 11 TABLE 3 12 TABLE 3 13 TABLE 4 1 Tables Firmware Screen Components 12 Navigation Keys 15 Navigation Terminology and Character Conventions 16 Progress Indicator Prefix Meanings 18 Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI Array Default Channel Settings 20 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Default Channel Settings 20 Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array Default Channel Settings 21 Maximum Number of Supported Physical and Logical Drives Partitions and LUN Assignments 22 Actual Capacities per Drive 23 Maximum Usable Storage Capacity Determined by RAID Level 24 Maximum Number of Disks per Logical Drive 24 Maximum Usable Capacity in Gbyte per Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Logical Drive 25 Maximum Usable Capacity in Gbyte per Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI Logical Drive 25 Maximum Usable Capacity in Gbyte per Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Logical Drive 25 Example Point to Point Configuration With Two Logical Drives in a Dual Controller Array 37 Connection for Four Servers ina DAS Configuration 39 Example Primary and Secondary ID Numbers in a Loop Configuration With Two IDs per Channel 42 Cylinder and Head Mapping for the Solaris Operating Syste
110. 2 GHz Es ee LSE ETEN m CIE F a r 342 C DRU RCC F a fiese aaf w r s frost m as r E A Caution Do not change the PID and SID values of drive channels Each controller has a separate RS 232 port as well as an Ethernet port This architecture ensures continuous communication in case one controller fails Since the connection is established to only one controller at a time even when the array is in redundant mode the CurSyncClk and CurWid settings are displayed for the primary controller If you map one LUN to the primary controller and another LUN to a secondary controller only the established connection to the primary controller is displayed If a primary ID is not mapped to a channel and a secondary ID is mapped either ASYNC displays in the CurSyncClk field or the field is left blank Note On SCSI arrays a mapped SCSI host channel sometimes shows the current sync clock as ASYNC NARROW and correctly identifies the change in speed The host adapter driver is designed to downgrade the negotiated rate on certain errors predominantly parity errors There is little or no performance change 2 Select a channel to view the additional menu options available for that channel 196 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Note Channel menu options differ substantially between SCSI arrays and Fibre Channel arrays or SATA arrays In this chapter menu options or procedures that apply to only
111. 239 Configuring Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time on page 239 Configuring Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time on page 240 a Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART on page 241 a Auto Assign Global Spare Drive FC and SATA Only on page 241 m Disk Array Parameters Menu on page 242 a Setting Rebuild Priority on page 242 a Verification on Writes on page 243 m Redundant Controller Parameters on page 244 a Enabling and Disabling Cache Synchronization on page 244 a Controller Parameters on page 245 Configuring a Controller Name on page 245 Password Validation Timeout on page 246 Controller Unique Identifier Reserved on page 246 Setting the Controller s Date and Time on page 247 Communication Parameters Use the Communication parameters menu option to view and change communication settings Use the Internet Protocol TCP IP menu option to set or change your array s IP address RS 232 Port Configuration Reserved The RS 232 Port parameters should not be changed They are reserved for use by technical support personnel The RAID controller includes one serial port COM1 v To Configure the COM Port Baud Rate 1 Choose view and edit Configuration parameters Communication Parameters RS 232 Port Configuration COM1 Configuration Baud rate to display a list of available baud rates A list of availa
112. 3 Choose add Scsi drives to display a list of available drives Chapter 6 Logical Drives 135 4 Select one or more drives to add to the target logical drive The physical drive you choose should have a capacity no less than the original physical drive If possible use drives of the same capacity All drives in the array are treated as though they have the capacity of the smallest physical drive in the logical drive The selected drive is indicated by an asterisk mark chi 1D Size MB Speed LG_DRU Status endor and Produce 1D ooo o as TEE MEI 34732 200MB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G car 10 saraz zoomn wows nu seacnrE sraae7sarsunasc 5 Press Escape when all physical drives have been selected and then choose Yes to add the drives A notification is displayed Motif ication LG 8 Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Add Drive Operation 6 Press Escape to display a status bar that indicates the percentage of progress if Completed A notification message informs you when the process is complete Add SCSI Drive to Logical Drive 0 Complete When the add operation is completed data is re striped across the original and newly added drives 7 Map the partition m For a SCSI array map the new partition as described in To Map a Logical Drive Partition on page 73 m For a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array map the new partition as described in To Map a Logical D
113. 3 60V 6 Voltage Sensor 7 Upper I O Module Midplane 5V lt 4 00V or gt 6 00V Z Voltage Sensor 8 Upper I O Module Midplane 12V lt 11 00V or gt 13 00V 8 Voltage Sensor 9 Lower I O Module 2 5V Local lt 2 25V or gt 2 75V 9 Voltage Sensor 10 Lower I O Module 3 3V Local lt 3 00V or gt 3 60V 10 Voltage Sensor 11 Lower I O Module Midplane 5V lt 4 00V or gt 6 00V 11 Voltage Sensor 12 Lower I O Module Midplane 12V lt 11 00V or gt 13 00V TABLE 12 5 Voltage Sensors for Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Arrays Element ID Description Location Alarm Condition 0 Voltage Sensor 1 Left Power Supply 5V lt 4 86V or gt 6 60V 1 Voltage Sensor 2 Left Power Supply 12V lt 11 20V or gt 15 07V 2 Voltage Sensor 3 Right Power Supply 5V lt 4 86V or gt 6 60V 3 Voltage Sensor 4 Right Power Supply 12V lt 11 20V or gt 15 07V 4 Voltage Sensor 5 Upper I O Module 1 8V lt 1 71V or gt 1 89V 5 Voltage Sensor 6 Upper I O Module 2 5V 2 25V or gt 2 79V Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 TABLE 12 5 Element ID 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 Voltage Sensors for Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Arrays Continued Description Voltage Sensor 7 Voltage Sensor 8 Voltage Sensor 9 Voltage Sensor 10 Voltage Sensor 11 Voltage Sensor 12 Voltage Sensor 13 Voltage Sensor 14 Voltage Sensor 15 Voltage Sensor 16 Location Upper I O Module 3 3V Upper I O Module
114. 3 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs For detailed instructions for LUN mapping see To Map a Logical Drive Partition on page 113 LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only For multiple servers connected to the same FC array LUN filtering provides an exclusive path from a server to a logical drive and essentially hides or excludes the other connected servers from seeing or accessing the same logical drive That is the LUN filter organizes how the array devices are accessed and viewed from host devices and typically maps an array device to only one host so that other hosts do not access and use the same array device LUN filtering also enables multiple hosts to be mapped to the same LUN allowing different servers to have their own LUN 0 to boot from if needed Even though host filters are created on the same LUN each host filter can provide individual hosts exclusive access to a different partition and even access to partitions on different Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 111 logical drives Host filters can also grant different levels of access to different hosts LUN filtering is also valuable in clarifying mapping when each HBA typically sees twice the number of logical drives when viewed through a hub Each Fibre Channel device is assigned a unique identifier called a worldwide name WWN A WWN is assigned by the IEEE and is similar to a MAC address in IP or a URL on the Internet These WWNs stay with the devic
115. 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Physical Drive Status 52 v To Check Physical Drive Availability 52 Channel Settings 54 Configuring Channel Mode 54 v To Configure the Channel Mode 55 Host Channel IDs 56 v To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID 56 Creating Logical Drives 57 Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte 58 v To Change Cylinder and Head Settings 59 v To Create a Logical Drive 59 Controller Assignment 68 v To Change a Controller Assignment Optional 68 Logical Drive Name 69 v To Assign a Logical Drive Name Optional 69 Partitions 70 v To Partition a Logical Drive Optional 70 Mapping a Partition toa Host LUN 72 v To Map a Logical Drive Partition 73 Labeling a LUN Solaris Operating System Only 76 v ToLabelaLUN 76 Solaris Operating System Device Files 77 v To Create Device Files for Newly Mapped LUNs 77 Saving Configuration NVRAM to a Disk 78 v To Save a Configuration to NVRAM 78 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 79 Existing Logical Drive Configuration 80 v To View the Logical Drive Configuration 80 Contents V v To View the Channel Configuration 81 Deleting Logical Drives 81 v To Unmap and Delete a Logical Drive 81 Cache Optimization Mode FC and SATA 82 v To Verify the Optimization Mode 83 v To Change the Optimization Mode 83 Physical Drive Status 84 v To Check Physical Drive Availability 84 Enabling Support for SATA Expansion Units Attached to FC Arrays 85 v To Enab
116. 4 point to point sample SAN configuration 33 primary controller SCSI IDs 198 progress indicators 17 protocol support setting network 211 R RAID advantages over non RAID 308 multilevel logical volumes 148 planning considerations 4 terminology 304 RAID 0 311 RAID 1 311 RAID 1 0 312 concurrent rebuild in 302 RAID 3 313 RAID 3 0 315 RAID 5 314 RAID 5 0 315 RAID levels 1 0 3 0 5 0 5 1 5 5 150 10 30 50 150 assigning FC and SATA 97 assigning SCSI 59 defining 308 descriptions 310 mirroring and striping 309 number of drives per 309 redundancy in 309 RARP 209 setting array IP address using 210 setting automatic IP address for array 9 RCCOM FC and SATA 244 read write testing 191 rebuild priority 242 rebuild concurrent in RAID 1 0 302 rebuilding logical drives 298 rebuilding logical drives automatically 298 rebuilding logical drives manually 300 records keeping 323 redundant controller parameters 244 reserved space on drives 192 reset button use in silencing alarms 271 resetting controller 274 restoring NVRAM configuration from disk 280 Reverse Address Resolution Protocol See RARP RS 232 port configuration 208 S SAF TE check time 239 temperature sensor locations 260 viewing status 258 SAN configuration example FC SATA 33 SATA arrays configuration and reconfiguration of 79 saving configuration to disk 276 SB MISS drive status 289 sc
117. 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Logical Drive Partition Information Appendix C Record of Settings 325 LUN Mappings Pri Sec Logical Drive Host Channel Controller SCSI ID LUN Logical Volume 326 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 View and Edit Drives LG DRV Global Spare Vendor and Channel Size MB Speed Local Spare Product ID Appendix C Record of Settings 327 View and Edit Channels Secondary Controller SCSI Channel Mode Host Drive Primary Controller SCSI IDs IDs 328 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 View and Edit Peripheral Devices View System Information Firmware version Boot record version Serial number Appendix C Record of Settings 329 Save NVRAM to Disk and Restore From Disk Update Save NVRAM to Restore NVRAM Firmware Disk or File Date Location From Disk 330 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 APPENDIX D Parameter Summary Tables This appendix lists the firmware parameter settings for Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI arrays and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI arrays You can fine tune your array by making changes to these settings It also lists the parameter defaults that you should not change unless advised to do so by technical support Topics covered include
118. 73 Resetting the Controller 274 v To Reset the Controller Without Saving Cache Contents 274 Shutting Down the Controller 275 v To Shut Down a Controller 275 The Download Firmware Option Reserved 276 The Advanced Maintenance Functions Option Reserved 276 Saving Your Configuration NVRAM to Disk 276 v To Save Your Configuration NVRAM 279 Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk 280 v To Restore Saved Configuration Settings 281 Viewing Event Logs on the Screen 281 v To View The Array s Event Log 282 Maintaining Your Array 283 Battery Operation 283 Battery Status 284 Battery Support for Cache Operations 285 Checking Status Windows 285 Contents xvii Logical Drive Status Table 285 Physical Drive Status Table 288 Channel Status Table 290 Upgrading Firmware 293 Patch Downloads 294 Installing Firmware Upgrades 294 Controller Firmware Upgrade Features 295 Upgrading SES and PLD Firmware 296 Troubleshooting Your Array 296 Controller Failover 297 RAID LUNs Not Visible to Host 297 Rebuilding Logical Drives 298 Automatic Logical Drive Rebuild 298 Manual Rebuild 300 Concurrent Rebuild in RAID 1 0 302 Modifying Drive Side Parameters 302 Additional Troubleshooting Information 302 A Basic RAID Concepts 303 RAID Terminology Overview 304 Logical Drives 304 Logical Volumes 305 Channels Partitions and LUN Mapping 305 RAID Levels 308 RAIDO 311 RAID 1 311 RAID 1 0 312 RAID 3 313 RAID5 314 xviii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAI
119. A variety of features and initiatives all designed to maximize equipment uptime and mean time between failures minimize downtime and the length of time necessary to repair failures and eliminate or decrease single points of failure in favor of redundancy A storage device parameter that determines whether the storage device holds data in cache before storing it to disk The ability to hold data in cache while it is being written to disk can increase storage device speed during sequential reads The process of reconstructing the data that was on a disk before it failed Rebuilding can be done only in arrays with data redundancy such as RAID levels 1 1 0 3 and 5 Enables the RAID controller to serve other I O requests while rebuilding the logical drives Priority ranges from low which uses the controller s minimum resources to rebuild to high which uses the controller s maximum resources to complete the rebuilding process Glossary 391 SAN Storage Area Network A high speed open standard scalable network of storage devices and servers providing accelerated data access SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface An industry standard for connecting disk and tape devices to a workstation SES An interface to SCSI Enclosure Services devices These devices sense and monitor physical conditions within an enclosure and enable access to the status reporting and configuration features of the enclosure such as indicator LEDs on the encl
120. AM toa Disk 122 v To Save a Configuration to NVRAM 123 Logical Drives 125 Viewing the Logical Drive Status Table 126 Viewing Physical Drives 126 v To View Physical Drives 126 Creating Logical Drives 127 Deleting a Logical Drive 127 Partitioning a Logical Drive 128 Deleting a Logical Drive Partition 128 v To Delete a Logical Drive Partition 128 Changing a Logical Drive Name 130 Contents vii Rebuilding a Logical Drive 130 v To Rebuild a Logical Drive 130 Changing a Logical Drive Controller Assignment 131 Expanding the Capacity of a Logical Drive 131 v To Expand a Logical Drive 131 Adding Physical Drives 135 v To Add a Physical Drive to a Logical Drive 135 Performing a Parity Check 137 v To Regenerate the Parity of a Logical Drive 137 Overwriting Inconsistent Parity 138 v To Enable or Disable Overwrite Inconsistent Parity 138 Generating a Check Parity Error Event 139 v To Enable or Disable Reporting Inconsistent Parity Errors as System Events 139 Clearing a Fatal Fail Logical Drive Condition 139 Copying and Replacing Drives With Drives of Larger Capacity 140 v To Copy and Replace a Drive 141 Scanning Drives for Bad Blocks 143 v To Terminate a Media Scan 143 v To Performa Media Scan 143 Shutting Down a Logical Drive 144 v To Shut Down a Logical Drive 144 Changing Write Policy for a Logical Drive 145 v To Configure a Logical Drive s Write Policy 145 Logical Volumes 147 Understanding Logical Volumes Multilevel RAID 148
121. ATA expansion units to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array you must ensure that mixed drive support is enabled Enabling mixed drive support means certain safeguard menu options and messages will ensure that you do not improperly mix FC and SATA drive types when performing such operations as creating logical drives and logical volumes or assigning local or global spares to logical drives If you have not connected any SATA expansion units to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array verify that mixed drive support is not enabled so that you do not see inappropriate and potentially confusing menu options and messages Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 85 v To Enable or Disable Mixed Drive Support 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Disk Array Parameters Mixed Drive Support lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit Drives view and edit channels onf igurat ion Communication Parameters Caching Parameters Host side Parameters Deive side Parameters ASSESS SESE e C Rebuild Priority Low sene Werification on Writes ixed Drive Support Enable Depending on whether Mixed Drive Support is currently enabled or disabled a message describes the change you can make Disable Mixed Drive Support 2 Choose Yes to change the Mixed Drive Support setting or choose No to keep the curr
122. Additional drives must be added in increments of two For redundancy you can create a logical drive containing drives distributed over separate channels You can then create several partitions on each logical drive In a RAID 1 or RAID 0 1 configuration the order in which you select the physical drives for a logical drive determines the channels to which the physical drives are assigned If you want drives to be mirrored over two channels select them in the appropriate order For example The first drive you select is assigned to channel 2 IDO The second drive you select is assigned to channel 0 IDO The third drive you select is assigned to channel 2 ID1 a a a m The fourth drive you select is assigned to channel 0 ID1 60 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 a Use the up and down arrow keys and press Return to select the drives you want to include in the logical drive An asterisk mark is displayed in the Chl Channel column of each selected physical drive chi ID Size MH gt LG_DRU Vendor and Product ID EE T_T ET TOTES RENEE xH 3 34732 16 ME WNONE FRAT DRU SEAGATE ST336687LSUN36G SS E E T ee ee a r araa ee Pees Gere G 4 34732 160MB NONE FRMI DRU SEAGATE S1T336607LSUN36G a eee leer S 34732 16GMB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE ST336607LSUN36G 34732 166MB RMT DRY SEAGATE T336607LSUN36G 34732 166MB FRAT DRU SEAGATE S T336687LSUN36G 34734 160MB FRAT DRU SEAGA
123. Completed This message is displayed when a spare is used to replace a member drive suspected of imminent faults This message indicates completion of cloning LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE CHL _ ID _ Clone Completed Cloning process on the member of LG_ CHL_ ID_ has been completed Appendix E Event Messages 363 LG NOTICE CHL _ ID _ Starting Media Scan Starting media scan on the members of logical drive LG_ Each member being scanned is recognized by its channel and channel ID This message is shown when member drives are being scanned LG _ NOTICE Media Scan of CHL _ ID _ Completed Media scan is completed on a member drive CHL _ and ID _ LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Logical Drive Block Recovered Bad block recovered by rewriting data onto it CHL ID NOTICE Media Scan Bad Block Recovered ox Bad block recovered by rewriting data onto it Block address is Ox___ LG _ NOTICE Inconsistent Parity Encountered Block Inconsistent parity of logical drive LG _ found on block address __ CHL ID SCSI Drive NOTICE Scan SCSI Drive Successful Scanning new missing drives on a SCSI channel successful CHL NOTICE Fibre Channel Loop Connection Restored CHL _ loop connection restored _ ID NOTICE Redundant Path for CHL ID Restored Alternate connection to the dual ported device CHL _ ID _ is restored 364 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 General Target Event
124. D Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Advanced RAID Levels 315 Firmware Specifications 317 Record of Settings 323 View and Edit Logical Drives 324 Logical Drive Information 324 Logical Drive Partition Information 325 LUN Mappings 326 View and Edit Drives 327 View and Edit Channels 328 View and Edit Peripheral Devices 329 View System Information 329 Save NVRAM to Disk and Restore From Disk 330 Parameter Summary Tables 331 Introducing Default Parameters 331 Basic Default Parameters 332 Default Configuration Parameters 333 Default Peripheral Device Parameters 340 Default System Functions 342 Keeping Specific Parameter Defaults 343 Event Messages 345 Controller Events 346 Controller Alerts 346 Controller Warnings 348 Controller Notifications 349 Drive Events 350 Drive Alerts 350 Contents xix Drive Warnings 352 Drive Notifications 353 Channel Events 354 Channel Alerts 354 Channel Notifications 357 Logical Drive Events 357 Logical Drive Alerts 358 Logical Drive Notifications 361 General Target Events 365 SAF TE Device Events 365 SAF TE Device Alerts 365 SAF TE Device Notifications 366 Controller Self Diagnostic Events 367 Controller Self Diagnostic Alerts 367 Controller Self Diagnostic Notifications 367 I2C Device Events 368 I2C Device Notifications 368 SES Device Events 368 SES Device Alerts 368 SES Device Notifications 369 General Peripheral Device Events 370 General Peripheral Device Alerts 370 General Peri
125. Disabled Enabled Disabled TABLE D 13 Other Configuration Parameters User Defined Parameter FC and SATA Default Setting Disk Array Parameters Rebuild Priority Low Verification on Writes Disabled Mixed Drive Support Enabled Redundant Controller Parameters Cache Synchronization Enabled on Write Through Controller Parameters Controller Name Not Set Password Validation Timeout Always Check Controller Unique Identifier Automatically set by the SAF TE or SES device SCSI Default Setting Low Disabled N A Enabled Not Set Always Check Automatically set by the SAF TE or SES device Range of Values Normal Improved High Low On LD Initialization Writes Disabled On LD Rebuild Writes Disabled On Normal Drive Writes Disabled Enabled FC and SATA Only Disabled FC and SATA Only Enabled Disabled Type a name Disable 1 2 or 5 minutes Type a value Appendix D Parameter Summary Tables 339 Default Peripheral Device Parameters The following peripheral device parameters are available TABLE D 14 Peripheral Device Type Parameters View and Edit Peripheral Devices FC and SATA Default User Defined Parameter Setting SCSI Default Setting Range of Values Set Peripheral Device Entry Redundant Controller Primary Primary Force primary controller failure Force secondary controller failure UPS Status Disabled Disabled Enabled Disa
126. Drive Drive Size RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 3 or RAID 5 36 Gbyte 1212 606 1178 73 Gbyte 2452 1226 2384 146 Gbyte 4913 2456 4776 300 Gbyte 10049 5024 9770 TABLE 3 10 shows the maximum usable capacity of a single logical drive in a Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array depending on drive size TABLE 3 10 Maximum Usable Capacity in Gbyte per Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Logical Drive RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 3 or RAID 5 RAID 3 or RAID 5 Drive Size Random Sequential Random Sequential Random Sequential 250 Gbyte 15353 16749 7676 8374 15121 16516 400 Gbyte 15266 26809 7633 13404 14894 26437 Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 25 26 Controller Operation Guidelines This section provides guidelines for dual controller and single controller operation Dual Controller Guidelines Keep the following operation details in mind when configuring a dual controller array m The controller firmware assumes that two controllers are available or might be made available during operation at any time In a one rack unit 1U single controller configuration a two rack unit 2U single controller configuration or a 2U dual configuration once the primary controller which might be the only controller is powered on it begins to scan for a second controller Until a second controller is discovered which does not happen in a 1U single controller configuration or a 2U single controller configuration the Peripheral Device Status for the
127. Drive Midplane Center Temperature Sensor 4 4 Drive Midplane Right Temperature Sensor 5 5 Drive Midplane Right Temperature Sensor 6 6 Upper I O Module IOM Left Temperature Sensor 7 7 Upper I O Module IOM Left Temperature Sensor 8 8 Lower I O Module IOM Temperature Sensor 9 9 Lower I O Module IOM Temperature Sensor 10 10 Left Power Supply Temperature Sensor 11 11 Right Power Supply Temperature Sensor 12 Chapter 12 Peripheral Devices 255 256 SES Voltage Sensors FC and SATA Only Voltage sensors make sure that the array s voltages are within normal ranges The voltage components differ for the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array The following tables describe each voltage sensor The element ID corresponds to the identifier shown when you choose view and edit Peripheral devices gt View Peripheral Device Status SES Device Voltage Sensor TABLE 12 4 Voltage Sensors for Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Arrays Element ID Description Location Alarm Condition 0 Voltage Sensor 1 Left Power Supply 5V lt 4 00V or gt 6 00V 1 Voltage Sensor 2 Left Power Supply 12V lt 11 00V or gt 13 00V 2 Voltage Sensor 3 Right Power Supply 5V lt 4 00V or gt 6 00V 3 Voltage Sensor 4 Right Power Supply 12V lt 11 00V or gt 13 00V 4 Voltage Sensor 5 Upper I O Module 2 5V Local lt 2 25V or gt 2 75V 5 Voltage Sensor 6 Upper I O Module 3 3V Local lt 3 00V or gt
128. ESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 2 Choose Yes to reset the controller Viewing Event Logs on the Screen When errors occur you may want to trace the records to see what has happened to your system The controller event log records up to 100 notification events and another hundred alert and warning events that occur after the system is powered on The event log records configuration and operation events and error messages The event log also shows alarm events reported by the event monitoring unit in each Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array and the SES logic in each Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array The status of battery backup units fans temperatures and voltages are sometimes recorded as well For each event a lt P gt or lt S gt on the right side of the screen indicates whether the primary or secondary controller in a dual controller configuration issued the event message Powering off or resetting the controller automatically deletes all recorded event log entries Note As you perform the operations described in this guide you might periodically see event message pop up on the screen To dismiss an event message after you ve read it press Escape To prevent event messages for displaying so that you can only read them by displaying the event message log press Ctrl C You can press Ct
129. Edge 3511 RAID controllers or expansion units Procedures for the SMART prediction feature are m To Enable and Use SMART Detection on page 186 a To Test a Drive for SMART Functionality on page 187 Chapter 9 Physical Drives 185 186 m To Disable SMART Detection on page 188 v To Enable and Use SMART Detection 1 Choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters gt Periodic Drive Check Time to display a list of time intervals 2 Select a time interval and then choose Yes to confirm your choice 3 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART 4 Keep the default Detect and Clone Replace setting or choose another SMART menu option and choose Yes to confirm your choice Detect and Clone Replace This is the default setting which enables the SMART monitoring The controller sends a command to enable all the drives SMART functions If a drive predicts a problem the controller reports the predicted problem as an entry in the event log The controller then immediately clones the drive whose failure has been predicted to a standby spare drive After the clone process is complete the controller immediately replaces the source drive the drive whose failure has been predicted The status of the source drive then is changed to a used drive and you can replace this drive with a ne
130. Event Trigger Operations on page 263 for more information a Write Back This menu option assigns write back cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy a Write Through Assigns write through cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy b Choose a write policy option 8 Optional Change the logical volumes assignment from Primary controller to secondary controller by choosing Logical Volume Assignment and then choosing Yes to confirm the change 9 Press Escape to display the configuration of the logical volume you are creating and then choose Yes to create the logical volume Deleting a Logical Volume This section describes how to delete a logical volume v To Delete a Logical Volume 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit logical Volumes The current logical volume configuration and status are displayed Chapter 7 Logical Volumes 153 2 Select a logical volume to delete 3 Choose Delete logical volume The following warning message is displayed This operation will result in the LOSS OF ALL DATA on the logical Volume Delete Logical Volume 4 Choose Yes to delete the logical volume Expanding a Logical Volume This section describes how to expand a logical volume v To Expand a Logical Volume 1 Expand the logical drives in the logical volume For more information see Expanding the Capacity of a Logical Drive on page 131 2 C
131. Fault Protection Measures With the maturity of industry standard technologies such as Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology SMART disk drive failures can sometimes be predicted before they happen Encountering drive bad block reassignments with media scan is one common predictor of a drive that is about to fail For more information about media scan see m Scanning Drives for Bad Blocks on page 143 m Using Media Scan on Individual Drives on page 188 System administrators can decide when to substitute a functional drive for a drive showing symptoms of impending failure This section discusses manual and automated procedures for averting disk failures This section covers the following topics Cloning a Failing Drive on page 179 Terminating a Perpetual Clone on page 183 Viewing the Status of a Cloning Operation on page 184 Using SMART Functionality on page 185 Cloning a Failing Drive To assist fault prevention a system administrator can manually clone a disk drive that shows signs of failing choosing a convenient time when system performance will not be adversely affected Note The clone Failing drive menu option is not displayed with NRAID or RAID 1 logical drives because its use is not supported in those configurations Use the clone Failing drive menu option when m Replacing drives about to fail indicated by the controller m Manually replacing and cloning drive
132. Filter Type to Exclude ETES No Note If no host has been granted access to the selected LUN by having its Filter Type set to Include all hosts can access that LUN In this configuration you can deny specific hosts access to that LUN by configuring their Filter Type to Exclude Once any host is granted access to a LUN only hosts with explicit access Filter Type set to Include can access that LUN Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 d To change the access mode which assigns Read Only or Read Write privileges select Access mode and choose Yes to confirm the assignment lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes iT CHL ID 486 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 50 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Mame List in in onu Pareicion size cm LD eeneece Access Mode Read Write Name Mot Set e To set a name for the filter select Name Type the name you want to use and press Return 10 Verify all settings and press Escape to continue oj w lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns T CHL ID 40 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 50 lt FPrimary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Mame List eeneece ogical
133. Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 v To View the Channel Configuration 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS The Channel Status table is displayed a Ee ae Ee Gee z Host 40 NA AUTO Serial F MA 1 GHe Serial a a ao fos ora roae _ ptafsifoersymcax aerials tern ours yen ee ees ee T 1 243G DRU RKC Sate ES eae ee Maj 42 C C F Naj 2 z pRusRcc 14 15 auro serialjr Nal 2 Giz 44 mal F Naj 2 z maj 46 r mj ao fos 5 fiose 2 Note the changes you want to make to the existing configuration Deleting Logical Drives To assign a different RAID level or set of drives to a logical drive or to change local spare drives you must first unmap and delete the logical drive and then create a new logical drive Caution This operation erases all data on the logical drive If any data exists on the logical drive copy it to another location or back it up before it is deleted Note You can delete a logical drive only if it has first been unmapped v To Unmap and Delete a Logical Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns A list of channel and host IDs is displayed You might need to scroll through the list to display some of the channels and host IDs 2 Choose a channel and host ID combination from the list A list of host LUNs that are assigned to the selected channel host combination is displayed Chapter 5 First Time Conf
134. Format Utilities Use these menu options only when a disk has been taken out of service and is unusable unless it is reformatted A Caution All data on the disk drive is destroyed when you use this menu option The low level disk format utility cannot be used on a spare drive local or global or a member drive of a logical drive Disk Reserved space must be removed before this menu option is available See Changing Disk Reserved Space on page 192 for more information v To Low Level Format a Physical Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select a drive you want to format 3 Choose scsi drive Utilities gt SCSI Drive Low level Format and then choose Yes to begin formatting the drive and to display the formatting progress indicator 4 Optional Press Escape to close the progress indicator and return to the menu 5 Optional Select the same drive and choose scsi drive Utilities SCSI Drive Low Level Format View Drive Format Progress to again view the progress of the format operation Note Do not switch the controller or disk drive power off during the low level format If any power failure occurs during a drive low level format the formatting must be performed again when power resumes A notification message informs you when the process is complete CHL n ID n Drive NOTICE Scan Drive Successful 190 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guid
135. G 0 Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 2 ID 6 Copy and Replace Completed 8 Repeat these steps to copy and replace all member drives with drives of higher capacity as needed You can now choose Expand logical drive to make use of the capacity brought by the new drives and then map the additional capacity to a host LUN Notification LG Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 2 ID 6 Copy and Replace Completed 142 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Scanning Drives for Bad Blocks The media scan feature sequentially checks each physical drive in a selected logical drive block by block for bad blocks If a bad block is encountered the controller rebuilds the data from the bad block onto a good block if one is available on the physical drive If no good blocks are available on the physical drive the controller designates the physical drive BAD and generates an event message If a spare drive is available the controller begins rebuilding data from the bad physical drive onto the spare You can specify whether media scanning begins automatically whenever the controller is powered up or reset See Media Scan at Power Up on page 242 for more information See Using Media Scan on Individual Drives on page 188 for more information about performing media scans on individual drives By default assigned global spares are not scanned nor are unassigned drives Whenever media scan is running on a drive its front
136. Host LUNs A logical unit number LUN is a unique identifier used on a SCSI channel that enables a host to differentiate between separate devices Once you have created logical drives or logical volumes you can map each storage partition as one system drive host ID LUN The host adapter recognizes the system drives after reinitializing the host bus An FC channel can connect up to 126 devices Each device has one unique ID A SCSI bus channel can connect up to 15 devices excluding the controller itself when the Wide function is enabled 16 bit SCSI Each device has one unique ID FIGURE 8 1 illustrates the idea of mapping a system drive to a host ID LUN combination The FC or SCSI ID is like a cabinet and the drawers are the LUNs Each cabinet ID can have up to 32 drawers LUNs Data can be stored into one of the LUNs of the FC or SCSI ID Most FC host adapters treat a LUN like another FC or SCSI device The maximum number of LUNs that can be created for a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array is 128 To create a total of 128 LUNs see Planning for 128 LUNs on a SCSI Array Optional on page 158 The maximum number of LUNs that can be created for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array in loop configurations is 1024 The maximum number of LUNs that can be created for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array in redundant point to point configurations is 64 Refe
137. Host luns from the Main Menu 2 Select the channel and ID that are mapped to the host LUN 3 Select the specific host LUN Chapter8 Host LUNs 161 4 Choose Yes to delete the host LUN This option deletes the logical drive or logical volume mapping to a host channel It does not delete the data contained within the logical drive Note All host LUN mappings are removed when there is any partition change Creating Host Filter Entries FC and SATA Only See LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only on page 111 for a description and procedure for creating host filter entries Determining a Host World Wide Name Prior to using LUN filtering you need to identify which FC array is connected to which HBA card and the WWN assigned to each card v To Determine a WWN for the Solaris Operating System 1 If you have a new HBA device installed on your computer reboot the computer 2 Type the following command luxadm probe 162 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 3 Scroll down the listing to see the Fibre Channel devices and the related WWNs Window Edit Options falcon Juxadm probe Found Fibre Channel devicets Node WW 20000GcOTFT1G001G Device Type Disk device Logical Path dev rdsk c6t2 20000COFF1IG001 Odas2 Node WW 20700GcOTTOG001G Device Type Disk deyice Logical Path dev rdsk c6t221000COFFOG001 Odos 2 v To Determine a WWN for the Linux Windows 2000 or Windows 2
138. IB 1dID STRING 1D20B424 SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB 1dID STRING 283EA66A Note See the product MIB for details on OIDs and descriptions available for enterprise objects Using Multiple Product MIBs Individual product MIBs contain many of the same names for OIDs For example the ct lrUniqueID 0 object in the MIB for the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array has the following OID gaat iat Onna Oe wre Aa OO eos DANO Yor ES O dat It The ctlrUniqueID 0 object in the MIB for the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array has the following OID lw 6 E LAA ee OO Os LO Me ed ole 60 This can lead to ambiguity if multiple products with multiple MIBs are used In this case the fully qualified OID or name must be used Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 221 The fully qualified name can be specified with the MIB module name given by the DEFINITIONS BEGIN token in the MIB snmpget c public v 2c On m SUN STOREDGE 3510 MIB SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB 192 168 0 1 SUN STOREDGE 3510 MIB ctlrUniqueID 0 3 Oeleti Do 2 1 60 350s wale le dcl6 0 STRING 45044 The fully qualified name can be specified numerically as follows snmpget c public v 2c On m SUN STOREDGE 3510 MIB SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB 192 168 0 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 42 2 180 3510 1 1 1 1 16 0 ele3sGsbets ld Ze2 180 3010 lels16 0 STRING 4504 Configuring the Notification Processing Center NPC The Notification Processing Center NPC is a sub module on the
139. ID will be displayed in the Event Configuration dialog To view and modify events perform the following steps Choose Options Event Configuration The Event Configuration dialog is displayed x Bua Conijuraiion tor yes tenes be File Edit View Enterprise Name rmon ENTERPRISES cisco Openi ew storedqe3310 dmilndications dmtfProcessorTable dmtfrotherboardtabl Event Name snot lrevents510 cLa Lya cles cles goles Les eile pad ee cles Enterprise Identification Enterprise ID Lal mi PERPPERREER BREESE Ek hh 16 9 palace gob ek 42 2 180 331 ao on a o 4l2 1 2 4l2 2 4 5 4l2 2 4 6 m an an mh Event Identification Appendix F SNMP Management Using HP OpenView 379 2 To modify an event select the Enterprise Name in the upper pane and double click on the Event Name in the lower pane The Modify Event dialog is displayed 1 Bua cuhuai Ludy Suan for ves coves be o x Event Name Event Type Event Object Identifier snCtlrEvent3510 coe Sei Pes 1 3 6 1 4 1 42 2 180 3510 0 1 Event Description dong Descr t There ig a controller event occurred Variables Event Sources all sources if list is empty Add From Map Boece Pico Bs EFE AMP SA bei Source Add Category Status Alarms Forward Event severity Normal Event Log Message BtorEdge 3510 Event 1 Pop up Notification Optional A Command for Automatic Action Opti
140. IDs FC and SATA Only 171 Viewing Physical Drive Information 172 v To View Physical Drive Information 172 Assigning a Local Spare Drive 173 v To Assign a Local Spare Drive 173 Assigning a Global Spare 173 v To Assign a Global Spare 174 Deleting a Spare Drive 174 v To Delete a Spare Drive 174 Scanning Drives SCSI Only 174 v To Scan a New SCSI Drive 175 Adding or Deleting Drive Entries SCSI Only 175 v To Add a Drive Entry 175 v To Remove an Empty Drive Entry 176 Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement 176 v To Identify a Drive 176 Flashing a Selected Physical Drive 177 Flashing All SCSI Drives 177 Flashing All But Selected Drive 178 Fault Protection Measures 179 Cloning a Failing Drive 179 Replacing After Clone 180 v To Replace After Clone 180 x Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 10 Perpetual Clone 181 v To Enable Perpetual Clone 181 Terminating a Perpetual Clone 183 v To Terminate a Perpetual Clone 183 Viewing the Status of a Cloning Operation 184 v To View the Status of a Cloning Operation 184 Using SMART Functionality 185 v To Enable and Use SMART Detection 186 v To Test a Drive for SMART Functionality 187 v To Disable SMART Detection 188 Using Media Scan on Individual Drives 188 v To Performa Media Scan 188 v To Terminate a Media Scan 189 SCSI Drive Utilities Reserved 189 SCSI Drive Low Level Format Utilities 190 v To Low Level Format a Physical Drive 190 Read Write Test 191 v To Per
141. LI User s Guide or the sccli 1M man page for similar instructions for using the Sun StorEdge CLI Refer to the release notes for your array for instructions about where to obtain the firmware that you need to download When you open Sun StorEdge Configuration Service or the Sun StorEdge CLI and connect to the array an error message alerts you to the mismatched version problem Troubleshooting Your Array For hardware troubleshooting information refer to the Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array For additional troubleshooting tips refer to the release notes for your array 296 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Controller Failover Controller failure symptoms include m The surviving controller sounds an audible alarm m The Controller Status LED turns solid amber on the failed controller m The surviving controller sends event messages announcing the controller failure of the other controller A Bus Reset Issued warning message is displayed for each of the channels In addition a Redundant Controller Failure Detected alert message is displayed If one controller in the redundant controller configuration fails the surviving controller takes over for the failed controller A failed controller is managed by the surviving controller which disables and disconnects from its counterpart while gaining access to all the signal paths The surviving controller then manages the ensui
142. LUNs for a SCSI array see Planning for 128 LUNs on a SCSI Array Optional on page 158 The following figure illustrates mapping partitions to host ID LUNs 72 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Channel 3 Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 Partition 2 Partition O Logical drive O LUN 1 Logical drive 1 Partition 1 Partition 1 Logical drive 1 LUN 2 Logical drive 0 Partition 2 Partition O FIGURE 4 3 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs All hosts on the mapped host channel have full access to all partitions mapped to LUNs on that channel To provide redundant connections between a host and a partition map the partition to a LUN on both of the host channels that connect to that host Only one partition can be mapped to each LUN Note When you modify a partition you must first unmap the LUN Note If you plan to map 128 LUNs the process is easier if you use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for more information To Map a Logical Drive Partition From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns A list of available channels IDs and their associated controllers is displayed 2 Select a channel and host ID on the primary controller Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 73 3 If the Logical Drive and Logical Volume menu options are displayed choose Logical Drive to d
143. NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now If other IDs exist on the selected channel choose No and repeat Step 5 to delete every ID configured on the channel After deleting the last ID choose Yes to reset the controller When all IDs have been deleted you can assign an ID from a different range No SCSI ID Assignment Add Channel SCSI ID Choose Yes to assign an ID Select the controller to which you want to assign an ID A list of IDs is displayed Depending on the current range adjoining ranges are displayed at the top and bottom of the ID list except ranges 0 and 7 which only display one adjoining range In the following example range 7 is displayed lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns Def SunClk Def Wid AUTO Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 93 10 To change to a different range select an adjoining range IDs in the newly selected range are displayed 11 Repeat Step 10 until the desired range is displayed 12 Select an ID from the desired range and then choose Yes to confirm the assignment This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET P
144. NOTIFICATION TYPE macro was found in the file just loaded Would you like to load those definitions into the OpenVview event system If you have previously loaded these definitions then the existing definitions will not be replaced 4 Click OK to continue If the definitions load successfully an information dialog is displayed IT OUTTEAUON avs T Ex SNMP TRAP TYPE NOTIFICATION TYPE macro defintions successfully loaded into trapd conf Use the event configrator Options sEvent Configuration to view the changes Close 5 Click Close If more than one array product type is being monitored for example a Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array and a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array you can load multiple MIBs 6 Repeat the preceding steps for each MIB to be loaded Note You can also unload MIBs by selecting them from the list and clicking Unload Note MIBs are distributed with firmware patches You might have to reload MIBs if firmware changes impact the SNMP agent on the array controller 378 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Configuring Events Since the MIBs contain information on traps it is possible to configure these events Events can be displayed in the Alarm browser in a pop up window forwarded to other hosts and logged to files Refer to your HP OpenView documentation for details If the MIBs have been loaded successfully the Enterprise Name and Enterprise
145. OFF ACTIVITY EC CONNECTOR LEDS e fe FIGURE 3 3 A DAS Configuration With Four Servers a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Two Expansion Units 40 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Server 1 Server 2 DRIVE ACTIVITY ACTIVITY 2 GB ONLY DRIVE DRIVE LOOP A LOOP B ACTIVITY PS iets as 2 GB ONLY DRIVE DRIVE LOOP A LOOP B FIGURE 3 4 A DAS Configuration With Four Servers a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array and Two Expansion Units Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 41 v To Set Up a Typical DAS Loop Configuration Perform the following steps which are described in more detail later in this manual to set up a DAS loop configuration based on FIGURE 3 3 and FIGURE 3 4 1 Check the location of installed SFPs Move them as necessary to support the connections needed You need to add SFP connectors to support more than four connections between servers and a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array For example add two SFP connectors to support six connections and add four SFP connectors to support eight connections 2 Connect expansion units if needed 3 Create at least one logical drive per server and configure spare drives as needed 4 Create one or more logical drive partitions for each server 5 Confirm that the Fibre Connection Option is set to Loop only Note Do not use the Loop preferred ot
146. PS_ battery failure Appendix E Event Messages 371 General Peripheral Device Notifications Peripheral Device NOTICE Fan Back On Line Fan module back online NOTICE FAN_ Back On Line Fan module_ back online NOTICE Fan_ is present Fan module_ is present NOTICE Fan Back On Line _ RPM Fan module_ back online _ RPM NOTICE Temperature _ Back to Non Critical Levels Temperature detected through sensor_ restored to within safety range NOTICE Temperature _ Back to Non Critical Levels _ C Temperature detected through sensor_ restored to within safety range _ C NOTICE Temperature _ is Present Temperature sensor_ is present Power Supply _ Back Online Power supply module_ back online 372 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Power Supply Back Online _ _V Power supply module_ back online _ _V UPS Connection Detected UPS connection detected UPS AC Power Restored UPS AC Power Restored UPS Battery Restored to Safe Level UPS battery charge restored to within safe levels Peripheral Device Notice UPS _ AC Power Back On Line UPS _ AC power back online Peripheral Device Notice UPS _ Battery Back On Line UPS _ battery back online UPS Connection is Absent Controller subsystem lost connection with UPS device Warning UPS AC Power Loss Detected UPS AC power loss detected UPS Battery Low _ UPS battery found under charge
147. Planning Considerations on page 4 a Local and Global Spare Drives on page 5 a Using Both Local and Global Spare Drives on page 7 m Accessing the Firmware Application on page 8 a Setting an IP Address on page 8 Supported Hardware Platforms Four different Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays feature RAID firmware 4 1x m Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array The Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array is a next generation Fibre Channel storage system designed to provide direct attached storage DAS to entry level mid range and enterprise servers or to serve as the disk storage within a storage area network SAN This solution features powerful performance and reliability availability and serviceability RAS features using modern FC technology As a result the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array is ideal for performance sensitive applications and for environments with many entry level mid range and enterprise servers such as Internet Messaging Database Technical Imaging m Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array The Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array shares many features in common with the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array but includes internal circuitry that enables it to use low cost high capacity Serial ATA drives It is best suited for inexpensive secondary storage applications that are not mission critical where higher capacity drives are needed and where lower performance and less than 7 24 availability is an option This includes near line app
148. Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 50 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWH Mame List Partition Size ME RAID al EA eencee 8 Repeat Step 4 through Step 7 to map additional partitions to host LUNs on this channel and logical drive 9 Press Escape 114 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 10 11 12 13 14 If you are LUN mapping a redundant configuration repeat Step 2 through Step 7 to map partitions to host LUNs with other IDs on the logical drive assigned to the primary controller When you map a partition to two channels in a redundant configuration the number in the Partition column of the partition table displays an asterisk to indicate that the partition is mapped to two LUNs Note If you are using host based multipathing software map each partition to two or more host IDs so multiple paths will be available from the partition to the host Repeat Step 2 through Step 10 to map hosts to the secondary controller To verify unique mapping of each LUN unique LUN number unique DRV number or unique Partition number a From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns b Select the appropriate controller and ID and press Return to review the LUN information A mapped LUN displays a number and a filtered LUN displays an M for masked LUN in the host LUN partition window When all host LUNs
149. RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Once you have displayed an HBA port name here you can add it to the WWN list displayed when you choose Host ID WWN name list from the view and edit Host luns menu Adding port names to this list can speed the Host LUN mapping process You can also assign each port on the Host ID WWN name list a name for ease of identification This becomes especially useful when you want to set up multiple filtering entries so you can grant or deny specific hosts access to logical drives See LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only on page 111 for more information v To View a Channel s Device Port Name List 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS 2 Select a host channel 3 Choose View device port name list wwpn A list of the device port names on the host loop is displayed view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes 5 Host NA 46 AUTO verial Setting a Channel s Data Rate FC and SATA Only An FC channel communicates at a rate of either 1 GHz or 2 GHz You can set this data rate manually or use the default Auto setting to autosense the rate of communications Note For the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array channels 2 3 4 and 5 are 2 GHz only Chapter 10 Host and Drive Channels 203 v To Set a Channel s Data Rate 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS 2 Select a host or drive channel 3 Choose D
150. RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Menu Options That Toggle Between Conditions Some firmware menu options display their current state For example many of the Configuration Parameters resemble this one Auto Assign Global Spare Drive Disabled When you choose a menu option that displays its current state you are prompted to change it by choosing Yes or leave it in its current state by choosing No If you choose Yes the menu option now shows the new current state The example now shows Auto Assign Global Spare Drive Enabled This toggle switch behavior applies to menu options that have only two states typically Enabled and Disabled Progress Indicators Progress indicators are displayed when necessary to indicate the percentage of completion of a particular task or event The task might be represented by a descriptive title such as Drive Copying or by a prefix abbreviation Tie i fia nin sicocnan seotus a2 3 oe win aca er wan FA 488 FFEE8 NA RAIDS 143428 GOOD 71H 4 H H CH Drive Copyin Sa ee Description of operation taking place Progress indicator FIGURE 2 3 Progress Indicator and Descriptive Message Event messages showing full descriptive titles for the progress indicator include Drive Copying Flash Erasing Flash Programming Rebuild Drive Add SCSI Drive Media Scan Chapter 2 Basic Firmware Components 17 For other events the progress indicator
151. Reserved You can force a secondary controller failure to test an array s failover functionality This feature is normally used only for testing and troubleshooting v To Force a Secondary Controller Failure Reserved 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Set Peripheral Device Entry Redundant Controller force Secondary controller failure and then choose Yes to confirm your choice A message confirms that the controller has been failed 262 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Controller ALERT Redundant Controller Failure Detected Press Escape to clear the message To Restore a Force Failed Primary or Secondary Controller From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Set Peripheral Device Entry Redundant Controller Primary to display the following message Deassert Reset on Failed Controller Choose Yes to restore the controller that you previously force failed Allow several minutes for the failed controller to come back online The following message notifies you when the controller is back online Controller Default Write Policy Restored Event Trigger Operations Event trigger operations configure an array so that it dynamically switches from write back enabled to write back disabled write through if a specified failure occurs or threshold is exceeded Once the problem is corrected the original write
152. S Status UPS Power Fail Signal Active View Peripheral Device Status Trigger Thresholds for 3 3V Events Upper Threshold for 3 3V Event Lower Threshold for 3 3V Event Trigger Thresholds for 5V Events Upper Threshold for 5V Event Lower Threshold for 5V Event Trigger Thresholds for 12V Events Upper Threshold for 12V Event Lower Threshold for 12V Event Trigger Thresholds for CPU Temperature Events Upper Threshold for CPU Temperature Event Lower Threshold for CPU Temperature Event Trigger Thresholds for Board Temperature Events Upper Threshold for Board Temperature Event Lower Threshold for Board Temperature Event 278 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 If you prefer to save and restore all configuration data including LUN mapping information use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service or the Sun StorEdge CLI in addition to saving your NVRAM controller configuration to disk The information saved this way can be used to rebuild all logical drives and therefore can be used to completely duplicate an array configuration to another array Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for information about the save configuration and load configuration features Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide or the sccli man page for information about the reset nvramand download controller configuration commands To Save Your Configuration NVRAM
153. SEAGATE 1T336753FSUN36G en ee SES SUN StorEdge 3510F A Da oy a St Terminating a Perpetual Clone Once data from a failing drive has been cloned onto a spare drive during a perpetual clone operation the failing drive remains part of the logical drive and the spare drive remains a clone drive until the perpetual clone is manually terminated v To Terminate a Perpetual Clone 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select the drive whose status is CLONING 3 Choose clone Failing drive to identify the source drive that is being cloned The channel and ID of the source drive are displayed along with the following options m Replace original with clone Choose this option to take the failing source drive offline and replace it in the logical drive with the spare drive on which data from the source drive has been reconstructed Chapter9 Physical Drives 183 m Delete clone Choose this option to terminate the clone leaving the source drive as part of the logical drive and reestablishing the clone drive as part of the logical drive 4 Choose Replace original drive with clone or Delete clone to terminate the perpetual clone and then choose Yes to confirm your choice A notification message informs you when the process is complete for example LG 0 Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 2 ID 10 Copy and Replace Completed Viewing the Status of a Cloning Operation While a cloning operation
154. SEAGATE ST336607LSUN36G6 Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 53 54 Channel Settings The Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array are preconfigured with the channel settings shown in Default Channel Configurations on page 20 Follow the procedures for configuring a channel mode if you plan on adding a host connection or expansion unit To make changes to channel host IDs follow the procedures for adding or deleting a host ID Configuring Channel Mode When configuring the channel mode the following rules apply You must have at least one host channel Channel 0 must remain a dedicated drive channel m Channels 1 2 and 3 can be configured as host or drive channels In a dual bus configuration channel 2 must be a drive channel m Ina dual bus configuration you can only change the mode on channel 3 m Channel 6 must remain a dedicated RCCOM redundant controller communications channel Note RCCOM provides the communication channels by which two controllers in a redundant RAID array communicate with one another This communication enables the controllers to monitor each other and includes configuration updates and control of cache By default channel 6 is configured as RCCOM Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 v To Configure the Channel Mode 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS to display the Channel Status Ta
155. SN 000280 Primary 2 dev es sesO SUN StorEdge 3510F D SN 00227B Enclosure 250 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 v To Check the Status of SES Components FC and SATA Only 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices gt View Peripheral Device Status gt SES Device to display a list of environmental sensors and other hardware components of that SES device view view view view view view view an Yoltage sensor VRE Power Supply T SCSI porttransceiver Fi KR PRC Failback Complete SES Device Enclosure Device Channel 2 ID 12 and edit Logical drives an Sugienclosure Descriptor an Help Text an Device an Cooling element rameters Temperature Sensors P Audible alarm Honvolatile cache STATUS LOCATION 2 Select an item from the list and press Return to display information about it or see a list of its component attributes E EE Actual Speed view an Device view an cooling element eee STATUS LOCATION Failback Complete Enclosure Device Channel 2 ID 12 SES Device Choosing Overall Status as in the illustration above displays the status of the SES device and its operating temperature Overall status of an SES device is reported independently from the status of the individual components of that device An SES device showing an overall status in the menu has its
156. Sun StorEdge Configuration Service the progress of the cloning operation is displayed by the Controller Array Progress bar See Terminating a Perpetual Clone on page 183 for instructions on how to disable perpetual cloning Using SMART Functionality SMART is an industry standard technology that provides near term failure prediction for disk drives When SMART is enabled as it is in the Sun StorEdge 3000 family RAID controllers the drive monitors predetermined drive attributes that are susceptible to degradation over time If a failure is likely to occur SMART makes a status report available so that the host can prompt the user to back up data from the failing drive Not all failures can be predicted however SMART predictability is limited to the attributes the drive can monitor that are selected by the device manufacturer based on the attribute s ability to contribute to the prediction of degrading or fault conditions Although SMART attributes are drive specific a variety of typical characteristics can be identified Head flying height Data throughput performance Spin up time Reallocated sector count Seek error rate Seek time performance Spin try recount Drive calibration retry count The Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays implement the ANSI SCSI X3T10 94 190 standard The Detect and Clone Replace menu option is the default setting Note SMART functionality is not supported on the SATA drives used in Sun Stor
157. T Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 4 Choose Yes to reset the controller Enabling Parity Checking SCSI Only The integrity of redundant data on fault tolerant logical drives RAID 3 and 5 is verified with a parity check The parity checking procedure on a logical drive recalculates the parity of data stripes in each of the logical drive s RAID stripe sets and compares it with the stored parity If a discrepancy is found an error is reported and the new correct parity is substituted for the stored parity Use the following procedure to enable and disable parity checking 200 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 M 1 2 To Enable or Disable Parity Checking From the Main Menu choose view and edit channels Select the channel whose parity check setting you wish to change Choose parity check and then choose Yes to enable parity checking if it is currently disabled or to disable parity checking if it is currently enabled Viewing Chip Information Each controller has multiple channels I O paths and each channel is powered by an I O processor The view chip inFormation menu option provides information about the host or drive channel s chip type and revision level and a firmware identifier which might include version information To View Chip Information From the Main M
158. TABLE B 9 User Interface Feature RS 232C Terminal Ethernet Interface Beeper Alarm Description Supports terminal modes ANSI VT 100 ANSI Color Provides menu driven user friendly text based interface Supports LOBASE T communication for out of band management Warns user when any failure or critical event occurs 322 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 APPENDIX C Record of Settings This appendix provides tables for recording configuration data Topics covered are m View and Edit Logical Drives on page 324 a Logical Drive Information on page 324 a Logical Drive Partition Information on page 325 LUN Mappings on page 326 View and Edit Drives on page 327 View and Edit Channels on page 328 View and Edit Peripheral Devices on page 329 a View System Information on page 329 m Save NVRAM to Disk and Restore From Disk on page 330 In addition to saving the configuration data in NVRAM to disk keeping a hard copy of the controller configuration is also recommended This speeds the re creation of the RAID in the event of a disaster The following tables are provided as a model for recording configuration data Note The configuration data in the NVRAM should be saved to disk or file whenever a configuration change is made 323 View and Edit Logical Drives Logical Drive Information RAID Level Size a one 32
159. TE ST336687LSUN36G b To deselect a drive press Return again on the selected drive none 24722 conn wone enit nu sracare sr2966071suNa6G_ none rone The asterisk marking that drive disappears c After all physical drives have been selected for the logical drive press Escape to display a menu of logical drive options Several optional menu options are displayed You can choose these menu options to define aspects of the logical drive you are creating The Maximum Drive Capacity menu option enables you to specify the size of the logical drive The Assign Spare Drives menu option enables you to specify a local spare drive to be used if an existing physical drive in the logical drive you are creating becomes defective The Disk Reserved Space menu option displays the size of the reserved space used to store logical drive metadata While it is possible to delete or change reserved space size do not do so Refer to To Specify Disk Reserved Space on page 192 for more information a The Logical Drive Assignments menu option enables you to assign the logical drive you are creating to either the primary or secondary controller a The Write Policy menu option enables you to set the cache write policy for the logical drive you are creating The Initialize Mode menu option enables you specify whether the logical drive you are creating is initialized on line or off line a The
160. TER 6 Logical Drives This chapter explains how to create and manage logical drives using the view and edit Logical drives menu option Note Procedures that have already been described in other chapters are cross referenced instead of repeated Topics covered include Viewing the Logical Drive Status Table on page 126 Viewing Physical Drives on page 126 Creating Logical Drives on page 127 Deleting a Logical Drive on page 127 Partitioning a Logical Drive on page 128 Deleting a Logical Drive Partition on page 128 Changing a Logical Drive Name on page 130 Rebuilding a Logical Drive on page 130 Changing a Logical Drive Controller Assignment on page 131 Expanding the Capacity of a Logical Drive on page 131 Adding Physical Drives on page 135 Performing a Parity Check on page 137 Overwriting Inconsistent Parity on page 138 Generating a Check Parity Error Event on page 139 Clearing a Fatal Fail Logical Drive Condition on page 139 Copying and Replacing Drives With Drives of Larger Capacity on page 140 Scanning Drives for Bad Blocks on page 143 Shutting Down a Logical Drive on page 144 Changing Write Policy for a Logical Drive on page 145 125 Viewing the Logical Drive Status Table To check and configure logical drives choose view and edit Logical drives from the Main Menu For a description of th
161. To View the Channel Configuration on page 49 To Unmap and Delete a Logical Drive on page 49 To Verify the Optimization Mode on page 51 To Change the Optimization Mode on page 51 To Check Physical Drive Availability on page 52 To Configure the Channel Mode on page 55 To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID on page 56 To Change Cylinder and Head Settings on page 59 To Create a Logical Drive on page 59 To Change a Controller Assignment Optional on page 68 To Assign a Logical Drive Name Optional on page 69 To Partition a Logical Drive Optional on page 70 To Map a Logical Drive Partition on page 73 To Label a LUN on page 76 To Create Device Files for Newly Mapped LUNs on page 77 To Save a Configuration to NVRAM on page 78 Before configuring your array carefully read chapters 1 2 and 3 47 Note As you perform the operations described in this and other chapters you might periodically see event message pop up on the screen To dismiss an event message after you ve read it press Escape To prevent event messages for displaying so that you can only read them by displaying the event message log press Ctrl C You can press Ctrl C again at any time to enable pop up displays of event messages Viewing Event Logs on the Screen on page 281 for more information about event messages Existing Logical Drive Configuration If you are confi
162. WWN for your host For detailed instructions for creating host filters see LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only on page 111 Note You can create a maximum of 128 host filters You can create a maximum of 64 WWNs Note The process of creating host filters is easier using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service To Map a Logical Drive Partition From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns A list of available channels IDs and their associated controllers is displayed Select a channel and host ID on the primary controller If the Logical Drive and Logical Volume menu options are displayed choose Logical Drive to display the LUN table Select the LUN you want to map the drive to A list of available logical drives is displayed Select the logical drive LD that you want to map to the selected LUN The partition table is displayed Select the partition you want to map to the selected LUN Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 113 amp Main Menu view and edit Logical drives LUN LU ALD Size tMH gt RAID view and edit logical Volumes a S S E 5 ecen joen Size tMH gt ne TT 6385H LUN LU LD DRU Part ition Size CMB gt Logical Drive Partition Channel ID Lun The partition is now mapped to the selected LUN 4 Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives LUN LU LD view and edit logical Wolumes LD T CHL A ID 46
163. You can assign a name to each logical drive These logical drive names are used only in RAID firmware administration and monitoring and do not appear anywhere on the host After you assign a drive name you can change it at any time To Assign a Logical Drive Name Optional From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives Select a logical drive Choose logical drive Name 4 Type the name you want to give the logical drive in the New Logical Drive Name field and press Return to save the name Cie m u jeen sears afe Po svsnasva wn fais 68952 conl _ EE eee ee 1 I PSS oe Bue SiSF9SFi 66952 GOOD I 7IE en ee i ee Delete logical drive Partition logical drive 1 Current Logical Drive Name Hew Logical Drive Name New Hame Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 69 AN Partitions You can divide a logical drive into several partitions or use the entire logical drive as a single partition You can configure up to 32 partitions and up to 128 LUN assignments For guidelines on setting up 128 LUNs see Planning for 128 LUNs on a SCSI Array Optional on page 158 Caution If you modify the size of a partition or logical drive all data on the drive is lost Note If you plan to map hundreds of LUNs the process is easier if you use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for more inf
164. a Low 188 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Media scan is not performed until other tasks have been completed a Normal Media scan is typically performed within three seconds Improved Media scan is typically performed within one second a High Media scan is performed immediately b Select a priority Optional Configure the media scan iteration count to specify whether the physi cal drive is checked one time or continuously by choosing Iteration Count and then choosing Yes to confirm the change When media scan is satisfactorily configured press Escape and then choose Yes to begin the media scan A notification is displayed LG x NOTICE CHL x ID x Starting Media Scan To Terminate a Media Scan You can select an individual logical drive and abort the media scan of a specific physical drive in that logical drive From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives Select a physical drive that is currently being scanned Choose mediA scan Abort Media scan and then choose Yes to terminate the media scan SCSI Drive Utilities Reserved Do not use the scsi drive Utilities menu options unless you are directed to use them by technical support Chapter 9 Physical Drives 189 Note This menu option is only displayed if disk reserved space has been deleted see Changing Disk Reserved Space on page 192 SCSI Drive Low Level
165. a progress bar 34732 20 MB NONE 34732 200MB GLOBAL STAND BY SEAGATE T336753FSUN36C SES SUN___StorEage 3510F A p 6 Optional drives o close the progress bar press Escape to return to the table of SCSI If you close the progress bar and want to return to it so you can view the cloning progress or abort the drive clone operation you can perform the following steps 180 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 a Select the drive indicated as CLONING Size MB Speed LG_DRU Sedius Wendarcand Product 10 34732 20AME ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36C 34732 200ME aT ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G View drive information ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G Identify scsi drive HOHE FR MT DRU SEAGATE 1T336753FSUN36G source Drive Channel 2 ID 6 LONING SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G Uiew clone progress Abort clone StorEdge 3516F A b Choose clone Failing drive to view the current status Note You can identify the source drive and choose View clone progress or choose Abort clone if you selected the wrong drive When the process is completed the following message is displayed LG 0 Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 2 ID 6 Copy and Replace Completed 7 Press Escape to clear the message and display the SCSI drives status after the cloning process Perpetual Clone Data on the source drive the drive with a predicted error or any selected me
166. an on the front bezel back online _RPM SES Device Events SES event messages include the following SES Device Alerts SES C_ I_ Power Supply_ Device Not Supported Unrecognizable device type on C_ L SES SES C_ I_ Cooling Fan_ Device Not Supported Unrecognizable device type on C_ L SES 368 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 SES C_ I_ Temp Sensor _ Device Not Supported As above SES C_ I_ device not supported As above SES C_ I_ UPS_ Device Not Supported As above SES C_ I_ UPS device not supported As above SES C2 112 Voltage sensor 3 Under Voltage Critical A voltage sensor has detected a critical under voltage condition SES C2 112 Voltage sensor 2 Power Supply Failure Detected A voltage sensor has detected a power supply failure SES C2 112 Voltage sensor 2 Power Supply Failure Detected SES Device Notifications SES C_ I_ Cooling Fan _ Fan Back On Line Cooling fan_ back online reported through SES C_I Appendix E Event Messages 36 SES C_ I_ Temp Sensor _ Temperature Back to Non Critical Levels Temperature restored to within safety range detected by SES C_ I_ sensor SES C_I_ Power Supply _ Power Supply Back On Line Power supply_ back online reported through SES C_L_ SES C_ I_ UPS _ UPS Power Back On Line UPS_ power back online reported through SES C_L_ General Peripheral Devi
167. and add local or global spare drives to the preconfigured array you must first unmap and then delete the existing logical drives For more information about deleting a logical drive see Deleting Logical Drives on page 49 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives Unassigned logical drives show a RAID level of NONE Select the first available unassigned logical drive LG You can create as many as 16 logical drives using physical drives on any loop When prompted to Create Logical Drive choose Yes to confirm your choice and display a pull down list of supported RAID levels Select a RAID level from the list to assign to the logical drive Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 59 Note RAID 5 is used as an example in the following steps Note NRAID does not provide data redundancy The NRAID option that appears in some firmware menus does not provide the protection of other RAID levels and is rarely used For more information about RAID levels see RAID Levels on page 308 5 Select the drives you want to include in the logical drive from the list of available physical drives using the steps below You must select at least the minimum number of drives required for the selected RAID level m RAID 3 and RAID 5 require a minimum of three physical drives m RAID 0 requires a minimum of two physical drives m RAID 1 requires a minimum of two physical drives
168. and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Drive Motor Spin Up and then choose Yes to confirm the change 236 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Configuring Disk Access Delay Time This function sets the delay time that the controller waits before it tries to access the physical drives after power on The default is 15 seconds The range is from no delay to 75 seconds To Set Disk Access Delay Time From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Disk Access Delay Time to display a list of delay intervals Select a delay interval and then choose Yes to confirm your choice Configuring Drive I O Timeout The Drive I O timeout controls the time interval that the controller waits for a drive to respond If the controller attempts to read data from or write data to a drive but the drive does not respond within the Drive I O timeout interval the drive will be designated a failed drive Caution The correct setting for Drive I O Timeout is 30 seconds Do not change this setting Setting the timeout to a lower value or to Default causes the controller to designated a drive as failed while a drive is still retrying or when a drive is unable to arbitrate the bus Setting the timeout to a greater value causes the controller to keep waiting for a drive and it can sometimes cause a host timeout When the drive detects
169. anning drive media 143 for bad blocks with media scan 188 scanning drives SCSI 174 SCSI arrays configuration and reconfiguration of 47 SCSI drive utilities low level format 190 SCSI Enclosure Services See SES SCSI transfer width 200 secondary controller SCSI IDs 198 sector ranges changing FC and SATA 96 sector ranges changing SCSI 59 Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology See SMART sensor locations SAF TE temperature 260 SES temperature 255 SES enclosure information 172 firmware upgrading 296 temperature sensor locations 255 SES check time 239 SES status viewing 250 settings how to record 323 shutting down the controller 275 single bus configuration SCSI 169 size of drive 288 SMART 179 disabling detection 188 Index 401 how cloning options work 186 testing a drive 187 SMART detection enabling 186 SMART technology defined 185 SNMP configuring 222 enabling and disabling 211 SNMP agent ini file example 224 SNMP traps enabling 223 Solaris device files for LUNs FC and SATA 122 Solaris device files for LUNs SCSI 77 spare drives assigning a global 173 assigning a local 173 deleting 174 global 5 local 5 logical volumes 150 specifications firmware 317 speed of drive 288 split bus configuration SCSI 169 SSH enabling and disabling 211 STAND BY drive status 289 status table channel 290 host and drive channels 196
170. anning Drives SCSI Only on page 174 for more information To Set the Periodic Drive Check Time From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Periodic Drive Check Time to display a list of intervals Select an interval and then choose Yes to confirm your choice Caution Do not set this interval for less than one second Setting Periodic Drive Check Time to less than one second can adversely impact the array s performance Configuring Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time If there are remote devices in your RAID enclosure monitored by SAF TE or SES including power supplies use this function to determine the interval after which the controller checks the status of those devices Caution Do not set this interval for less than one second Setting Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time to less than one second can adversely impact the array s reliability Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 239 v To Set the Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time to display a list of intervals 2 Select an interval and then choose Yes to confirm your choice Configuring Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time This menu option periodically polls the unit to detect the replacement of a bad drive If no
171. ant to enable or disable and then choose Yes to confirm the change Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 243 Note Follow the same procedure to enable or disable each method Redundant Controller Parameters The Redundant Controller Parameters menu allows you to enable or disable cache synchronization Enabling and Disabling Cache Synchronization If your redundant controller system is configured with Write Back Cache disabled you can disable Cache Synchronization on Write Through Mirroring and transferring data between partner controllers will be turned off This increases array performance for subsystems that operate without write caching Caution If a controller fails and cache synchronization is disabled all data that was in cache at the time of failure is lost v To Enable or Disable Cache Synchronization From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Redundant Controller Parameters Cache Synchronization on Write Through to change the current setting and then choose Yes to confirm the change Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host lunsa view and edit Drives view and edit channels view and edit Configuration parameters Communication Parameters Caching Parameters Host Driv Disable Cache Synchronization on Write Through lt eenwe Disk G Yes No Cache Synchronization on Weite Through
172. array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array 108 146 Gbyte 14 39 7 20 14 26 Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array 72 400 Gbyte 26 18 13 09 25 82 TABLE 3 7 shows the maximum number of disks that can be used in a single logical drive based upon the drive size and the optimization method chosen TABLE 3 7 Maximum Number of Disks per Logical Drive SCSI Random and FC Random or SATA SATA Drive Size Sequential Optimization Sequential Optimization Random Optimization Sequential Optimization 36 Gbyte 36 108 N A N A 73 Gbyte 36 108 N A N A 146 Gbyte 36 108 N A N A 250 Gbyte n a n a 66 72 300 Gbyte 36 55 random N A N A 108 sequential 400 Gbyte n a n a 41 72 Note Except for SATA arrays using random optimization it is possible though impractical to employ all available disks in a single logical drive 24 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 TABLE 3 8 shows the maximum usable capacity of a single logical drive in a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array depending on drive size TABLE 3 8 Maximum Usable Capacity in Gbyte per Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Logical Drive Drive Size RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 3 5 36 Gbyte 3636 1818 3603 73 Gbyte 7357 3678 7289 146 Gbyte 14740 7370 14603 300 Gbyte 30148 15074 29869 TABLE 3 9 shows the maximum usable capacity of a single logical drive in a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array depending on drive size TABLE 3 9 Maximum Usable Capacity in Gbyte per Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI Logical
173. array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array has two fully redundant power supplies with load sharing capabilities The sensors monitor the voltage temperature and fan units in each power supply TABLE 12 9 Power Supply Sensors SCSI Element ID Description Location Alarm Condition 0 Left Power Supply 0 Left viewed from the Voltage temperature or rear fan fault 1 Right Power Supply 1 Right viewed fromthe Voltage temperature or rear fan fault Chapter 12 Peripheral Devices 261 Setting Peripheral Device Entry The Set Peripheral Device Entry menu options include the following m Redundant Controller Primary m Event Trigger Operations Redundant Controller Primary This menu option enables you to force the failure of either the primary or secondary controller Forcing Primary Controller Failure Reserved You can force a primary controller failure to test an array s failover functionality This feature is normally used only for testing and troubleshooting v To Force a Primary Controller Failure Reserved From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Set Peripheral Device Entry Redundant Controller force Primary controller failure and then choose Yes to confirm your choice The primary controller is disabled and the array fails over to the secondary controller A period of time is necessary before the controller s functionality is restored Forcing Secondary Controller Failure
174. array for the first time or reconfigure it It describes the normal sequence of events you follow to configure an array To View the Logical Drive Configuration on page 80 To View the Channel Configuration on page 81 To Unmap and Delete a Logical Drive on page 81 To Verify the Optimization Mode on page 83 To Change the Optimization Mode on page 83 To Check Physical Drive Availability on page 84 To Enable or Disable Mixed Drive Support on page 86 To Modify a Channel Mode on page 87 To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID on page 91 To Assign an ID From a Different Range on page 92 To Change the Fibre Connection Protocol on page 94 To Change Cylinder and Head Settings on page 96 To Create a Logical Drive on page 96 To Change a Controller Assignment Optional on page 106 To Assign a Logical Drive Name Optional on page 106 To Partition a Logical Drive Optional on page 108 To Map a Logical Drive Partition on page 113 To Create Host Filters FC and SATA Arrays Only on page 115 To Label a LUN on page 121 To Create Device Files for Newly Mapped LUNs on page 122 To Save a Configuration to NVRAM on page 123 Before configuring your array carefully read chapters 1 2 and 3 79 Note As you perform the operations described in this and other chapters you might periodically see event message pop up on the
175. at are mapped to the logical drive you want to delete 5 Press Escape to return to the Main Menu 6 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 7 Select the logical drive that you unmapped and want to delete 8 Choose Delete logical drive and if it is safe to delete the logical drive choose Yes to confirm the deletion Cache Optimization Mode SCSI Before creating any logical drives determine the appropriate optimization mode for the array The type of application accessing the array determines whether to use sequential or random optimization See Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 for a detailed description of sequential and random optimization If you are modifying an existing configuration and do not want to delete your existing logical drives verify your optimization mode but do not change it 50 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 v To Verify the Optimization Mode 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Caching Parameters Sequential I O is the default optimization mode Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit Drives view and edit channels it Configuration Communication Parameters Caching Parameters H eenwe 2 To accept the optimization mode that is displayed press Escape v To Change t
176. ata rate to display a menu of data rate choices m Auto 1 GHz mw 2 GHz Note If the channel being configured is connected to a 1 GHz HBA that does not support auto negotiation protocols choose 1 GHz instead of Auto If you select Auto when the channel is connected to one of these older HBAs the host may initially be able to access the array but if that host is powered off and back on the host will lose access to the array Refer to the release notes for your array for a list of supported HBAs with identification of HBAs that must be connected to a 1 GHz channel because they do not support auto negotiation 4 Choose a data rate from the menu and choose Yes to confirm your choice Note Ensure that you set a host channel s data rate to a rate that is compatible with the HBA or data switch that is attached to that channel If you assign a data rate that is not compatible with an attached HBA or network switch hosts connected through that channel will be unable to access storage on the array Note Channels 2 3 4 and 5 on a Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array only support 2 GHz If you try to configure one of these channels to 1 GHz or Auto the array will appear to change the data rate and the rate you assign will be displayed in the Channel Status table However if you assign a data rate of 1 GHz to one of these channels the port for that channel is disabled If you assign a data rate of Auto to one of these channels the p
177. ation is obtained The channels and IDs are displayed in hexadecimal format m TYPE The device type such as RAID array disk or SES m LIP Total number of loop initializations that have occurred on the channel m LinkFail Total number of instances of link failures This hardware counter is a sum of the remainder of the following counters m LossOfSync Total number of instances of loss of sync This is the number of times the Fibre Channel chip failed to receive the proper comma character within a primitive three times m LossOfSignal Total number of instances of loss of signal PrimErr Total number of instances of primitive sequence protocol errors InvalTXWord Total number of instances of invalid transmission words This error indicates either an invalid transmit word or disparity error a InvalCRC Total number of instances of invalid CRC or the number of times a frame was received and the CRC was not as expected To check the Fibre Channel Error statistics perform the following steps 268 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices gt Fibre Channel Error Statistics Local Channel Statistics to display local channel statistics of ree uf eineaaineorsfnesorsi eine ivan Iwate 1 H H H H H H H H H 4 H 2 Choose Drive Side Device Statistics to display drive side device statistics eroje ufeinraaineorsofn
178. ation change takes effect only after the controller is reset Creating Logical Drives The RAID array is preconfigured with one RAID 0 logical drive as described in Default Logical Drive Configuration on page 20 Each logical drive consists of a single partition by default This section describes how to modify the RAID level or add logical drives In these procedures you configure a logical drive to contain one or more physical drives based on the desired RAID level and divide the logical drive into additional partitions Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 57 Note Depending on the size and RAID level it can take several hours to build a logical drive Online initialization however enables you to begin configuring and using the logical drive before initialization is complete If you do not use on line initialization be sure to allow enough time when you create logical drives Creating a 2 Tbyte RAID 5 logical drive can take up to m 2 25 hours for Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI arrays and Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays m 10 3 hours for a Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte The Solaris operating system requires drive geometry for various operations including newfs For the appropriate drive geometry to be presented to the Solaris operating system for logical drives larger than 253 Gbyte use the default settings shown below to cover all logical drives over 253 Gbyte Thes
179. attached HBAs and displays a list of WWNs This list includes m All worldwide names that HBAs on the selected channel have propagated to the array m All WWNs on the selected channel that have been manually entered using the Manual add host filter entry option m All WWNs that have been manually added to the Edit Host ID WWN Name List view and edit Host luns Edit Host ID WWN Name List including worldwide names from HBAs that are not connected to the selected channel See Manually Adding WWN Entries Using the Host ID WWN Name List on page 164 for more information about this menu option When you select a worldwide name from this list ensure that the worldwide name you select is from an HBA on the channel where you are creating the filter Alternatively you can add a worldwide name manually by choosing Manually add host filter entry rather than Add from current device list Then type the Host ID WWN in the text area provided and press Return When you manually enter a worldwide name using the Manually add host filter entry menu option that WWN only appears in the list of WWNs when you are creating a filter on a channel where the WWN was initially added Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 8 From the device list select the WWN number of the server for which you are creating a filter and choose Yes to confirm your choice A filter configuration screen d
180. ault Parameters on page 331 Caching Parameters on page 335 Peripheral Device Type Parameters on page 336 Host Side and Drive Side Parameters on page 337 Other Configuration Parameters on page 339 The most important parameters to review are the caching parameters which impact the block size and optimization performance Many parameters are optional or unused depending on the applicable product Appendix D Parameter Summary Tables 333 The next three tables show the default settings and range of available values for various communication parameter settings TABLE D 6 Communication Parameters gt RS 232 Port Configuration User Defined Parameter Baud Rate Data Routing Terminal Emulation FC and SATA Default Setting 38 400 Direct to Port Enabled SCSI Default Setting 38 400 Direct to Port Enabled Range of Values 9 600 19 200 4 800 2 400 38 400 Point to Point PPP Direct to Port Disabled Enabled TABLE D 7 Communication Parameter gt Internet Protocol TCP IP User Defined Parameter TCP IP Addresses FC and SATA Default Setting DHCP Client SCSI Default Setting DHCP Client TABLE D 8 Communication Parameters gt Network Protocol Support User Defined Parameter Telnet HTTP HTTPS FTP SSH PriAgent 334 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 FC and SATA Default Setting Enabled Enabled
181. ble lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit Drives view and edit channel DefSynClk DefWid 8 Tern Cur ynClk ETES AS a eee et 7 8G QMHz Wide L Off 8H QMHz Wide E A AMHz Wide 46 8MHz hose 22 a ao ome viae ul orf async Ranvow o ewro soriar e nal 1 ate seriar 2 Select the channel that you want to modify which displays a menu of channel options 4 Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives View and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns View and edit Drives view and edit channel Curs unGlk SS SET EEE Hi IL Off 86 6MHz Wide L i Off 40 amHz Wide Primary controller scsi id Secondary controller scsi id Off 8H 8MHz scsi Terminator sync transfer Clock I Narrow Wide transfer parity check Enabled i i GHz view chip inFormat ion 3 Choose channel Mode to change the channel from host to drive or drive to host and then choose Yes to confirm the mode change This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 4 Choose Yes to reset the controller Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 55 Host Channel IDs Host channel IDs identif
182. ble baud rates is displayed 208 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 AN 2 Select a baud rate and choose Yes to confirm v To Enable or Disable Terminal Emulation Through a Serial Port Caution Do not use the Terminal Emulation menu option This menu option is reserved and should be used only if directed by technical support personnel To enable terminal emulation choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Communication Parameters RS 232 Port Configuration COM1 Configuration Terminal Emulation and choose Yes to confirm Setting an IP Address The controller Ethernet port offers interactive out of band management through three interfaces m Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for details m The Sun StorEdge CLI Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide for details a The firmware application you access when you use the telnet command to connect to the IP address of the controller To access the array using the Ethernet port you must set up an IP address for the controller You can set the IP address by typing in values for the IP address itself the subnet mask and the IP address of the gateway manually If your network is using a Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP server or a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server to automatically configure IP
183. bled Set Peripheral Device Entry gt Event Trigger Operations Controller Failure Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled BBU Low or Failed Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Power Supply Failed Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Fan Failure Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Temperature exceeds Shutdown Period 30 Shutdown Period Disabled threshold minutes 30 minutes Enabled Controller Peripheral Device Configuration gt Voltage and Temperature Parameters Upper Trigger Threshold for Default 3 6V Default 3 6V 3 3V Event Lower Trigger Threshold for Default 2 9V Default 2 9V 3 3V Event Upper Trigger Threshold for Default 5 5V Default 5 5V 5V Event 340 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Shutdown periods from two minutes to one hour Disable 3 4V 3 9V Disable 2 6V 3 2V Disable 5 2V 6 0V TABLE D 14 Peripheral Device Type Parameters View and Edit Peripheral Devices Continued Lower Trigger Threshold for 5V Event Upper Trigger Threshold for 12V Event Lower Trigger Threshold for 12V Event Upper Trigger Threshold for CPU Temperature Events Lower Trigger Threshold for CPU Temperature Events Upper Trigger Threshold for Board Temperature Events Lower Trigger Threshold for Board Temperature Events Default 4 5V Default 13 2V Default 10 8V Default 90 C Default 0 C Default 80 C Default 0 C Defau
184. cal drive 4 KB 8 KB 16 KB 32 KB 64 KB 128 KB 256 KB Write policy setting Write back Write through Total number of drive members in this logical drive Number of standby drives available for the logical drive This includes local spare and global spare drives available for the logical drive Number of failed drive members in the logical drive Logical drive name user configurable Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Array 287 Note The SIZE MB parameter for a logical drive might not correspond exactly with the total size reported for each of the physical drives that make up the logical drive when using the view and edit Logical drives menu option Any discrepancy is minor and is a result of how the drive manufacturers report their device size which varies among manufacturers To handle failed incomplete or fatal failure status refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Physical Drive Status Table To check and configure physical drives from the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives and press Return lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs The Physical Drive Status table is displayed with the status of all ph
185. can be used for any logical drive on the array m A local spare drive is a standby drive assigned to serve one specified logical drive When a member drive of this specified logical drive fails the local spare drive becomes a member drive and automatically starts to rebuild m A global spare drive is not reserved for a single logical drive When a member drive from any of the logical drives fails the global spare drive joins that logical drive and automatically starts to rebuild Chapter 1 Before You Begin 5 A local spare drive always has higher priority than the global spare drive Therefore if a drive fails and global and local spares of sufficient capacity are both available the local spare is used If a drive fails in a RAID 5 logical drive replace the failed drive with a new drive to keep the logical drive working To identify a failed drive see Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement on page 176 Caution If you mistakenly remove the wrong drive you will no longer be able to access the logical drive because you have incorrectly failed two drives Local Spare Drives A local spare drive is a standby drive assigned to serve one specified logical drive If a member drive of this specified logical drive fails the local spare drive becomes a member drive and automatically starts to rebuild Local spare drive FIGURE 1 1 Local Dedicated Spare Global Spare Drives A global spare drive is available to support al
186. canned will blink until the media scan is terminated Shutting Down a Logical Drive LG x NOTICE CHL x ID x Starting Media Scan Use the Shutdown logical drive menu option to m terminate I O to a logical drive m write data from cache to the logical drive m place the logical drive in an offline state v To Shut Down a Logical Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drive to display a list of logical drives in the Logical Drive Status table 144 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 2 Select the logical drive that you want to shut down 3 Choose sHutdown logical drive and then choose Yes to shut down the logical drive The Status column of the Logical Drive Status window changes to SHUTDOWN iG 1 tu Rarp sicectp gt status 1 2 3 0 win Pa 2kepsEpo Nalantpi 34476 coon m TE M ES _F __ A E i i j i A cfeuneso erc vare a a of of Bl 2 B B LG N E i SEDFABEY H RAID 34476 SHUTDOWN 3 7 4 Reset the array controller system Functions Reset Controller to restore the logical drive to an online state GOOD status Changing Write Policy for a Logical Drive The global write policy for all logical drives is configured to write back cache default or write through cache as described in Enabling and Disabling Write Back Cache on page 227 You can configure a different write
187. cated to parity Data is divided into blocks and distributed sequentially among the remaining drives You need at least three physical drives for a RAID 3 logical drive RAID 5 Striping with fault tolerance this is the best suited RAID level for multitasking or transaction processing In RAID 5 an entire transfer block is placed on a single drive but there are no dedicated data or parity drives The data and parity are striped across each drive in the disk array so that each drive contains a combination of data and parity blocks This allows data to be reconstructed on a replacement drive in the event of a single disk drive failure The primary advantages of RAID 5 are that e It provides fault tolerance e It increases performance through the ability to perform both read and write seeks in parallel e The cost per usable megabyte of disk storage is low RAID 5 requires at least three drives RAID 1 0 RAID 1 0 combines RAID 0 and RAID 1 to offer mirroring and disk striping RAID 1 0 enables recovery from multiple drive failures because of the full redundancy of the hard disk drives If four or more disk drives are selected for a RAID 1 logical drive RAID 1 0 is performed automatically RAID 3 0 A logical volume with several RAID 3 member logical drives RAID 5 0 A logical volume with several RAID 5 member logical drives 310 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 RAID 0 RAID 0 implements block
188. ccessible even before the initialization process is completed LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Off Line Initialization Off Line means the array is accessible only after the initialization process is completed The controller subsystem starts initializing the logical drive once the array is configured On Line Initialization of Logical Drive_ Completed A message related to Immediate Array Availability Initialization of logical drive LG_ is completed Off Line Initialization of Logical Drive_ Completed Initialization of logical drive LG_ is completed Creation of Logical Drive_ Completed A message related to Immediate Array Availability Member hard drives have been successfully grouped into a logical drive LG_ The logical drive is now ready for I O and the controller subsystem will find appropriate time to complete parity initialization Appendix E Event Messages 361 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Rebuild The rebuild process on logical drive LG_ has started Rebuild of Logical Drive_ Completed Logical drive LG_ has been successfully rebuilt LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Parity Regeneration Start regenerating parity data of logical drive LG_ Parity Regeneration of Logical Drive_ Completed Parity regeneration on logical drive_ completed LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting On Line Expansion Start expanding the logical drive Data re striping is carried out later in the
189. ce Events General peripheral device event messages include the following General Peripheral Device Alerts Peripheral Device ALERT Power Supply_ Failure Detected Power supply failure detected Peripheral Device ALERT Power Supply_ Not Present Power supply module installed but not present now ALERT Low Power Supply_ Voltage Detected _ _V Low voltage detected from power supply module __ Peripheral Device ALERT FAN_ Not Present Fan module_ installed but not present now 370 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Peripheral Device ALERT FAN_ Failure Detected Fan_ failure detected Peripheral Device ALERT Low FAN_ Speed Detected __ RPM Fan module_ low rotation speed detected __RPM Peripheral Device ALERT CPU Cold Temperature Detected _ _C CPU temperature dropped below preset threshold Peripheral Device ALERT Elevated Temperature Alert Elevated ambient temperature within chassis Peripheral Device ALERT Temperature Sensor _ Failure Detected Peripheral device temperature sensor_ failure detected Peripheral Device ALERT Temperature Sensor _ Not Present Peripheral device temp sensor_ installed but not present now Peripheral Device ALERT Cold Temperature _ Detected _C Cold temperature detected by device_ _C Peripheral Device ALERT UPS_ AC Power Failure Detected UPS AC power failure Peripheral Device ALERT UPS_ Battery Failure Detected U
190. cepts 311 Note RAID 1 does not allow expansion RAID levels 3 and 5 permit expansion by adding drives to an existing array Logical drive Physical disks Block 4 FIGURE A 7 RAID 1 Configuration In addition to the data protection that RAID 1 provides this RAID level also improves performance In cases where multiple concurrent I O operations are occurring these operations can be distributed between disk copies thus reducing total effective data access time RAID 1 0 RAID 1 0 combines RAID 0 and RAID 1 to offer mirroring and disk striping Using RAID 1 0 is a time saving feature that enables you to configure a large number of disks for mirroring in one step It is not a standard RAID level option that you can choose it does not appear in the list of RAID level options supported by the controller If four or more disk drives are selected for a RAID 1 logical drive RAID 1 0 is performed automatically 312 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Physical disks Logical drive Block 6 lt Mirroring gt Block 8 FIGURE A 8 RAID 1 0 Configuration RAID 3 RAID 3 implements block striping with dedicated parity This RAID level breaks data into logical blocks the size of a disk block and then stripes these blocks across several drives One drive is dedicated to parity In the event that a disk fails the original data can be reconstructed using the parity information and the i
191. creating your configuration from these records since no synchronization from a second controller is possible Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide for information about replacing controllers Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines Before creating or modifying logical drives determine the appropriate optimization mode for the RAID array The controller supports two optimization modes sequential I O and random I O Sequential I O is the default mode When you specify sequential or random cache optimization the controller determines a default stripe size for newly created logical drives But you can specify whatever stripe size you choose for each logical drive when you create it enabling you to maximize performance by matching stripe size with your application requirements Since different applications may use different logical drives this functionality provides you with greatly increased flexibility m For sequential optimization available stripe size choices include 16 Kbyte 32 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte and 256 Kbyte m The default stripe size for sequential optimization is 128 Kbyte for all logical drives except RAID 3 which is 16 Kbyte m For sequential optimization the cache block size is 128 Kbyte m For random optimization available stripe size choices include 4 Kbyte 8 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 32 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte and 256 Kbyte m The default stripe size for random optimization
192. cted Starting Clone SMART errors detected a spare is conducted to rebuild and or replace the faulty drive This is done according to the preset scheme SMART CH ID Predictable Failure Detected Clone Failed SMART errors detected and a spare is conducted to rebuild The cloning process is halted due to power interruption or yet another member drive has failed Interruption to array integration will halt the cloning process for example drive failure Drive Notifications CHL ID SCSI Drive NOTICE Scan SCSI Drive Successful Scanning new missing drives from a SCSI channel successful CHL NOTICE Fibre Channel Loop Connection Restored CHL _ loop connection restored CHL ID NOTICE Redundant Path for CHL ID Restored Alternate connection to the dual ported device CHL _ ID _ is restored Appendix E Event Messages 353 Channel Events Channel event messages include the following Channel Alerts CHL _ Drive SCSI Channel ALERT Unexpected Select Timeout Drive channel CHL _ select timeout The specified drive channel cannot be selected by the controller The channel has been disconnected or the mode cabling termination or canister for the channel is out of order CHL RCC Channel ALERT Gross Phase Signal Error Detected Gross phase signal error found on the channel path used for redundant controller communications CHL _ Drive SCSI Channel ALERT Gross Phase Signal Error Detected Unexpected disconnect
193. ction 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection to display a list of values 2 Choose a value and then choose Yes to confirm This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 3 Choose Yes to reset the controller Peripheral Device Type Parameters Reserved Do not use this menu option to change the Peripheral Device Type setting from Enclosure Services Device The Peripheral Device Type Parameters menu option is used only when attempting to configure an array through an in band connection before a logical drive has been created and mapped to a host LUN When you follow the instructions for creating a logical drive using a serial port connection or a telnet session the Peripheral Device Type Parameters menu option is unnecessary Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration Physical drive capacity is determined by the host computer according to the number of blocks Some host operating systems read the capacity of the array based on the cylinder head sector count of the drives The RAID controller firmware enables you 232 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006
194. cts on page 215 System Group Objects on page 216 Enterprise Objects on page 220 a Configuring the Notification Processing Center NPC on page 222 a A Simple Sample agent ini File on page 224 a A Complete Sample agent ini File on page 224 a agent ini File Parameters on page 225 m Caching Parameters on page 227 a Enabling and Disabling Write Back Cache on page 227 a Setting Optimization on page 228 a Setting Periodic Cache Flush Time on page 228 m Host Side Parameters Menu Options on page 229 Maximum Queued I O Count on page 229 LUNs Per Host SCSI ID on page 230 Maximum Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connections on page 230 Number of Tags Reserved for Each Host LUN Connection on page 231 Peripheral Device Type Parameters Reserved on page 232 Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration on page 232 Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte on Solaris Systems on page 233 a Configuring In Band EI Management on page 234 a Fibre Connection Options FC and SATA Only on page 234 m Drive Side Parameters Menu on page 236 Configuring Drive Motor Spin Up Reserved on page 236 207 Configuring Disk Access Delay Time on page 237 Configuring Drive I O Timeout on page 237 Configuring the Maximum Tag Count Tag Command Queuing on page 238 Configuring Periodic Drive Check Time on page
195. cune partie de ce produit ou document ne peut tre reproduite sous aucune forme par quelque moyen que ce soit sans l autorisation pr alable et crite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de licence s il y en a Le logiciel d tenu par des tiers et qui comprend la technologie relative aux polices de caract res est prot g par un copyright et licenci par des fournisseurs de Sun Des parties de ce produit pourront tre d riv es des syst mes Berkeley BSD licenci s par l Universit de Californie UNIX est une marque d pos e aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays et licenci e exclusivement par X Open Company Ltd Oracle est une marque d pos e registre de Oracle Corporation Sun Sun Microsystems le logo Sun Sun StorEdge AnswerBook2 docs sun com et Solaris sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques d pos es de Sun Microsystems Inc aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE EN L ETAT ET TOUTES AUTRES CONDITIONS DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES SONT FORMELLEMENT EXCLUES DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE YCOMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE A L APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L ABSENCE DE CONTREFA ON Ka Adobe PostScript Contents Preface xxix Before You Begin 1 Supported Hardware Platforms 2 Key Concepts 4 RAID Planning Considerations 4 Local and Global Spare Drives 5 Local Spare Drives 6 Global Spare
196. cy the total working maximum number of LUNs is 64 LUNs Note The LUN ID numbers and the number of LUNs available per logical drive can vary according to the number of logical drives and the ID assignments you want on each channel 9 Connect the first switch to ports 0 and 4 of the upper controller 10 Connect the second switch to ports 1 and 5 of the lower controller 11 Connect each server to each switch 12 Install and enable multipathing software on each connected server The multipathing software prevents path failure but does not alter the controller redundancy through which one controller automatically takes over all functions of a second failed controller 38 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 A Sample DAS Loop Configuration The typical direct attached storage DAS configuration shown in FIGURE 3 3 and FIGURE 3 4 includes four servers a dual controller array and two expansion units Expansion units are optional Servers as shown in FIGURE 3 3 and FIGURE 3 4 are connected to the channels shown in TABLE 3 12 TABLE 3 12 Connection for Four Servers in a DAS Configuration Server Number Upper I O Controller Module Lower I O Controller Module 1 0 5 2 4 1 3 5 0 4 1 4 Establishing complete redundancy and maintaining high availability requires the use of multipathing software such as Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software To configure for multipathing 1 Establish two connectio
197. d 66 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 14 Press Escape to close the drive initialization message A progress bar displays the progress of initialization as it occurs You can press Escape to remove the initialization progress bar and continue working with menu options to create additional logical drives The percentage of completion for each initialization in progress is displayed in the upper left corner of the window as shown in the following example screen BAT ve ofa mssecw gt sretne eafefoefefeo er mene Pa 13843684 Na RAIDS 103428 Good On Line ee ializi be Se EEO 68952 Goon 15 Press Escape to dismiss the notification The newly created logical drive is displayed in the status window Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 67 AN size seaews a 2 plo ee eee L 68952 GOODI _ 7 T g a a g a g Controller Assignment By default logical drives are automatically assigned to the primary controller If you assign half of the logical drives to the secondary controller in a dual controller array the maximum speed and performance is somewhat improved due to the redistribution of the traffic To balance the workload between both controllers you can distribute your logical drives between the primary controller displayed as the Primary ID or PID and the secondary controller displayed as the Secondary ID or SID Caution
198. d the possibility of data corruption in the event of a controller failure This will have a negative effect on performance To avoid either issue use dual controllers Note Using two single controller arrays in a clustering environment with host based mirroring provides some of the advantages of using a dual controller However you still need to disable the Write Back Cache in case one of the single controllers fails and you want to avoid the risk of data corruption For this reason a dual controller configuration is preferable The caching parameters configured using the view and edit Configuration parameters menu option are applied globally to all the logical drives You can also configure write back policy for individual logical drives and logical volumes that are independent of the RAID array write back policy For more information see a To Configure a Logical Drive s Write Policy on page 145 for a procedure that describes configuring write policy for a specific logical drive a Creating a Logical Volume on page 151 for a procedure for creating a logical volume that includes instructions for configuring write back cache for a specific logical volume m Event Trigger Operations on page 263 for information about setting triggers to automatically switch from write back enabled to write back disabled write through if certain hardware malfunctions occur Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 227 v To Change
199. d Parameter Peripheral Device Type Peripheral Device Type Qualifier Device Supports Removable Media LUN Applicability FC and SATA Default Setting Enclosure Services Device Connected Disabled Undefined LUN Os Only SCSI Default Setting Enclosure Services Device Connected Disabled Range of Values No Device Present Direct Access Device Sequential Access Device Processor Device CD ROM Device Scanner Device MO Device Storage Array Controller Device Enclosure Services Device Unknown Device Disconnected Connected Enabled Disabled Disabled 336 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 TABLE D 12 Host Side and Drive Side Parameters User Defined Parameter Host side Parameters Maximum Queued I O Count LUNs per Host SCSI ID Maximum Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connections Number of Tags Reserved for Each Host LUN Connection In band Management FC and SATA Default Setting 1024 32 1024 1024 Enabled SCSI Default Setting 1024 32 128 32 Enabled Host side Parameters gt Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Parameters Sector Ranges Head Ranges Cylinder Ranges Variable 64 lt 65536 Host side Parameters gt Fibre Connection Option Fibre Connection Option Loop only Variable 64 lt 65536 N A Appendix D Parameter Summary Tables Range of Values Auto or 1 1024
200. d Rate 208 v To Enable or Disable Terminal Emulation Through a Serial Port 209 Setting anIP Address 209 v To Setan Array s IP Address 210 Network Protocol Support 211 v To Enable and Disable Network Protocols 211 xii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Setting Telnet Inactivity Timeout Time 212 v To Set the Telnet Inactivity Timeout 212 SNMP 212 SNMP Traps 213 SNMP Trap Objects 215 System Group Objects 216 Enterprise Objects 220 Using Multiple Product MIBs 221 Configuring the Notification Processing Center NPC 222 v To Create and Save the NPC Configuration File agent ini 223 A Simple Sample agent ini File 224 A Complete Sample agent ini File 224 agent ini File Parameters 225 The SNMP_TRAP Section 225 The EMAIL Section 226 The BROADCAST Section 226 Caching Parameters 227 Enabling and Disabling Write Back Cache 227 v To Change the Write Back Cache Option 228 Setting Optimization 228 Setting Periodic Cache Flush Time 228 v To Set Periodic Cache Flush Time 228 Host Side Parameters Menu Options 229 Maximum Queued I O Count 229 v To Set the Maximum Queued I O Count 229 LUNs Per Host SCSI TID 230 v To Change the Number of LUNs Per Host SCSI ID 230 Maximum Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connections 230 Contents xiii v To Change the Maximum Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connections 231 Number of Tags Reserved for Each Host LUN Connection 231 v To Modify the Tag Command Queuing on the Host LUN C
201. d sections Typical steps for completing a first time configuration of the array are as follows 1 Set up the serial port connection 2 Set an IP address for the controller See Setting an IP Address on page 209 3 Determine whether sequential or random optimization is more appropriate for your applications and configure your array accordingly See Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 for more information Also see Cache Optimization Mode SCSI on page 50 for information about how to configure a SCSI array s optimization mode or Cache Optimization Mode FC and SATA on page 82 for information about how to configure an FC or SATA array s optimization mode 4 Check physical drive availability See To Check Physical Drive Availability on page 52 for a SCSI array See Physical Drive Status on page 84 for FC or SATA arrays 5 Optional Configure host channels as drive channels See Channel Settings on page 54 for a SCSI array See Channel Settings on page 86 for FC or SATA arrays Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 43 6 For a Fibre Channel or SATA array confirm or change the Fibre Connection Option point to point or loop See Fibre Connection Protocol Guidelines on page 31 and Fibre Connection Protocol on page 94 for the procedure to configure the Fibre Connection protocol 7 Revise or add host IDs on host channels See
202. data on any drive to a new drive There are two options for cloning a failing drive m Replace after Clone m Perpetual Clone These options are described in the following sections Chapter9 Physical Drives 179 Replacing After Clone Data on the source drive the drive with the predicted error or any selected member drive is cloned to a standby spare The spare drive then becomes the new source drive The status of the original source drive is redefined as a USED DRIVE System administrators can replace the used drive with a new one and then configure the new drive as a spare drive Note If no standby drive local or global spare drive is available you must add a new drive and configure it as a local or global spare drive If no standby drive is available the clone Failing drive option is not displayed v To Replace After Clone 1 Choose view and edit Drives 2 Select the member drive that you want to clone 3 Choose clone Failing drive This option is displayed only if a standby drive is available 4 Choose Replace After Clone and then choose Yes to clone the drive The controller automatically starts the cloning process using the existing standby local or global spare drive to clone the source drive the target member drive with a predicted error A notification message is displayed LG 0 Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 2 ID 6 Starting Clone 5 Press Escape to clear the message and display
203. drive Assignments logical volume Assignments view and edit Host luns view and edit channels Baud rate 38 400 Data Routing Direct to Port Terminal Emulation Enabled Internet Protocol TCP IP Write Back Cache Optimization for Sequential or Random I O Maximum Queued I O Count Luns per Host SCSI ID Max Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connections Peripheral Device Type Peripheral Device Qualifier Device Supports Removable Media LUN Applicability Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration Head Ranges Cylinder Ranges Fibre Connection Option SCSI Motor Spin Up SCSI Reset at Power Up Disk Access Delay Time SCSI I O Timeout Maximum Tag Count Chapter 13 System Functions and Event Logs 277 m Periodic Drive Check Time m Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time m Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time m Auto Assign Global Spare Drive m Rebuild Priority m Verification on LD Initialization Writes m Remote Redundant Controller m Controller Name Password Validation Timeout m change Password The firmware menu options whose parameter settings are not saved when you save your NVRAM controller configuration to disk include Delete logical drive Partition logical drive logical drive Name Delete logical volume Partition logical volume Edit Host ID WWN Name List disk Reserved space Global spare PPP Configuration Modem Operation SNMP Configuration Controller Unique Identifier Hex UP
204. drive is installed but is not listed it might be defective or installed incorrectly If a physical was connected after the controller completed initialization use the Scan scsi drive menu option to enable the controller to recognize the newly added physical drive and to configure it See To Scan a New SCSI Drive on page 175 for information about scanning a new SCSI drive 3 To view more information about a drive a Select the drive b Choose View drive information Chl ID Size lt MB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Yendor and Product ID SS ey Ee ess TTT ON LINE SEAGATE ST336607LSUN36G N LINE SEAGATE T3366 7LSUN36G Scan scsi drive add drive Entry H LINE SEAGATE ST3366807LSUN36G Identify scsi drive clone Failing drive H LINE SEAGATE ST336607LSUN36G medi scan disk Reserved space 256 mb AND BY SEAGATE 13366807LSUN36G6 34732 166MB i ON LINE SEAGATE T336607LSUN36G a 5 2 a 34732 16 MB 2 ON LINE SEAGATE ST336607LSUN36G Additional information is displayed about the drive you selected Size CMB Speed LG_DRU Status Vendor and Product ID SS Se A ON LINE SEAGATE 1336667LSUN36G MN LINE SEAGATE T336607LSUN36G 31 336687LSUN36G Serial Number 3JA1 EJ PARRA SSE Disk Capacity Cblocks gt 71132958 ST S36687LSUN36G m disk Reserved space 256 mb AND BY SEAGATE ST336687LSUN36G 34732 16 0ME i ON LIME SEAGATE 1T3366807LSUN36G H 5 2 a 34732 160ME o 2l M LINE
205. e May 2006 Partition O Logical drive O RAID 5 8 GB OS Partition 1 Partition 2 Partition O Logical drive 1 ae Partition 1 RAID 3 6 GB Partition 2 FIGURE A 3 Partitions in Logical Drive Configurations 2 GB 1 GB 5 GB 2 5 GB 1 5 GB 2 GB Each partition is mapped to LUNs under host FC or SCSI IDs or IDs on host channels Each FC or SCSI ID LUN is seen as an individual hard drive by the host computer Logical drive 1 Partition O Logical drive 0 Partition 1 Logical drive 1 Partition 2 LUN 2 FIGURE A 4 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs Appendix A Logical drive 0 Partition 2 LUN 1 Logical drive 1 J Partition 1 Logical drive 0 Partition O Basic RAID Concepts 307 Logical drive 1 Logical drive O Partition 0 Partition 2 Logical drive 0 Partition O 4 5 GB K 1 GB UF Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 Logical drive 1 Partition 1 Partition 1 Partition 2 FIGURE A 5 Mapping Partitions to LUNs Under an ID RAID Levels A RAID array has several advantages over non RAID disk arrays m It provides disk spanning by weaving all connected drives into one single volume m It increases disk access speed by breaking data into several blocks when reading and writing to several drives in parallel With RAID storage speed increases as more drives are added m It provides fault tolerance by mirroring or parity operation There are several ways to implemen
206. e May 2006 6 Choose scsi drive Utilities SCSI Drive Low Level Format Clear Format Completed Status and then choose Yes to clear the completed status and make the drive available for logical device operations such as adding reserved space and then adding the drive to a logical device Read Write Test This section describes how to perform read write test operations The physical drive on which this test will be performed cannot be a spare drive local or global or a member drive of a logical drive Disk reserved space must be removed before this menu option is available See Changing Disk Reserved Space on page 192 for more information v To Perform a Read Write Test 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select a drive on which the read write test is to be performed 3 Choose scsi drive Utilities Read Write Test 4 Optional Enable or disable the following options and press Return after each change a Auto Reassign Bad Block When this option is enabled if a bad block is encountered during the Read Write test the controller reassigns that block to an unused good block and writes a message to the event log a Abort When Error Occurs When this option is enabled if an error occurs during the Read Write test the test is aborted m Drive Test for Read Only or Drive Test for Read and Write Use this option to configure the Read Write test to perfor
207. e May 2006 CHAPTER 2 Basic Firmware Components This chapter introduces the initial firmware screen menu structure and navigation and screen conventions The Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array share the same firmware However the screens that are displayed and to a lesser extent the menu options vary between the different types of array As a result some of the examples in the manual might differ from what you see for your array Topics covered in this chapter include ma Viewing the Initial Firmware Screen on page 11 a Navigating Firmware Menus on page 14 a Navigation Terminology and Conventions on page 16 a Menu Options That Toggle Between Conditions on page 17 m Progress Indicators on page 17 m Device Capacities on page 18 Viewing the Initial Firmware Screen The initial firmware screen is displayed as shown in FIGURE 2 1 when you power on the RAID controller and access the firmware application If an event message is displayed press Escape after you read it to clear it from the screen or Ctrl C to clear all messages 11 Progress indicator Date and time Controller name or inquiry string Cache status Cache Status 244 Dirty BAT Battery charging status Gauge range Transfer rate indicator g g Screen display options PC GraphictAHSI Mode Termina l4UTIHA Node gt
208. e displayed by the type option Type label and press Y when prompted to continue format gt label Ready to label disk continue y Type quit to finish using the Format menu Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 121 Creating Solaris Operating System Device Files for Newly Mapped LUNs Perform the following procedure to create device files for newly mapped LUNs on hosts in the Solaris 8 and Solaris 9 operating system For additional operating system information see the Installation Operation and Service manual for your Sun StorEdge 3000 family array v To Create Device Files for Newly Mapped LUNs 1 To create device files type usr sbin devftsadm v 2 To display the new LUNs type format 3 If the format command does not recognize the newly mapped LUNs perform a configuration reboot on the host reboot r Saving Configuration NVRAM toa Disk The controller configuration information is stored in non volatile RAM NVRAM When you save it the information is stored in the disk reserved space of all drives that have been configured into logical drives Back up the controller configuration information whenever you change the array s configuration 122 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Saving NVRAM controller configuration to a file provides a backup of controller configuration information such as channel settings host IDs and
209. e parity drive Disabling the Overwrite Inconsistent Parity menu option causes the controller to report any inconsistency found in a parity check without overwriting the parity drive In this case you can check your data and determine if it is intact or if the error occurred on a data drive Once you ve made this determination and reloaded the data from backup if necessary you can manually regenerate the parity using the reGenerate parity menu option Caution If an array s data parity is seriously damaged restoring data by regenerating and overwriting the original data might cause data loss Disable the reGenerate parity menu option if parity data has been seriously corrupted v To Enable or Disable Overwrite Inconsistent Parity 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select the logical drive whose automatic parity area overwriting you want to enable or disable The default value is Enabled 3 To toggle between enabling and disabling this menu option choose reGenerate parity Overwrite Inconsistent Parity and then choose Yes to confirm the change 4 Choose Regenerate Logical Drive Parity and then choose Yes to regenerate parity 138 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Generating a Check Parity Error Event When a parity check is performed you can specify whether to report inconsistent parity errors as system events
210. e Maximum Drive Expand Capacity field m RAID 0 Divide the total maximum drive capacity by the total number of physical drives contained in the logical drive For example if you want to add a total of 100 Mbyte to a logical drive that contains four physical drives 100 Mbyte 4 25 Mbyte maximum drive expand capacity m RAID 1 Divide the total number of physical drives contained in the logical drive by two to get n Then divide the maximum drive capacity by n For example if you want to add a total of 100 Mbyte to a logical drive that contains four physical drives 4 2 2 100 2 50 Mbyte maximum drive expand capacity m RAID 3 and 5 Subtract a single drive from the total number of physical drives to get n Then divide the total maximum drive capacity by n For example if you want to add a total of 100 Mbyte to a logical drive that contains five physical drives 5 1 4 100 4 50 Mbyte maximum drive expand capacity Note The Maximum Drive Expand Capacity cannot exceed the Maximum Available Drive Free Capacity Optional If you want to expand the logical drive offline instead of the default online mode choose Initialize mode and then choose Yes to confirm your choice Chapter 6 Logical Drives 133 134 m On Line default Enables you to configure and use the logical drive before initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive while performing I O operations initializing a logica
211. e for its lifetime LUN filtering uses this WWN to specify which server is to have exclusive use of a specific logical drive As shown in the following example when you map LUN 01 to host channel 0 and select WWNI1 server A has a proprietary path to that logical drive All servers continue to see and access LUN 02 and LUN 03 unless filters are created on them Server A Server B Server C SS G0 LUNO1 LUNO2 LUNO3 FIGURE 5 4 Example of LUN Filtering Note It is possible to see differing information when a fabric switch queries the WWN of an array When the RAID controller does a Fibre Channel fabric login to a switch during the fabric login process the switch obtains the WWN of the RAID controller In this case the switch displays the company name When the switch issues an inquiry command to a mapped LUN on the array the switch obtains the company name from the inquiry data of the LUN In this case the switch displays Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array which is the inquiry data returned by the RAID controller 112 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 N Prior to using the LUN filter feature identify which array is connected to which HBA card and the WWN assigned to each card This procedure varies according to the HBA you are using Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array for instructions on identifying the
212. e identification of the management subsystem sysUpTime Read Only Time since the network management subsystem was initialized sysContact Read Write Identification and contact information for the person responsible for this node sysName Read Write An administrative name assigned to the node sysLocation Read Write Physical location of the node sysServices ReadOnly A value indicating services offered The values of these objects can be obtained with an SNMP GET message on the OID A community name of public and a protocol version must be specified with the GET message Protocol versions 1 and 2c are supported The objects designated with access Read Write can be set with an SNMP SET message The community name public must be specified along with a protocol version for SNMP SET messages All other objects are Read Only SNMP must be enabled for GET and SET messages to work From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Communication Parameters gt Network Protocol Support SNMP and verify that SNMP is enabled sysDescr The value of this object is a string that describes the product type For example using the NET SNMP command snmpget snmpget c public v 2c 192 168 0 2 sysDescr 0 SNMPv2 MIB sysDescr 0 STRING Sun StorEdge 3310 In the preceding example public specifies the community name public and 2c specifies the protocol version sysObjectID This object is used for admini
213. e operation you can perform the following steps a Select the drive indicated as CLONING Vendor and Product ID 34732 20 MB ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUH36G B ON LINE SEAGATE 1T336753FSUN36G B ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G Source Drive Channel 2 ID 6 Uiew clone progress Abort clone SUM StorEdge 3516F A b Choose clone Failing drive to view the current status View drive information dentify scsi drive Note You can identify the source drive and choose View clone progress Choose Abort clone if you have selected the wrong drive A notification message informs you when the process is complete 182 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 LG 0 Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 2 ID 10 Clone Completed 6 Press Escape to clear the notification message and display the SCSI drives status after the cloning process The source drive Channel 2 ID 10 remains as a member of logical drive 0 and the standby drive Channel 2 ID 6 the local or global spare drive becomes a CLONE drive 6 REFERI ECI al CLONE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 34732 200MB ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G sera zeera of ov uine Sencar sraoezsarewaee o 8 ak Slot Chl Size Mb Speed LG_DRV Status Yendor and Product ID Sot C x er 2S2 PC aD ha oy ae Sat j bo J hy oo my oo Da Ah ae Bo Bo Ba my ow knn ee a a 34732 200MB ON LINE
214. e parameters see Logical Drive Status Table on page 285 I1 Viewing Physical Drives Use this option to view all physical drives that make up a selected logical drive and to view the status of those physical drives v To View Physical Drives 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives The logical drive status table lists all logical drives that have been configured on the array 2 Select a logical drive A menu of logical drive options is displayed Cie o fuf maro sicecnm gt stacas aJe Fo easmrzsn na narma saae coon _ ee 1 ES 68952 GOOD g g B d p Fr E m E Fatal Delete logical drive Partition logical drive ss logical drive Name SS logical drive Assignments P Expand logical drive add Scsi drives reGenerate parity cOpy and replace drive Media scan sHutdown logical drive Write policy ee Eee 3 Choose View scsi drives to display all physical drives that make up the logical drive and to view the status of each physical drive 126 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Size MB LG_DRU Vendor and Product ID E ee EN E C 34732 200MB 1 ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G Se eel 34732 2Q0MB ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G D 34732 200MB N LINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36C Creating Logical Drives See Creating Logical Drives on page 57 for the procedure for c
215. e procedures vary between platforms the headings are marked appropriately Topics covered in this chapter include Host and Drive Channel Status Table on page 196 Configuring Channels as Host or Drive on page 197 Creating Additional Host IDs on page 197 Deleting a Host Channel SCSI ID on page 197 Drive Channel SCSI IDs on page 198 Setting SCSI Channel Termination SCSI Only Reserved on page 198 Setting Transfer Clock Speed SCSI Only on page 199 Setting the SCSI Transfer Width SCSI Only on page 200 Enabling Parity Checking SCSI Only on page 200 Viewing Chip Information on page 201 Viewing Channel Host ID WWN Information FC and SATA Only on page 202 Viewing Device Port Names WWPN FC and SATA Only on page 202 Setting a Channel s Data Rate FC and SATA Only on page 203 Issuing a Loop Initialization Primitive FC and SATA Only on page 205 195 Host and Drive Channel Status Table To view and configure channels choose view and edit channelS from the Main Menu See Channel Status Table on page 290 for a description of the Channel Status Table v To Check and Configure Host and Drive Channels 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS to display the status of all host and drive channels for this controller PID s1D DefSynC1k Def uid S Tern E LE a Host 46 NA AUTO Serial ial F
216. e settings work for smaller configurations as well The controller automatically adjusts the sector count so the operating system can read the correct drive capacity For Solaris operating system configurations use the values in the following table TABLE 4 1 Cylinder and Head Mapping for the Solaris Operating System Logical Drive Capacity Cylinder Head Sector lt 253 GB lt 65536 default variable variable default 253 GB 1 TB lt 65536 default 64 default variable default See Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration on page 232 for more information See To Change Cylinder and Head Settings on page 96 for instructions on how to apply these settings to FC and SATA arrays After settings are changed they apply to all logical drives in the chassis Note Refer to your operating system documentation for limitations on device sizes 58 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 v 1 4 To Change Cylinder and Head Settings Choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters gt Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration Sector Ranges Variable and then choose Yes to confirm your choice Choose Head Ranges 64 Heads and then choose Yes to confirm your choice Choose Cylinder Ranges gt lt 65536 and then choose Yes to confirm your choice To Create a Logical Drive Note To reassign drives
217. e the ID of each controller host channel that is seen by the host To change an ID you must delete it first and then add the new ID a Add host IDs for loop configurations Note Channel ID values of 0 to 125 are accessed in eight ranges of IDs When you change a channel s mode the channel ID might change to an ID that is not in the range you want to use See Channel ID Ranges on page 92 for a description of channel ID ranges and a procedure for changing the ID range To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID Note To change an ID you must first delete it and then add the new ID From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS Select the host channel on which you want to add or change an ID Choose view and edit scsi Id If host IDs have already been configured on the host channel they will be displayed If no host IDs have been configured choose Yes when the following message is displayed No SCSI ID Assignment Add Channel SCSI ID If a host ID has already been assigned to that channel select an ID To delete an ID choose Delete Channel SCSI ID and then choose Yes to confirm the deletion Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 91 7 To add an ID choose Add Channel SCSI ID 8 Select a controller from the list to display a list of IDs 9 Select an ID from the list and then choose Yes to confirm your choice This change does not take effect until the
218. ed 262 v To Force a Primary Controller Failure Reserved 262 Forcing Secondary Controller Failure Reserved 262 v To Force a Secondary Controller Failure Reserved 262 v To Restore a Force Failed Primary or Secondary Controller 263 Event Trigger Operations 263 Configuring the Controller Failure Event Trigger 263 v To Enable or Disable the Controller Failure Event Trigger 264 Configuring the Battery Backup BBU Low Event or BBU Failed Event Trigger 264 v To Enable or Disable the BBU Low Event or BBU Failed Event Trigger 264 Configuring the Power Supply Failed Event Trigger 264 v To Enable or Disable the Power Supply Failed Event Trigger 264 Configuring the Fan Failure Event Trigger 264 v To Enable or Disable the Fan Failure Event Trigger 265 Configuring the Temperature Exceeds Threshold Event Trigger 265 v To Configure Over Temperature Controller Shutdown 265 Adjusting LCD Contrast Reserved 265 Viewing Controller Voltage and Temperature Status 266 xvi Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 13 14 v To Display Controller Voltage and Temperature Status 266 v To View or Configure Thresholds 266 Fibre Channel Error Statistics FC and SATA Only 268 System Functions and Event Logs 271 Muting the Beeper 271 v To Change the Beeper Setting 272 Setting and Changing the Controller Password 272 v To Create a New Password 273 v To Change an Existing Password 273 v To Disable an Existing Password 2
219. ed But when a logical drive configured with a 4 Kbyte stripe size receives files of 128 Kbyte each physical drive has to write many more times to store it in 4 Kbyte data fragments Change stripe size only when you are sure it will result in performance improvements for your particular applications See Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 for more information How many logical drives do you want and at what RAID level A logical drive is a set of drives that have been combined into one logical drive to operate with a specified RAID level It appears as a single contiguous storage volume The controller is capable of grouping drives into eight logical drives each configured with the same or different RAID levels Different RAID levels provide varying degrees of performance and fault tolerance m Do you want to reserve any spare drives Spare drives allow for the unattended rebuilding of a failed physical drive heightening the degree of fault tolerance If there is no spare drive data rebuilding must be performed manually after replacing a failed drive with a healthy one Drives must be configured and the controller properly initialized before a host computer can access the storage capacity Local and Global Spare Drives The external RAID controllers provide both local spare drive and global spare drive functions A local spare drive is used only for one specified logical drive a global spare drive
220. edit Configuration parameter Communication Parameters gt Internet Protocol TCP IP Select the chip hardware address Choose Set IP Address Address Configure the Ethernet port Note If your network uses a DHCP or RARP server to automatically provide IP addresses you can use one of these alternatives to manually configuring your IP address To configure the port to accept an IP address from a DHCP server type DHCP and press Return To configure the port as a RARP client type RARP and press Return To disable the LAN port and set all three of the selected LAN port s fields to Not Set delete any contents from the Address field and press Return If you are manually configuring the LAN port s IP address a Type an IP address in the text box and press Return b Choose Netmask c Type the correct netmask for the port in the text box and press Return Chapter 1 Before You Begin 9 d Choose Gateway e Type the correct gateway IP address for the port and press Return 7 Press Escape to continue A confirmation prompt is displayed Change Set IP Address 8 Select Yes to change the address or No to leave the existing address A confirmation prompt informs you that a controller reset is necessary for the new IP address to take effect and asks if you want to reset the controller now 9 Select Yes to reset the controller 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guid
221. edit channel DefSynClk DefWid 8 Term CurSynClk CurWid fics L E TEES ES S EEA S S Wide L Off SH QMHz Wide s0 amiz ore 40 antz e asune narrou 2 Select the host channel on which you want to add an ID 56 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Choose view and edit scsi Id If host IDs have already been configured on the host channel they will be displayed If no host IDs have been configured the following message is displayed No SCSI ID Assignment Add Channel SCSI ID If a host ID has already been assigned to that channel select an ID and press Return to view a menu for adding or deleting SCSI IDs To add an ID select Add Channel SCSI ID To delete an ID select Delete Channel SCSI ID If adding an ID select a controller from the list to display a list of SCSI IDs If deleting an ID select Yes to delete the ID If adding an ID select an ID from the list and then choose Yes to confirm the addition If you are only changing one Channel ID choose Yes to the following confirmation message to reset the controller NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now If you are changing more than one Channel ID do not reset the controller until all IDs are changed The configur
222. ee To Assign a Local Spare Drive on page 173 or To Assign a Global Spare on page 174 To Test a Drive for SMART Functionality Choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters gt Periodic Drive Check Time to display a list of time intervals Select a time interval and then choose Yes to confirm your choice From the Main Menu choose View and edit Drives Select a drive to test that is an active part of a logical drive A Predictable Failure Test menu option is displayed in the SCSI drive menu Note If the SMART feature is not properly enabled this menu option is not displayed Choose Predictable Failure Test and then choose Yes to begin the test The drive simulates a predictable drive error The next time the controller performs the periodic drive check the controller detects the error simulated by the selected drive and displays an error message SMART CH 2 ID 6 Predictable Failure Detected lt TEST gt The lt TEST gt component of the message indicates that no predictable failure was actually detected and that no action is necessary Chapter 9 Physical Drives 187 v To Disable SMART Detection 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Disabled 2 Choose Yes to confirm your choice Using Media Scan on Individual Drives The media
223. egin whenever the controller is powered up or reset The default setting is Disabled The setting you choose is maintained when you power cycle or reset the controller From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Media Scan at Power Up and then choose Yes to change the setting from Enabled to Disabled or from Disabled to Enabled Disk Array Parameters Menu The menu options on the Disk Array Parameters menu are described in this section Setting Rebuild Priority The RAID controller provides a background rebuilding ability This means the controller is able to serve I O requests while rebuilding logical drives The time required to rebuild a logical drive depends largely on the total capacity of the logical drive being rebuilt Additionally the rebuilding process is totally transparent to the host computer and its operating system v To Set the Rebuild Priority 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Disk Array Parameters Rebuild Priority to display a list of rebuild priority selections A list of the priority selections is displayed 242 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 m Low The default priority Low allocates the least controller resources to rebuild and most controller resources to I O operations m Normal This priority allocates additional controller resources to speed up the rebuildin
224. eneece Be sure that you edit the WWN correctly If the WWN is incorrect the host will be unable to recognize the LUN Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 117 118 b To edit the WWN Mask use the arrow keys to select Host ID WWN Mask Type the desired changes and press Return lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes U CHL ID 48 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 58 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Mame List eeneece Logical Drive 1 Partition amp Host ID WWM x218166E88B2137EA Host ID WWM Mask amp xFFPFPFFFPFFFFFFFEFF Host ID WWH Mask c To change the filter setting select Filter Type and choose Yes to exclude or include the Host ID WWWN selection Choose Filter Type to Include to grant LUN access to the host identified by the WWN and WWN Mask Choose Filter Type to Exclude to deny the identified host LUN access lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes U CHL 86 ID 46 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 50 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Mame List aes eeneece Logical Drive 1 Partition 8 Host ID WWM x216166E88B2137EA Host ID WWM Mask amp xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Filter Type Include H Set
225. ent setting Channel Settings The Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array are preconfigured with the channel settings shown in Default Channel Configurations on page 20 Follow the procedures for configuring a channel mode if you plan to add a host connection or expansion unit or to reassign redundant channel communications To make changes to channel host IDs follow the procedures for adding or deleting a host ID Configuring Channel Mode When configuring the channel mode the following rules apply You must have at least one host channel 86 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Channels 0 and 1 must remain dedicated host channels Channels 2 and 3 must remain drive channels Channels 4 and 5 can be configured as host or drive channels The mode for at least one channel must be assigned to RCCOM redundant controller communications channel v To Modify a Channel Mode 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS The Channel Status Table is displayed lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes DefSynClk DefWid 8 Term Cur ynClk CurWid Geel F aa a WA i GHz Serial view and edit Host luns Poo ost Eoo Host 29 0 ho os ta ea M ea ea oa e j ji j A BEEBE alsialalel en en a as AUTO Serial _ i i ewro sorianle nal avro seriai r na
226. enu choose view and edit channelS Select a host or drive channel Choose view chip inFormation to display the channel s chip information channel Mode view and edit scsi Id a chi information U Chip Type a Seans wwpn gt DiChip Rev 1 Chip Fi Reu ID 3 41 18 LL a de ee Chapter 10 Host and Drive Channels 201 Viewing Channel Host ID WWN Information FC and SATA Only Use the view channel host id Wwn menu option to view the I O processor s worldwide node name WWNN and worldwide port name WWPN for a selected host channel Some host based management software requires these names to address storage devices v To View a Channel s Host ID WWN FC and SATA Only 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS 2 Select a host channel 3 Choose view channel host id Wwn7 to display the channel s worldwide node name and worldwide port name channel Mode view channel host id wn WIL UUHH Ax2 06 BRC FFRRADE i WWPNH 8x266660CHFFEH4DE2 t AUTO j Ee Ps a a a channel Mode oe ie view chip inFormat ion 2 GHz Serial TE Viewing Device Port Names WWPN FC and SATA Only The View device port name list wwpn menu option displays device port names for the host bus adapter HBA detected on a host loop Device port names on the loop are displayed with the exception of the controller s I O processor itself 202 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family
227. equests more quickly The cache size and maximum number of tags varies between brands and models of drive Use the default setting of 32 Note Changing the maximum tag count to Disable will disable the use of write back cache by all hard drives The controller supports tag command queuing with an adjustable tag count from 1 to 128 The default setting is Enabled with a maximum tag count of 32 It is possible to configure command tag queuing with a maximum tag count of 128 for SCSI arrays and 256 for FC arrays v To Change the Maximum Tag Count Setting 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Maximum Tag Count to display a list of available tag count values 2 Select a tag count number and then choose Yes to confirm your choice Caution Disabling the maximum tag count disables the use of internal cache by all the physical drives 238 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Configuring Periodic Drive Check Time The periodic drive check time setting determines how often the controller checks physical drives At the specified interval the controller checks all drives shown in the Drive Status table If any drive is then removed the controller detects the removal even if no host attempts to access that drive Note The periodic drive check does not force the scanning of a drive that has been added to a SCSI array See Sc
228. er Confirm that the correct Name or IP Address is displayed 3 Navigate to the following MIB Object ID 1so org dod internet mgmt mib 2 Appendix F SNMP Management Using HP OpenView 381 4 Select system from the list and click Start Query x Browse Mb eaves d File View Name or IP Address Community Name storEdges510 localdomain g MIB Object ID iso org dod internet mgmt mib Up Tree Down Tree Describe Start Query transmission nmp HIB Instance SHMP Set Value sushame My Array HIB Values syslescr 0 Sun StorEdge S510 sysUbjectI 0 iso org dod internet private enterprises sun prod storEdge sysUpTime 0 1962300 5227203 00 eysContact O John Doe 212 555 1212 syshame 0 StorEdge 3510 sysLocation sysservices 0 Read Write values can be set from this dialog 5 To set the system name select sysName 0 from the list and enter a new value in SNMP Set Value 382 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 6 Click Set A new query on the system group shows the new value Browse MIBEcvcsd oOo File View Help Name or IP Address Community Name storEdges510 localdomain MIB Object ID 180 0rg dod internet ngnt mib 2 Up Tree Town Tree Describe start Query transmission nmp HIB Instance SHMP Set Value HIB Values syslescr 0 Sun StorEdge S510 sysUbjectI 0 iso org dod internet private enterpr
229. erating system documentation for limitations pertaining to device sizes Configuring In Band EI Management The firmware s external interface enables interactions between the firmware and external applications Use In band External Interface Management to enable or disable in band management of the array by these applications v To Configure In Band EI Management From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters In band EI management to enable or disable in band external interface communications and then choose Yes to confirm Fibre Connection Options FC and SATA Only Choose the Loop only menu option from the Fibre Connection Option menu to support a FC loop configuration Choose the Point to point only menu option to support point to point connections It is important that you choose the correct option for your configuration 234 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 See Fibre Connection Protocol on page 94 for information about using this menu option Caution An additional menu option defaults to a loop configuration but upon failure to connect at boot time switches to a point to point configuration Do not use this option unless directed to use it by technical support personnel For more information about point to point and loop configurations refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual and Sun StorEdge
230. eration or normal write check operations on logical drive LG_ The block was marked BAD so that the host can deal with it appropriately without risking data CHL ID ALERT Media Scan Bad Block Unrecoverable 0x Bad blocks found irrecoverable even after the controller attempts to rewrite data onto it Block address is Ox___ _ ID SCSI Drive ALERT Bad Block Encountered Bad blocks found on drive CHL_ ID_ Block address iss ___ CHL ID ALERT Bad Block Encountered 0x Bad blocks encountered on CHL_ ID_ Block address is 0x __ LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Fatal Fail A Fatal Fail condition occurred on Logical Drive LG _ LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Cache Data Purged A Fatal Fail condition occurred on LG _ while under load Data in cache was discarded 360 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Logical Drive Notifications LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Creation A message related to Immediate Array Availability The controller subsystem starts assembling member hard drives into a logical drive LG_ The logical drive will be ready for I O when creation is done and the controller subsystem will find appropriate time to conduct parity initialization LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting On Line Initialization A message related to Immediate Array Availability The controller subsystem starts initializing the logical drive On Line means the array is immediately a
231. ers Description Async The channel is communicating asynchronously or no device is detected empty The default bus synchronous clock has changed Reset the controller for changes to take effect CurWid Current bus width This field only displays values for channels that are assigned to the primary controller Wide The channel is currently servicing wide 16 bit transfers SCSI arrays only Narrow The channel is currently servicing narrow 8 bit transfers SCSI arrays only Serial Channel is using serial communication empty The default bus width has changed Reset the controller for the changes to take effect Upgrading Firmware From time to time firmware upgrades are made available as patches Check the release notes for your array to find out the current patch IDs available for your array You can download RAID controller firmware patches from SunSolve Online located at http sunsolve sun com Each patch applies to one or more particular piece of firmware including Controller firmware SES firmware PLD firmware SATA router firmware SATA only MUX firmware SATA only Note Disk drive firmware is provided through Sun disk firmware patches which include the required download utility Sun disk firmware patches are separate from Sun StorEdge 3000 family firmware patches Do not use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service or the Sun StorEdge CLI to download disk drive firmware Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Arra
232. es attached to a single switch FL port Note In public loop mode the array can have a maximum of 1024 LUNs where 512 LUNs are dual mapped across two channels primary and secondary controller respectively 32 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 A Sample SAN Point to Point Configuration A point to point configuration has the following characteristics m In SAN configurations the switches communicate with the host ports on a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array using a fabric point to point F_port mode m When you use fabric point to point F_port connections between a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array and fabric switches the maximum number of LUNs is limited to 128 LUNs for a nonredundant configuration and 64 LUNs for a redundant configuration m Fibre Channel standards allow only one ID per port when operating point to point protocols resulting in a maximum of four IDs with a maximum of 32 LUNs for each ID and a combined maximum of 128 LUNs m The working maximum number of LUNs is actually 64 LUNs in a configuration where you configure each LUN on two different channels for redundancy and to avoid a single point of failure In a dual controller array one controller automatically takes over all operation of a second failed controller in all circumstances However when an I O controller module needs to be replaced and a cable to an I O
233. es in the drive channel 5 Optional Delete the current Flash Drive Time and type in a new Flash Drive Time 6 Press Return and then choose Yes to confirm The read write LEDs flash for all drives except failed hard drives The absence of a flashing LED helps you locate and remove the failed drive In addition to flashing all drives you can flash the read write LED of only a selected drive or flash the LEDs of all drives except the selected drive using steps similar to those outlined in this section These three drive flashing menu options are described in the remainder of this section Flashing a Selected Physical Drive The read write LED of a good drive you select flashes for a configurable period of time from 1 to 999 seconds it i FIGURE 9 1 Flashing the Drive LED of a Selected Drive Flashing All SCSI Drives The Flash All SCSI Drives menu option flashes the LEDs of all good drives but does not flash the LEDs of any defective drives Chapter9 Physical Drives 177 FIGURE 9 2 Flashing All Drive LEDs to Detect a Defective Non Flashing Drive Flashing All But Selected Drive With this menu option the read write LEDs of all connected good drives except the selected drive flash for a configurable period of time from 1 to 999 seconds FIGURE 9 3 Flashing All Drive LEDs Except a Selected Drive LED 178 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006
234. es to complete the host LUN filter entry lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns uy Tay CHL O ID 46 Primary Control u CHL i ID 42 Secondary Contr u CHL 4 ID 56 Primary Control Logical Drive CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Partition y y Edit Host ID WWH Hame List Channel ID A mapped LUN displays a number A filtered LUN displays an M for masked LUN in the LUN column lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes fT CHL A ID 46 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 5A Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWM Mame List eenee ce Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Labeling a LUN Solaris Operating System Only For the Solaris operating system to recognize a LUN you must first manually write the label using the Auto configure option of the format 1M command To Label a LUN On the data host type format at the root prompt Specify the disk number when prompted Type Y at the following prompt if it is deployed and press Return Disk not labeled Label it now Y The Solaris operating system s Format menu is displayed Type type to select a drive type Type 0 to choose the Auto configure menu option Choose the Auto configure menu option regardless of which drive types ar
235. esorsif eine ivan Iwate Pat Gaal a ae a os a A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 See eee ee ee Seen Seesaw Sees o a a a a a a Chapter 12 Peripheral Devices 269 270 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 1 3 System Functions and Event Logs This chapter contains a description of system functions and configuration information and shows you how to view event logs Topics covered include Muting the Beeper on page 271 Setting and Changing the Controller Password on page 272 Resetting the Controller on page 274 Shutting Down the Controller on page 275 The Download Firmware Option Reserved on page 276 The Advanced Maintenance Functions Option Reserved on page 276 Saving Your Configuration NVRAM to Disk on page 276 Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk on page 280 Viewing Event Logs on the Screen on page 281 Muting the Beeper An audible alarm indicates that either a component in the array has failed or a specific controller event has occurred Error conditions and controller events are reported with event messages and entries in the event log Component failures are also indicated by LED activity on the array For information about failed component alarms refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array For information on controller events see Appe
236. ested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions You can submit your comments by going to http www sun com hwdocs feedback Please include the title and part number of your document with your feedback Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide part number 817 3711 16 Preface xxxiii xxxiv Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 1 Before You Begin Firmware is the intelligence behind a RAID controller It provides the underlying functionality of the controller which is presented directly by the firmware menu options and is also used by the command line interface CLI Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and third party applications that directly or indirectly use information passed bidirectionally through the firmware s external interface EI Firmware is installed or flashed into the array hardware before it is shipped At any time you can download and install patches that include later versions of the firmware to take advantage of increased functionality Refer to the release notes for your array for an overview of the latest functionality as well as for instructions on how to download and install these patches Refer to the README file associated with the firmware patch for detailed installation instructions and a list of bugs fixed by that patch This manual applies to all Sun StorEdge 3000 family RAID arrays with 4 1x controller firm
237. et Telnet Inactivity Timeout Time Disabled Default gt LCD Title Display Controller Logo Password Validation Timeout Always Check Cont S DRA Time and Date MMDDhhmmn YY YY 072511052004 AAI T PETSIE EU _ _ _ 248 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 12 Peripheral Devices This chapter describes viewing and editing parameters for peripheral devices Topics covered include Viewing Peripheral Device Controller Status on page 249 Viewing SES Status FC and SATA Only on page 250 Identifying Fans FC and SATA Only on page 252 SES Temperature Sensor Locations FC and SATA Only on page 255 SES Voltage Sensors FC and SATA Only on page 256 SES Power Supply Sensors FC and SATA Only on page 257 Viewing Peripheral Device SAF TE Status SCSI Only on page 258 a Identifying Fans SCSI Only on page 259 a SAF TE Temperature Sensor Locations SCSI Only on page 260 a SAF TE Power Supply Sensors SCSI Only on page 261 Setting Peripheral Device Entry on page 262 a Redundant Controller Primary on page 262 a Event Trigger Operations on page 263 Adjusting LCD Contrast Reserved on page 265 Viewing Controller Voltage and Temperature Status on page 266 Fibre Channel Error Statistics FC and SATA Only on page 268 Viewing Peripheral Device Contr
238. f NVRAM to disk A prompt confirms that the NVRAM information has been successfully saved To restore the configuration see Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk on page 280 If you prefer to save and restore all configuration data including LUN mapping information use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service or the Sun StorEdge CLI in addition to saving your NVRAM controller configuration to disk The information saved this way can be used to rebuild all logical drives and therefore can be used to completely duplicate an array configuration to another array Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for information about the save configuration and load configuration features Refer to the sccli man page or to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide for information about the reset nvramand download controller configuration commands 78 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays The Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array are each preconfigured with a single RAID 0 logical drive mapped to LUN 0 and no spare drives This is not a working configuration Unmap and delete this logical drive using the procedure in To Unmap and Delete a Logical Drive on page 81 and replace it with logical drives that suit your requirements This chapter shows you how to configure your
239. fer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array 12 Optional Create and apply host LUN filters to FC or SATA logical drives See Mapping a Partition to a Host LUN on page 109 for Fibre Channel and SATA arrays 13 Reset the controller The configuration is complete 44 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 14 Save the configuration to a disk See Saving Configuration NVRAM to a Disk on page 78 15 Ensure that the cabling from the RAID array to the hosts is complete Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 45 46 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays The Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array are each preconfigured with a single RAID 0 logical drive mapped to LUN 0 and no spare drives This is not a working configuration Unmap and delete this logical drive using the procedure in To Unmap and Delete a Logical Drive on page 49 and replace it with logical drives that suit your requirements This chapter shows you how to configure your array for the first time or reconfigure it It describes the normal sequence of events you follow to configure an array To View the Logical Drive Configuration on page 48
240. for 3 3U Event Default 3_6U gt T Lower Threshold for 3 3U Event Default 2 9U gt T joa U Uoltage and Temperature Parameters Editable threshold values are displayed view and edit Logical drives view and edit view and edit view and edit Voltage Range from 3 4 to 3 9U view and edit Default Trigger Event default view and edit Disable Trigger Event disable Input Yoltage Trigger Threshold default u Uiew tae iSi Upper Threshold for 3 3U Event Default 3 6U gt T U Uoltage and Temperature Parameters Chapter 12 Peripheral Devices 267 4 If you want to change a threshold delete the old value type a new value and press Return to change the setting view and edit Logical drives view and edit view and edit view and edit Woltage Range From 3 4 to 3 9 view and edit Default Trigger Event default view and edit Disable Trigger Event disable Input Voltage Trigger Threshold 3 5 u Uiew r 3 3U Event Upper wres ho or 7 Default lt 3 6U gt Lower Threshold for 3 30 Event Default 2 9U gt Yoltage and Temperature Parameters Fibre Channel Error Statistics FC and SATA Only You can view FC error statistics that indicate the status of loopback operations on local channels and on drives The statistics are provided under the following headings m CH ID Channel number of the Fibre Channel Port from which error inform
241. form a Read Write Test 191 Changing Disk Reserved Space 192 v To Remove Reserved Space from a Drive 192 v To Specify Disk Reserved Space 192 Host and Drive Channels 195 Host and Drive Channel Status Table 196 v To Check and Configure Host and Drive Channels 196 Configuring Channels as Host or Drive 197 Creating Additional Host IDs 197 Deleting a Host Channel SCSI ID 197 v To Delete a Host Channel SCSIID 197 Contents xi Drive Channel SCSI IDs 198 Setting SCSI Channel Termination SCSI Only Reserved 198 v To Enable or Disable SCSI Channel Termination SCSI Only 199 Setting Transfer Clock Speed SCSI Only 199 v To Change the Sync Transfer Clock Speed SCSI Only 199 Setting the SCSI Transfer Width SCSI Only 200 v To Change the Transfer Width Options SCSI Only 200 Enabling Parity Checking SCSI Only 200 v To Enable or Disable Parity Checking 201 Viewing Chip Information 201 v To View Chip Information 201 Viewing Channel Host ID WWN Information FC and SATA Only 202 v To View a Channel s Host ID WWN FC and SATA Only 202 Viewing Device Port Names WWPN FC and SATA Only 202 v To View a Channel s Device Port Name List 203 Setting a Channel s Data Rate FC and SATA Only 203 v To Seta Channel s Data Rate 204 Issuing a Loop Initialization Primitive FC and SATA Only 205 v TolssueaLIP 205 11 Configuration Parameters 207 Communication Parameters 208 RS 232 Port Configuration Reserved 208 v To Configure the COM Port Bau
242. from the controller sensors described in Viewing Controller Voltage and Temperature Status on page 266 v To Check the Status of SAF TE Components SCSI Only 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices gt View Peripheral Device Status gt SAF TE Device view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices Redundant Controller Failhback Complete SAF TE Device Operational Channel ID The temperature sensor displays the current temperature of each sensor in degrees Fahrenheit When a drive slot is filled the drive slot row displays a SCSI ID number In a single bus configuration ID numbers 0 through 5 and 8 through 13 are shown if all 12 drives are filled SCSI IDs 6 and 7 are reserved for host communication Wherever a slot is empty the message No Device Inserted is displayed See FIGURE 12 3 258 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Inserted Inserted Inserted Inserted Inserted Product ID StorEdge 3310 A Revision Level 1167 i 3638324134438 A Operational Operational Operational and On Operational and On 3 Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Alert pek jk i A ee Off or No Speaker Drive Slot B Ho Device Inserted FIGURE 12 3 Example of the SAF TE Device
243. from the other disk master or slave to the reporting disk drive reallocating the bad block v To Regenerate the Parity of a Logical Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select the logical drive that you want to regenerate the parity on 3 Choose reGenerate parity Execute Regenerate Logical Drive Parity and then choose Yes to regenerate parity A notification is displayed that parity regeneration has begun 4 Press Escape to view the progress indicator Note If a regenerating parity process is stopped by a drive failure the process cannot restart until the logical drive rebuild has been completed Chapter6 Logical Drives 137 Overwriting Inconsistent Parity If the result of a parity check indicates an inconsistency a data error exists either on one of the data drives or on a parity drive However RAID algorithms such as RAID 5 that use XOR parity cannot determine whether the error resides on a data drive or on the parity drive Enabling the Overwrite Inconsistent Parity menu option causes the RAID controller to correct the data on the parity drive automatically whenever a parity check detects an inconsistency In most cases it is important to correct the data on the parity drive as soon as an inconsistency is detected to avoid the potential for data loss in the event of a drive failure However you might prefer to check the integrity of your data before overwriting th
244. g SCSI 59 host filter mode FC and SATA 119 host filter type FC and SATA 118 host filters viewing and modifying information 164 host filters FC and SATA 115 host IDs number supported FC and SATA 90 host IDs creating and adding FC and SATA 90 host LUNs adding WWN entries 164 deleting a mapping 161 mapping to partitions 156 maximum concurrent connections 230 number of tags reserved for 231 number supported per host ID 230 host side parameters 229 defaults 337 host side parameters FC and SATA 94 HTTP enabling and disabling 211 HTTPS enabling and disabling 211 I O count maximum queued 229 I O timeout configuring drive 237 ID ranges changing channel FC and SATA 92 inactivity telnet timeout 212 in band EI management enabling and disabling 234 INCOMPLETE status 286 initialization mode logical drive FC and SATA 102 initialization mode logical drive SCSI 64 INITING status 286 INVALID status 286 IP address setting 8 209 using RARP or DHCP to set 9 K keyboard shortcuts 15 L local spare assignment 173 local spare assignment FC and SATA 100 local spare assignment SCSI 62 local spare drives 5 deleting 174 logical drive initialization mode when creating FC and SATA 102 logical drive initialization mode when creating SCSI 64 logical drives adding physical drives to 135 assigning a local spare FC and SATA 100 assignin
245. g Operation Advanced Features Continued User adjustable up to 1024 User adjustable up to 64 User adjustable up to 256 User adjustable Description Supported SDRAM memory for enhanced performance Fast Page Memory with Parity for enhanced data security Supported Supported Optimized I O sorting for enhanced performance RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 5 Optimization for random I O 32 Kbyte optimization for sequential I O 128 Kbyte user selectable RAID 3 Optimization for random I O 4 Kbyte optimization for sequential I O 16 Kbyte user selectable Description Supported Supported Multiple drives can be added concurrently Supported Replace members with drives of larger capacity Appendix B Firmware Specifications 319 TABLE B 5 Redundant Controller Feature Description Active Active Redundant Supported Controller Synchronized Cache for Both Supported Controllers Write back Cache Enabled in Redundant Controller Mode Hot Swappable Controller No Single Point of Failure Dynamic Cache Memory Allocation Cache Battery Backup Load Sharing User Configurable Channel Mode Redundant Controller Rolling Firmware Upgrade Redundant Controller Firmware Synchronization TABLE B 6 Data Safety Feature Regenerate Parity of Logical Drives Bad Block Auto Reassignment Battery Backup for Cache Memory Yes with synchronized cache connection between controllers Supported
246. g a local spare SCSI 62 assigning RAID level FC and SATA 97 assigning RAID level SCSI 59 changing controller assignment FC and SATA 105 changing controller assignment SCSI 68 checking parity 137 copying 140 creating FC and SATA 95 96 creating SCSI 57 59 default parameters 332 defining 304 deleting 49 deleting FC and SATA 81 deleting a partition 128 enabling and disabling parity reporting 139 expanding the capacity of existing 131 ID 286 larger than 253 Gbyte FC and SATA 95 larger than 253 Gbyte SCSI 58 LG number 286 mapping a partition toa LUN SCSI 113 mapping partitions FC and SATA 109 mapping partitions SCSI 72 mapping partitions to LUNs 156 mapping partitions to LUNs SCSI 73 maximum number of disks per 23 maximum number per configuration 22 maximum physical capacity FC and SATA 100 maximum physical capacity SCSI 62 398 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 maximum usable capacity 23 media scan for bad blocks 143 naming FC and SATA 107 naming SCSI 69 partitioning FC and SATA 107 partitioning SCSI 70 preparing for larger than 253 Gbyte 233 RAID level 286 rebuild priority 242 rebuilding 130 298 regenerating the parity of 137 replacing larger capacity drives in 140 saving NVRAM configuration 276 size 286 status table 285 viewing configuration FC and SATA 80 viewing configuration SCSI 48 logical volumes
247. g process but decreases I O performance correspondingly m Improved This priority allocates still more resources to the rebuilding process but decreases I O performance still more m High This priority uses maximum controller resources to complete the rebuilding process in the shortest possible time but heavily impacts I O performance Choose a rebuild priority and then choose Yes to confirm your choice Verification on Writes Normally errors can occur when a hard drive writes data To avoid write errors the controller can force the hard drives to verify the written data There are three verification methods Verification on LD Initialization Writes This method performs Verify after Write while initializing the logical drive Verification on LD Rebuild Writes This method performs Verify after Write during the rebuilding process Verification on LD Normal Drive Writes This method performs Verify after Write during normal I O requests Each method can be enabled or disabled individually Hard drives perform Verify after Write according to the chosen method Note The verification on Normal Drive Writes method affects write performance during normal use To Enable and Disable Verification Methods From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Disk Array Parameters Verification on Writes to display the verification methods that are available Choose a method that you w
248. garbage characters can be displayed This is due to the controller negotiation that occurs during a power up or restart cycle In most cases using the Ctrl L keyboard shortcut shown above cleans up the extraneous characters If this fails the workaround is to close the tip session and start another or use a telnet session instead If an array is connected to a host using a serial port connection and powered on the host terminal window displays a series of messages as shown in the following example 3510 Disk Array 1S installed with 1024MBytes SDRAM Total channels 6 Channel is host channel id 40 Channel is host channel id 41 Channel is drive channel id 14 15 Channel is drive channel id 14 15 Channel is host channel id 70 Channel is a host channel id 71 Scanning channels Please wait a few moments Preparing to restore saved persistent reservations Type skip to skip Chapter 2 Basic Firmware Components 15 Do not use the skip option shown at the bottom of the example This option is reserved for support personnel performing testing Note As you perform the operations described in this guide you might periodically see event message pop up on the screen To dismiss an event message after you ve read it press Escape To prevent event messages for displaying so that you can only read them by displaying the event message log press Ctrl C You can press Ctrl C again at any time to enable pop up dis
249. ge 30 Fibre Connection Protocol Guidelines on page 31 A Sample SAN Point to Point Configuration on page 33 A Sample DAS Loop Configuration on page 39 Array Configuration Summary on page 43 Default Configurations This section provides default configuration information for drives and channel settings 19 20 Default Logical Drive Configuration Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays are preconfigured with a single RAID 0 logical drive mapped to LUN 0 and no spare drives This is not a usable configuration You must delete this logical drive and create new logical drives as shown in First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays on page 47 and First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays on page 79 Default Channel Configurations Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays are preconfigured with the channel settings shown in the following tables The most common reason to change a host channel to a drive channel is to attach expansion units to a RAID array Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array default channel settings are shown in TABLE 3 1 TABLE 3 1 Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI Array Default Channel Settings Primary Controller ID Secondary Controller Channel Default Mode PID SID 0 Drive Channel 6 7 1 Host Channel 0 NA 2 Drive Channel 6 7 3 Host Channel NA 1 6 RCCOM NA NA Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array default channel settings are shown in TABLE 3 2 TABLE 3 2 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array
250. ge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006
251. ger be used as a member of a logical volume If you want to use a partitioned logical drive for a logical volume delete all partitions in the logical drive until only one partition remains that includes the entire capacity of the logical drive Caution Deleting the partition of the logical drive destroys all the data Data should be backed up before changing partition configurations When a logical drive is used as a member of a logical volume that logical drive can no longer be partitioned using the View and Edit Logical Drives menu option Instead partition the logical volume using the view and edit logical Volumes menu option The procedure for partitioning a logical volume is the same as that for partitioning a logical drive After the logical volume has been partitioned map each partition to a host ID LUN to allow host computers to access the partitions as individual drives RAID Expansion A logical volume can be expanded using the RAID expansion function Expanding a logical volume is similar to expanding a logical drive To perform RAID expansion on a logical drive replace each member physical drive with a drive of larger capacity or add a new drive and then perform logical drive expansion to access the newly added capacity To perform RAID expansion on a logical volume first expand each member logical drive and then perform RAID expansion on the logical volume Chapter 7 Logical Volumes 149 Multilevel RAID Array
252. ger event is rectified the cache policy automatically returns to its previous setting For more information on configuring the write policy to automatically switch from write back cache to write through cache see Event Trigger Operations on page 263 Fibre Connection Protocol Guidelines Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays support the following connection protocols Point to Point This protocol can be used only with a switched fabric network configuration also called a storage area network SAN The point to point protocol supports full duplex communication but only allows one ID per channel m Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL also known as loop mode The loop mode can be used with direct attached storage DAS or SAN configurations Loop mode supports only half duplex communication but allows up to eight IDs per channel The following guidelines apply when implementing point to point configurations and connecting to fabric switches m The default mode is Loop only If you prefer to use a point to point configuration change the Fibre Channel Connection mode to Point to point only See Fibre Connection Protocol on page 94 for information about how to change this setting Note If you connect to a fabric switch without changing the default loop mode the array automatically shifts to public loop mode As a result communication between the array and the switched fabric runs in ha
253. gurations 160 restoring from disk 280 SAN example FC SATA 33 saving to disk 276 single bus configuration SCSI 169 split bus configuration SCSI 169 summary of key steps 43 viewing logical drive FC and SATA 80 viewing logical drive SCSI 48 connections loop 94 point to point 94 controller assignment of logical drive to FC and SATA 105 assignment of logical drive to SCSI 68 date and time 247 event messages 346 failover 297 IDs 198 muting beeper 271 name 12 naming 245 over temp shutdown 265 parameters 245 password validation timeout 246 rebuild priority 242 redundant controller parameters 244 resetting 274 restoring a configuration 280 saving configuration to disk 276 shutting down 275 unique identifier 246 upgrading firmware 294 voltage status 266 conventions and terminology 16 cylinder ranges changing FC and SATA 96 cylinder ranges changing SCSI 59 cylinder head sector mapping 232 D DAS loop configuration 39 date and time setting controller 247 default parameters that should not change list of 343 default parameters summary 331 device capacities units of 18 device parameters default 340 DHCP 209 default IP address 8 enabling and disabling 211 setting array IP address using 210 disk access delay time 237 disk array parameters 242 disk drive firmware 293 downloading firmware 293 drive channel defaults 20
254. guring your array for the first time there is no need to review the existing configuration before you delete it If you are reconfiguring logical drives it is a good idea to view the existing logical drive configuration to determine its status and any changes you want to make to the RAID level size number of physical drives that make up a selected logical drive and spare drives You also need to view the channel configuration to determine whether you want to make any changes to the channel mode and channel host IDs v To View the Logical Drive Configuration 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives to display the Logical Drive Status Table For a description of this table s categories see Logical Drive Status Table on page 285 i fiw mara sizecnos stacas aJa ee ees ee LLLI J29258AC6 MA RAIDS 163428 GOOD aaa 2 Note the changes you want to make to the existing configuration 48 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 v To View the Channel Configuration 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS to display the Channel Status Table For a description of this table s categories see Channel Status Table on page 290 DefSynC1lk DefWid Is Term Cur ynC1k In E i A E S OFF 80 0MHz Wide 80 MHz L Off 40 MHz omz wiae omz wiae s omne wiae ful ore eo ernic wiae wiae Parron i soon
255. h two Sun StorEdge nodes SLOT EUGENE OTR Sanesi Edit View Performance Configuration Fault Tools Uptions Window stor Edge3510 stor Edqe3310 default Read Write Hiddens 4 Auto Layout Connection Labels OFF 376 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 To load MIBs perform the following steps 1 Choose Options Load Unload MIBs SNMP The following dialog is displayed Loqd Univad MIBS SNP eaves Loaded SNMF MIFs rfcl902 SNMPw2 SHI Load rfclS03 SNMPw2 TC rfcl906 SNMPw2 TH rfcl90 SNMPw2 MIB TaWaitType MIb rfcl2z13 MIB II rfc2011 IF MIB rfc2012 TCP MIB rfc2013 UDP MIB rfc2d63 IF MIB dmtf dmi mib hp unix 2 Click Load The following dialog is displayed Load UniGad MBS SMES Toad MIB Tonle Eanes Filter tmpnibs 4 Directories Files ftmpemibse SUN STOREDGE s310 HMIB txt SUN STOREDGE S320 HIEB txt SUN STOREDGE S510 HIE txt SUN STOREDGE S511 HIE txt Se es HIB File to Load tmp nibs SUN STOREDGE 3310 HIB tx Messages Select or input a MIB file Ok Filter Cancel Help Appendix F SNMP Management Using HP OpenView 377 3 Select the MIBs to be loaded and click OK Since the MIB contains TRAP NOTIFICATION information OpenView will detect this A dialog is displayed requesting confirmation to load the definitions into the OpenView event system gg Ti GE PEO MENON PEMA E aN MIB successfully loaded A TRAP TYPE
256. hannel ALERT Negotiation Error Detected SCSI target sync wide negotiation abnormality detected on the channel path used for redundant controller communications Ol Appendix E Event Messages 35 CHL Drive SCSI Channel ALERT Negotiation Error Detected SCSI target sync wide negotiation abnormality detected on the drive channel CHL CHL RCC Channel ALERT Invalid Status Sense Data Received Invalid status sense data received on the channel path used for redundant controller communications CHL Drive SCSI Channel ALERT Invalid Status Sense Data Received Invalid status sense data received on the drive channel CHL CHL SCSI Host Channel Alert SCSI Bus Reset Issued Host SCSI bus CHL _ reset issued CHL ALERT Redundant Loop Connection Error Detected on ID _ One of the dual loop members may have failed or been disconnected Make sure all channels are properly connected and topological configuration properly set CHL SCSI Host Channel ALERT SCSI Channel Failure Specific drive channel CHL _ may have failed or disconnected CHL _ ALERT Fibre Channel Loop Failure Detected Fibre channel loop failure is detected CHL ALERT Redundant loop for CHL _ Failure Detected The pair loop of CHL _ has failed 356 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHL ALERT Redundant Path for CHL _ ID _ Expected but Not Found Disconnection with the pair loop of the loop connection where CHL _ ID
257. he Optimization Mode Once logical drives are created you cannot use the RAID firmware to change the optimization mode without deleting all logical drives You can however use the Sun StorEdge CLI set cache parameters command to change the optimization mode while logical drives exist Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 0 User s Guide for more information If you have not deleted all logical drives a notice will inform you of this requirement and you will not be able to change the optimization mode See Deleting Logical Drives on page 49 for the procedure to delete logical drives 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Caching Parameters to display the current optimization mode 2 Select Optimization for Sequential I O or Optimization for Random I O as applicable If you have not deleted all logical drives a notice will inform you of this requirement and you will not be able to change the optimization mode 3 Choose Yes to change the Optimization mode from Sequential I O to Random I O or from Random I O to Sequential I O You are prompted to reset the controller Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 51 NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until all Logical Drives are deleted and then the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 4
258. he current operational status of a disk drive a logical drive or controller The RAID array stores the states of drives logical drives and the controller in its nonvolatile memory This information is retained across power interruptions stripe size The amount of data in kilobytes that is striped across each physical drive in a logical drive Generally large stripe sizes are more effective for arrays with sequential reads striping The storing of sequential blocks of incoming data on all the different physical drives in a logical drive This method of writing data increases the disk array throughput because multiple drives are working simultaneously retrieving and storing RAID 0 1 0 3 and 5 and all use striping 392 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 terminator UPS volume write back cache write policy write through cache A part used to end a SCSI bus Terminators prevent energy from reflecting back into a cable plant by absorbing the radio frequency signals Uninterruptible Power Supply One or more drives that can be grouped into a unit for data storage A cache writing strategy in which the array controller receives the data to be written to disk stores it in the memory buffer and immediately sends the host operating system a signal that the write operation is complete without waiting until the data is actually written to the disk drive Within a short time the controller whe
259. he next step See To Enable or Disable Mixed Drive Support on page 86 for information about mixed drive support Q If mixed drive support is enabled select the type of logical drive to create 4 When prompted to Create Logical Drive choose Yes to confirm your choice and display a pull down list of supported RAID levels 5 Select a RAID level from the list to assign to the logical drive Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 97 Note RAID 5 is used as an example in the following steps Note NRAID does not provide data redundancy The NRAID option that appears in some firmware menus is no longer used and is not recommended For more information about RAID levels see RAID Levels on page 308 6 Select the drives you want to include in the logical drive from the list of available physical drives using the steps below You must select at least the minimum number of drives required for the selected RAID level m RAID 3 and RAID 5 require a minimum of three physical drives m RAID 0 requires a minimum of two physical drives m RAID 1 requires a minimum of two physical drives Additional drives must be added in increments of two For redundancy you can create a logical drive containing drives distributed over separate channels You can then create several partitions on each logical drive In a RAID 1 or RAID 0 1 configuration the order in which you select the physical drives
260. heck that all installed drives are listed Note If a drive is installed but is not listed it might be defective or installed incorrectly When the power is initially turned on the controller scans all physical drives that are connected through the drive channels To view more information about a drive 84 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 a Select the drive b Choose View drive information Additional information is displayed about the drive you selected view Size lt MB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Vendor and Product ID view View View View View Revision Number H265 SFSUN36G syst Serial Number SETRNGU BHAA T SHS view Disk Capacity blocks 71132958 SFSUN36G View Node Name WINN 26 6H HA H4 CF AB 13 8F Redundant Loop ID 3 SFSUN36G 34732 206ME HONE FREMT DRY SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G 2 gt 40 24732 20enm wowe rmnr pru sencare sr2967s9RSuNO6G eoj __ses sun seorzaye asso a Enabling Support for SATA Expansion Units Attached to FC Arrays It is possible to connect Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA expansion units to Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays either alone or in combination with Sun StorEdge 3510 FC expansion units Refer to the release notes and Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array for important information about limitations and appropriate uses of such a configuration If you do connect one or more Sun StorEdge 3511 S
261. herwise point to point menu option This command is reserved for special use and should be used only if directed by technical support 6 Set up to eight IDs on each channel if needed see TABLE 3 13 TABLE 3 13 Example Primary and Secondary ID Numbers in a Loop Configuration With Two IDs per Channel Channel Primary Secondary Number ID Number ID Number 0 40 41 1 43 42 4 44 45 5 47 46 7 Map logical drive 0 to channels 0 and 5 of the primary controller 8 Map logical drive 1 to channels 1 and 4 of the secondary controller 9 Map logical drive 2 to channels 0 and 5 of the primary controller 10 Map logical drive 3 to channels 1 and 4 of the secondary controller 42 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 11 12 13 14 15 Connect the first server to port FC 0 of the upper controller and port FC5 of the lower controller Connect the second server to port FC 4 of the upper controller and port FC1 of the lower controller Connect the third server to port FC 5 of the upper controller and port FCO of the lower controller Connect the fourth server to port FC 1 of the upper controller and port FC4 of the lower controller Install and enable multipathing software on each connected server Array Configuration Summary This section lists the typical sequence of steps for completing a first time configuration of the array For detailed steps and more information see the reference
262. hoose view and edit logical Volumes to display a list of logical volumes 3 Select a logical volume to expand 4 Choose Expand logical volume and then choose Yes to expand the logical volume 154 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 8 Host LUNs The view and edit Host luns menu allows you to map a partition logical drive or logical volume to a host channel Every partition logical drive or logical volume can be mapped more than once to achieve a redundant data path using multipathing software Note Procedures that have already been described other chapters are cross referenced instead of repeated Topics covered in this chapter include a Mapping Logical Drive Partitions to Host LUNs on page 156 a Planning for 128 LUNs on a SCSI Array Optional on page 158 a Planning for 1024 LUNs on an FC or SATA Array Optional Loop Mode Only on page 159 m Planning for 64 LUNs in Redundant FC or SATA Point to Point Configurations on page 160 Mapping a Partition to a LUN on page 161 Deleting a Host LUN Mapping on page 161 Creating Host Filter Entries FC and SATA Only on page 162 Determining a Host World Wide Name on page 162 Manually Adding WWN Entries Using the Host ID WWN Name List on page 164 a Viewing and Modifying Host Filter Information on page 164 155 Mapping Logical Drive Partitions to
263. iDo o J Disk 3 CH0 ID3 I Disk 6 cHo IDall ee E rt O m oh OO a E E E a 2 Oy Ee 5 SmI ee ous e four cro Oe oars aero fi _ T eae C OO IL OO eel OS Tr O ee L 4 Disk 5 CHO ID5 L 4 Disk 8 CHO0 ID10 L a a 4 Oe oe Of 4 a Expansion unit single bus configuration default IDs ee O r gt j O E E Ko T oo O ro A ig AL B EE Jor o ae o Jos go O m Po O Co eO ro n E 7 OO C G O ee Ca a O E CO Po A O N m A split bus configuration assigns six disk drive IDs to CH 0 and six disk drive IDs to CH 2 in the RAID array and then typically adds an additional six disk drive IDs to both CH 0 and CH2 when it is connected to an expansion unit RAID array split bus configuration default IDs Il Disk 0 CH2 ID0_ I Il Disk 3 CH2 1D3_ II Il Disk 6 cHo iDo I Ill Disk 9 CHOo ID3_ E o Ap E o EAEE o ee eee o EL C O E eiO O T JE OO r ea SO wey oR OEE eA ea E S a A r eE a O rm Expansion unit split bus configuration default IDs i Disk 0 CH2 ID8 L 4 Disk 3 CH2 1D11 L Disk 6 CHO ID8 L 4 Disk 9 CHO ID11 L O OO O O OO O i li 2 E e Jpg eet o e e gk Jone one IL pf O SE eel OT IE Ole OO ok OE Pe OO Fi 2 of 4 OQ oee000 O O O O 170 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 FC Drive IDs FC and SATA Only When an expansion unit is attached to a RAID array unique loop IDs are assigned to each expansion unit drive A loop ID is
264. ications will you be using The frequency of read write activities can vary from one host application to another The application can be an SQL server Oracle server Informix server or other database server of a transaction based nature Applications like video playback and video postproduction editing require read write operations involving very large files in a sequential order The RAID level setting you choose depends on what is most important for a given application capacity availability or performance Before revising your RAID level prior to storing data choose an optimization scheme and optimize the controller for your application The controller optimization mode can be changed only when there are no logical configurations Once the controller optimization mode is set the same optimization mode is applied to all logical drives You cannot change the 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 optimization mode until data is backed up all logical drives are deleted and the array is restarted You can however change the stripe size for individual logical drives at the time you create them Note Default stripe sizes result in optimal performance for most applications Selecting a stripe size that is inappropriate for your optimization mode and RAID level can decrease performance significantly For example smaller stripe sizes are ideal for I Os that are transaction based and randomly access
265. id unauthorized operation when the user is away from the array In most cases the Always Check default should be left unchanged If Always Check value is specified there is no defined timeout and the operator has unlimited opportunities to enter the correct password but each attempt is validated before access to the firmware s functions is permitted The timeout has no effect if no password has been set See Setting and Changing the Controller Password on page 272 for more password information If Disabled is selected any entry provides immediate access to firmware menu options regardless of whether a password has been established Note Only one password can be stored To Set a Password Validation Timeout From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Controller Parameters Password Validation Timeout to display a list of timeout values Select a validation timeout and then choose Yes to confirm your choice Controller Unique Identifier Reserved The controller unique identifier is automatically set by the SAF TE or SES device The controller unique identifier is used to create Ethernet addresses and WWNs and to identify the unit for some network configurations Caution Do not specify a new nonzero value unless you have replaced the chassis and the original chassis serial number must be retained It is especially important in a Sun Cluster environment to maintain the same d
266. iguration for FC or SATA Arrays 81 3 Select a host LUN and choose Yes to unmap the host LUN from the channel host ID lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes 68850 RA T DS view and edit Host luns Wy Te CHL A ID 486 Primary Control v CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr wl Edit Host ID WWMN Name List z view system Information view and edit Event logs 4 Repeat Step 3 to unmap all remaining host LUNs that are mapped to the logical drive you want to delete 5 Press Escape to return to the Main Menu 6 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 7 Select the logical drive that you unmapped and want to delete 8 Choose Delete logical drive and if it is safe to delete the logical drive choose Yes to confirm the deletion Cache Optimization Mode FC and SATA Before creating any logical drives determine the appropriate optimization mode for the array The type of application accessing the array determines whether to use sequential or random optimization See Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 for a detailed description of sequential and random optimization If you are modifying an existing configuration and do not want to delete your existing logical drives verify your optimization mode but do not change it 82 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 v 1 To Verify
267. ing LCD Contrast Reserved Since Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays do not have a liquid crystal display LCD changing the setting for the view and edit Peripheral devices Adjust CLD Contrast menu option has no effect Chapter 12 Peripheral Devices 265 Viewing Controller Voltage and Temperature Status This section describes how to see whether the voltage and temperature of the RAID controller are within normal ranges These controller sensors differ from the chassis sensors whose status is reported by the SES FC and SATA or SAF TE SCSI processor See Viewing SES Status FC and SATA Only on page 250 and Viewing Peripheral Device SAF TE Status SCSI Only on page 258 for information about chassis sensors v To Display Controller Voltage and Temperature Status From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Controller Peripheral Device Configuration View Peripheral Device Status The components checked for voltage and temperature are displayed and defined as normal or out of order view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view an view an view an view an 2 Operation Normally Operation Normally Operation Normally u Uiew u Set Temperature within Safe Range Adju Boardi Temperature 42 5 O Temperature within Safe Range wera Board Temperature 53 8 lt C Temperature within Safe Range View Peripheral Device Status Voltage and Temperature Para
268. ing inconsistent 138 regenerating 137 parity check enabling 200 partition mapping of logical drive to a LUN SCSI 73 partitioning logical volumes 149 partitions deleting logical drives 128 deleting logical volume 149 logical drive FC and SATA 107 logical drive SCSI 70 mapping of logical drives to LUN SCSI 113 mapping to LUNs 156 maximum number per logical drive 22 password changing 273 disabling 273 setting new 272 password validation timeout 246 patch downloads 294 periodic drive check time 239 periodic drive swap check time 240 periodic SAF TE and SES check time 239 peripheral device type parameters 232 peripheral devices 249 default parameters 340 event trigger operations 263 redundant controller mode 262 SAF TE status 258 viewing status 249 perpetual clone of a failing drive 181 physical drives cloning a failing 179 cloning status 184 flashing to identify good or bad 177 periodic check time 239 reformatting 190 replacing after cloning 180 reserved space 192 revision number serial number and disk capacity 172 scanning SCSI 174 size and speed 288 status table 168 288 viewing information 172 ping enabling and disabling 211 planning host applications 4 RAID configurations 4 PLD firmware upgrading 296 400 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 point to point connection 94 point to point options 23
269. inux and Microsoft Windows hosts and for servers running the Solaris operating system m Sun StorEdge Configuration Service with an in band connection for Solaris and Microsoft Windows hosts Note Do not use both in band and out of band connections at the same time to manage the array You might cause conflicts between multiple operations Note Disk drive firmware is provided through Sun disk firmware patches which include the required download utility Sun disk firmware patches are separate from the Sun StorEdge 3000 family firmware patches Do not use the Sun StorEdge CLI or Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to download disk drive firmware Controller Firmware Upgrade Features The following firmware upgrade features apply to the controller firmware m Redundant Controller Rolling Firmware Upgrade When downloading is performed on a dual controller system firmware is flashed onto both controllers without interrupting host I O When the download process is complete the primary controller resets and lets the secondary controller take over the service temporarily When the primary controller comes back online the secondary controller hands over the workload and then resets itself for the new firmware to take effect The rolling upgrade is automatically performed by controller firmware and the user s intervention is not necessary Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Array 295 a Automatically Synchronized Controller Firmware Versions
270. ion Secondary controller s ID mapping NA Multiple IDs host channel mode only The ID to which host LUNs are mapped in the host channel mode The ID for the secondary controller in drive channel the mode No ID applied Default bus synchronous clock xx x MHz Maximum synchronous transfer rate SCSI array only x GHz Maximum synchronous transfer rate FC array only Async Channel is set for asynchronous transfers SCSI arrays only Auto Channel is configured to communicate at 1 or 2 GHz FC arrays only Default bus width Wide Channel is set to allow wide 16 bit transfers SCSI arrays only Narrow Channel is set to allow narrow 8 bit transfers SCSI arrays only Serial Channel is using serial communication Signal S Single ended L LVD F Fibre Terminator status On Off NA Termination is enabled SCSI arrays only Termination is disabled SCSI arrays only For a redundant controller communications RCCOM channel SCSI arrays and all FC array channels Current bus synchronous clock This field only displays values for channels that are assigned to the primary controller xx x MHz x GHz The current speed at which a SCSI array channel is communicating The current speed at which a FC array channel is communicating 292 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 TABLE 14 4 Parameters Displayed in the Channel Status Table Continued Paramet
271. iping and other RAID levels Data written to a logical volume is first broken into smaller data segments and striped across different logical drives in a logical volume Each logical drive then distributes data segments to its physical drives according to its mirroring parity or iii a Physical drives gt pgg volume TENET Physical drives B0 _ Physical drives qe Logical FIGURE 7 1 Logical Volume Composed of Multiple Drives A logical volume can be divided into a maximum of 32 partitions During normal operation the host sees an unpartitioned logical volume or a partition of a partitioned logical volume as a single physical drive Logical Volume Limitations m The use of logical volumes is not supported in Sun Cluster environments a A logical volume cannot be created using any logical drives that have a status of FATAL FAIL 148 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 To avoid a logical volume failure a Configure logical drives as members of a logical volume in RAID levels that provide redundancy such as RAID levels 1 1 0 3 or 5 m Rebuild the logical drive as soon as possible whenever a drive failure occurs m Compose the logical drive with drives from different drive channels to avoid the fatal loss of data caused by bus failure Logical Drive and Logical Volume Partitions Once a logical drive has been divided into partitions the logical drive can no lon
272. is 32 Kbyte for all logical drives except RAID 3 which is 4 Kbyte m For random optimization the cache block size is 32 Kbyte See Cache Optimization Mode SCSI on page 50 for information about how to set the cache optimization mode on a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array See Cache Optimization Mode FC and SATA on page 82 for information about how to set the cache optimization mode for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array The RAID array s cache optimization mode determines the cache block size used by the controller for all logical drives An appropriate cache block size improves performance when a particular application uses either large or small stripe sizes 28 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 m Video playback multimedia post production audio and video editing and similar applications read and write large files in sequential order m Transaction based and database update applications read and write small files in random order Once logical drives are created you cannot use the RAID firmware s Optimization for Random I O or Optimization for Sequential I O menu option to change the optimization mode without deleting all logical drives You can however use the Sun StorEdge CLI set cache parameters command to change the optimization mode while logical drives exist Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 0 User s Guide for mo
273. is a local spare and will automatically replace any disk drive that fails in this logical drive The local spare is not available for any other logical drive Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 b Select a physical drive from the list to use as a local spare Size MB LG_DRU Vendor and Product 1D 34732 200MB MONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1T336753FSUN36G a ee 4732 26QME FRAT DRU SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 34732 206ME NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE T336753FSUHJ6G c Press Escape to return to the menu of logical drive options Note The Disk Reserved Space option is not supported while you are creating logical drives If you use two controllers for a redundant configuration you can assign a logical drive to either of the controllers to balance the workload By default all logical drives are assigned to the primary controller Logical drive assignments can be changed later but that operation requires a controller reset to take effect Optional For dual controller configurations you can assign this logical drive to the secondary controller by following these steps Caution In single controller configurations assign logical drives only to the primary controller a Choose Logical Drive Assignments A confirmation message is displayed Redundant Controller Logical Drive Assign to Secondary Controller EES No b Choose Yes to assign the logical drive to the redundant contr
274. is drive name v To Assign a Logical Drive Name Optional 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select a logical drive 3 Choose logical drive Name 106 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 4 Type the name you want to give the logical drive in the New Logical Drive Name field and press Return to save the name goma zef 2f e ECEE GOOD 7 B 3 Bl Oooo Ysew sogi drives M Pa 594F8542 RAI DA 34476 goon ee 1 Delete logical drive Partition logical drive 1 Current Logical Drive Name Mew Logical Drive Name New Name sHutdown logical drive Write policy Partitions You can divide a logical drive into several partitions or use the entire logical drive as a Single partition You can configure up to 32 partitions and 1024 LUN assignments loop mode only For guidelines on setting up 1024 LUNs see Planning for 1024 LUNs on an FC or SATA Array Optional Loop Mode Only on page 159 Caution If you modify the size of a partition or logical drive all data on the drive is lost Note If you plan to map hundreds of LUNs the process is easier if you use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for more information Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 107 Partition O 2 GB Partition 1 1 GB Logical drive 0 RAID 5
275. ises sun prod storEdge sysUpTime 0 1966600 5 27 46 00 sysContact O John Doe 212 555 1212 sysName 0 My Array sysLocation Lab sysservices 0 72 Appendix F SNMP Management Using HP OpenView 383 Viewing Enterprise Objects SNMP must be enabled on the array to view enterprise objects From the RAID firmware Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Communication Parameters Network Protocol Support SNMP and verify that SNMP is enabled Certain array information can be obtained by browsing the MIB These objects are located under the following subtree 1so0 org dod internet private enterprises sun product storEdgeEL 1 Navigate to this object ID with the MIB browser and select the appropriate branch for the product x Browse MIB lt vcs1 gt File View Name or IP Address Community Name storEdges510 localdomain MIB Object ID iso org dod internet private enterprises sun prod storEdgeEL z z Up Tree Down Tree Describe Start Query HIB Instance SHMP Set Value HIB Values 2 Continue to browse to the ext Interface node and select the desired item from the list 384 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 3 Click Start Query x Browse lle tenes be File View Name or IP Address Community Name Pa storEdges510 localdomain MIB Object ID vate ente
276. isk device names in a cluster Do not change the controller unique identifier unless instructed to do so by qualified service personnel 246 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 M 1 To Specify the Controller Unique Identifier From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Controller Parameters Controller Unique Identifier lt hex gt to display the current identifier value and make it possible to change the value Type in the value 0 to automatically read the chassis serial number from the midplane or type in the hexadecimal value for the original serial number of the chassis if the midplane has been replaced and you want to retain the previous identifier The value 0 is immediately replaced with the hex value of the chassis serial number Any other value is displayed as it was typed This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now Choose Yes to reset the controller Setting the Controller s Date and Time You can specify the controller date and time so that event messages in the event log display the date and time of the event correctly To Set the Controller s Time Zone From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration
277. isplay the LUN table lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives LUN LU ALD view and edit logical Volumes Muiew and edit jost_iuns p Al LDI T CHL 1 ID A Primary Control a a CHL 3 ID i Secondary Contro CHL 3 ID 12 Primary Control Size CMB gt RAID al 68953 RAIDA Partition Hc ce view system Information view and edit Event logs 4 Select the LUN you want to map the drive to A list of available logical drives is displayed 5 Select the logical drive LD that you want to map to the selected LUN The partition table is displayed Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives Size CMH RAID view and edit logical Volumes af 6s953 RaIDa y ed CHL 1 ID A Primary Controll SSS BEA aes ra 456497FB NA RALDH 68953 GOOD 5 p2 ssnorzcs wa maroa esos coo 6 Select the partition you want to map to the selected LUN 74 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 7 8 10 11 Choose Map Host LUN and then choose Yes to confirm the host LUN mapping 4 Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes T Tet CHL 1 ID A Primary Controll vi CHL 3 ID 1 Secondary Contro uw CHL 3 ID 12 Primary Control view system Information view and edit Event logs The partition is now mapped to the selected LUN lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical d
278. isplays the filter you are creating lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes T CHL 6 ID 46 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 50 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Mame List Map Host LUH Create Host Filter Entr Host ID WWH WWPH Ax21616HER8 B2139EA Host ID WWAN Ax 747565 7468656574 Csecshgr gt Host ID WWH 8x216666CHFFSH4DE2 server gt Host IDZHWH AxAAHHAHHAHHAHHHHA CsecsMNgr gt eenece 9 Review the filter configuration screen Make any changes necessary by selecting the setting you want to change lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes iT CHL ID 486 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 50 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Mame List eenee ce ogical Drive i Partition amp Host ID WWH x21 61 06E88B2139EA Host ID WWH Mask amp xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Filter Type Include Access Mode Read Write Hame Hot Set a To edit the WWN use the arrow keys to select Host ID WWN Type the desired changes and press Return lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes U CHL 6 ID 486 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 50 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 51 Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Mame List e
279. ive Swap Detect If neither a local spare drive nor a global spare drive is available and Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time is disabled the controller does not attempt to rebuild unless you apply a forced manual rebuild To enable Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time perform the following steps 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time A list of check time intervals is displayed 2 Select a Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time interval A confirmation message is displayed 3 Choose Yes to confirm 298 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 When Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time is enabled that is when a check time interval has been selected the controller detects whether the failed drive has been replaced by checking the failed drive s channel and ID Once the failed drive has been replaced the rebuild begins immediately Note This feature requires system resources and can impact performance If the failed drive is not replaced but a local spare is added to the logical drive the rebuild begins with the spare FIGURE 14 1 illustrates this automatic rebuild process Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Array 299 One member drive fails in a logical drive Any local spare drive assigned to logical drive
280. ive connections if the cache is cleared the controller accepts four different connections again To Change the Maximum Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connections From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters Max Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connection to display a list of values Choose a value and then choose Yes to confirm your choice This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now Choose Yes to reset the controller Number of Tags Reserved for Each Host LUN Connection Use this menu option to modify the tag command queuing on the host LUN connection The default setting is 32 tags with a predefined range of 1 to 256 The default factory setting should not be changed unless you are directed to change it by technical support Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 231 Each host LUN connection has 32 the default setting tags reserved This setting ensures that the controller accepts at least 32 tags per connection The controller can accept more as long as controller resources allow it if the controller does not have enough internal resources at least 32 tags can be accepted per connection v To Modify the Tag Command Queuing on the Host LUN Conne
281. ives you can choose on line initialization so that you can use the logical drive before initialization is complete Optional Configure the logical drive stripe size Depending on the optimization mode selected the array is configured with the default stripe sizes shown in Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 When you create a logical drive however you can assign a different stripe size to that logical drive Note Default stripe sizes result in optimal performance for most applications Selecting a stripe size that is inappropriate for your optimization mode and RAID level can decrease performance significantly For example smaller stripe sizes are ideal for I Os that are transaction based and randomly accessed But when a logical drive configured with a 4 Kbyte stripe size receives files of 128 Kbyte each physical drive has to write many more times to store it in 4 Kbyte data fragments Change stripe size only when you are sure it will result in performance improvements for your particular applications See Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 for more information Note Once a logical drive is created its stripe size cannot be changed To change the stripe size you must delete the logical drive and then recreate it using the new stripe size a Choose Stripe Size A menu of stripe size options is displayed If you specified random optimization in additi
282. ize a v LUN you must first manually write the label using the Auto configure option of the format 1M utility For the SCSI array see To Label a LUN on page 76 For the FC array or SATA array see To Label a LUN on page 121 Adding Physical Drives When you add a physical drive to a logical drive the capacity of the original logical drive remains the same and additional capacity is displayed as a new partition For example if you have a single 200 Gbyte logical drive and add a 36 Gbyte drive the total logical drive is 236 Gbyte with two partitions one 200 Gbyte partition and one 36 Gbyte partition The new partition must be mapped to a host LUN for the HBA to recognize it Physical drives can be added to RAID 0 1 3 and 5 logical drives For RAID 1 configurations physical drives must be added in pairs The operation of adding physical drives cannot be canceled once it has started If a power failure occurs the add operation pauses When the power comes back on the controller automatically continues the operation If a physical drive in a logical drive fails during the add operation the add operation pauses and resumes automatically after a logical drive rebuild has completed To Add a Physical Drive to a Logical Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit logical drive 2 Select a logical drive Note For logical drives configured as RAID 1 you must add physical drives in pairs
283. k Back up your controller dependent configuration information Use the save nvram to disks function to save configuration information whenever a configuration change is made When you save your configuration it is stored in a logical drive Note A logical drive must exist that the controller can write NVRAM content onto 276 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Note When you save your configuration record the configuration information in case you need to refer to it later Appendix C provides a convenient set of worksheets you can use for this purpose Saving your NVRAM controller configuration to a file provides a backup of the controller dependent configuration information such as channel settings host IDs FC protocol and cache configuration It does not save LUN mapping information The NVRAM configuration file can restore all configuration settings but does not rebuild logical drives Caution Major upgrades of controller firmware or replacing a controller with one that has a significantly different version of firmware might involve differences in non volatile RAM NVRAM that require following special upgrade procedures For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide and to the release notes for your array The firmware menu options whose parameter settings are saved when you save your NVRAM controller configuration to disk include logical
284. l 2 onz sorm evro soriar e nal 2 te seriar afr na 2 ciz ser rl wal 2 ae cceoech i 4 C DRU RCC 11 AUTO DG DRU RCC ii AUTO The Chl column for channel 2 displays lt 3 C gt to indicate that channel 3 is a redundant loop for channel 2 Similarly the Chl column for channel 3 displays lt 2 C gt to indicate that channel 2 is a redundant loop for channel 3 2 Select the channel that you want to modify 3 Choose channel Mode to display a menu of channel mode options 4 Select the mode you want that channel to have and then choose Yes to confirm the change This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 5 Choose Yes to reset the controller Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 87 Redundant Communication Channels RCCOM The RCCOM channel mode provides the communication channels by which two controllers in a redundant RAID array communicate with one another This communication enables the controllers to monitor each other and includes configuration updates and control of cache By default channels 2 and 3 are configured as DRV RCCOM which combines drive and RCCOM functions on the same channel Drive and RCCOM In this configuration RCCOM is distributed ove
285. l drive on line requires more time than off line initialization m Off Line Enables you to configure and use the drive only after initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive without having to also perform I O operations off line initialization requires less time than on line initialization You can repeat Step 7 if you want to change logical drive expansion back on to on line See Creating Logical Drives on page 57 8 When the logical drive capacity and initialize mode are selected press Escape and then choose Yes to expand the logical drive A notification message informs you when the process is complete On Line Expansion of Logical Drive 0 Completed 9 Press Escape to return to the previous screen Drive capacity information is displayed The total capacity of the logical drive has been expanded to 68952 Gbyte CHL iw wain sizeam seaves 2 s ole SE EEE es ee ee ee ee eee 11873F567 NA RAIDS 68952 GOOD Lael 4 rr E 10 Map the new partition m For a SCSI array map the new partition as described in Io Map a Logical Drive Partition on page 73 m For a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array map the new partition as described in To Map a Logical Drive Partition on page 113 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 11 Solaris operating system only For the Solaris operating system to recogn
286. l logical drives If a member drive in any logical drive fails the global spare drive joins that logical drive and automatically starts to rebuild 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Global spare drive Global spare drive _ gt Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 Logical drive 2 FIGURE 1 2 Global Spare Using Both Local and Global Spare Drives In FIGURE 1 3 the member drives in logical drive 0 are 9 Gbyte drives and the members in logical drives 1 and 2 are all 4 Gbyte drives A local spare drive always has higher priority than a global spare drive If a drive fails and a local spare and a global spare drive of sufficient capacity are both available the local spare drive is used Local spare drive Global spare drive 9 GB 4 GB Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 Logical drive 2 FIGURE 1 3 Mixing Local and Global Spares Chapter 1 Before You Begin 7 In FIGURE 1 3 it is not possible for the 4 Gbyte global spare drive to join logical drive 0 because of its insufficient capacity The 9 Gbyte local spare drive is used for logical drive 0 once a drive in this logical drive fails If the failed drive is in logical drive 1 or 2 the 4 Gbyte global spare drive is used automatically Accessing the Firmware Application You can access the controller firmware by connecting an RS 232 port on your host to an RS 232 port on your RAID contro
287. l number N of physical drives available for data storage For example if the capacity is N 1 and the total number of disk drives in the logical drive is six 36 Gbyte drives the disk space available for storage is equal to five disk drives 5 x 36 Gbyte or 180 Gbyte Note The 1 refers to the amount of striping across the example six drives which provides redundancy of data and is equal to the size of one of the disk drives For RAID 3 0 30 and 5 0 50 capacity refers to the total number of physical drives N minus one physical drive for each logical drive in the volume For example if the total number of disk drives in the logical drive is twenty 36 Gbyte drives and the total number of logical drives is 2 the disk space available for storage is equal to 18 disk drives 18 x 36 Gbyte or 648 Gbyte Appendix A Basic RAID Concepts 309 The advantages and disadvantages of different RAID levels are described in the following table TABLE A 2 RAID Level Characteristics RAID Level Description NRAID NRAID is an acronym for Non RAID NRAID does not provide data redundancy and is not recommended RAID 0 Striping without fault tolerance provides maximum performance RAID 1 Mirrored or duplexed disks for each disk in the array a duplicate disk is maintained for fault tolerance RAID 1 does not improve performance over that of a single disk drive It requires 50 of total disk capacity for overhead RAID 3 One drive is dedi
288. ld of Logical Drive x Completed Changing a Logical Drive Controller Assignment See To Change a Controller Assignment Optional on page 68 for the procedure for changing a logical drive controller assignment on the SCSI array See To Assign a Logical Drive Name Optional on page 106 for the procedure for changing a logical drive controller assignment on the FC array or SATA array Expanding the Capacity of a Logical Drive Use this option to expand the capacity of an existing logical drive For example you might originally have had several 18 Gbyte physical drives of which only 9 Gbyte each were selected to build a logical drive To use the remaining 9 Gbyte in each physical drive you need to expand the logical drive After a logical drive is expanded the total additional capacity is displayed as a new partition The new partition must be mapped to a host LUN in order for an HBA to recognize it RAID levels 0 1 3 and 5 support expansion Note To expand a logical volume you must first expand the logical drives that make up the logical volume v To Expand a Logical Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select the logical drive you want to expand Chapter 6 Logical Drives 131 3 Delete any local spare drives assigned to this logical drive It is not necessary to delete any global spare drives See Deleting a Spare Drive on page 174 for more information about how
289. le or Disable Mixed Drive Support 86 Channel Settings 86 Configuring Channel Mode 86 v To Modify a Channel Mode 87 Redundant Communication Channels RCCOM 88 Using Four DRV RCCOM Channels 88 v To Configure Channels 4 and 5 as Additional DRV RCCOM Channels 88 Using Channels 4 and 5 as RCCOM Only Channels 89 v To Configure Channels 4 and 5 as RCCOM Only Channels 89 Host Channel IDs 90 v To Add or Delete a Unique HostID 91 Channel ID Ranges 92 v To Assign an ID From a Different Range 92 Fibre Connection Protocol 94 v To Change the Fibre Connection Protocol 94 Creating Logical Drives 95 Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte Solaris Operating System Only 95 v To Change Cylinder and Head Settings 96 vi Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 v To Create a Logical Drive 96 Controller Assignment 105 v To Change a Controller Assignment Optional 106 Logical Drive Name 106 v To Assign a Logical Drive Name Optional 106 Partitions 107 v To Partition a Logical Drive Optional 108 Mapping a Partition toa Host LUN 109 LUN Mapping 110 LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only 111 v To Map a Logical Drive Partition 113 v To Create Host Filters FC and SATA Arrays Only 115 Labeling a LUN Solaris Operating System Only 121 v ToLabelaLUN 121 Creating Solaris Operating System Device Files for Newly Mapped LUNs 122 v To Create Device Files for Newly Mapped LUNs 122 Saving Configuration NVR
290. lf duplex send or receive mode instead of providing the full duplex send and receive performance of point to point mode m Check the host IDs on all the channels to ensure that there is only one ID per channel on the primary controller or on the secondary controller for point to point mode When viewing the host IDs there should be one primary controller ID PID or one secondary controller ID SID the alternate port ID should display N A Proper point to point mode allows only one ID per channel m If you change the mode to Point to point only and attempt to add a second ID the controller does not allow you to add an ID to the same channel For example if you have ID 40 on CH 0 PID and N A on CH 0 SID the controller does not allow you to add another PID to CH 0 Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 31 The controller displays a warning if the user is in point to point mode and tries to add an ID to the same channel but on the other controller The warning is displayed because you have the ability to disable the internal connection between the channels on the primary and secondary controller using the set inter controller link CLI command and by doing this you can have one ID on the primary and another ID on the secondary as a legal operation However if you ignore this warning and add an ID to the other controller the RAID controller does not allow a login as an FC AL port because this would be illegal in a point t
291. lications such as 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Information life cycle management Content addressable storage Backup and restore Secondary SAN storage Near line DAS storage Static reference data storage m Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array The Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI RAID array supports up to two expansion chassis expansion unit arrays that have a set of drives and no controller for a total of 36 drives The RAID array and expansion units connect to the storage devices and consoles by means of standard serial port Ethernet and SCSI connections The Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI RAID array supports up to two expansion chassis expansion unit arrays that have a set of drives and no controller for a total of 36 drives The RAID array and expansion units connect to the storage devices and consoles by means of standard serial port Ethernet and SCSI connections This array is similar to the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array except that it uses Ultra 320 SCSI drives All of these arrays are rack mountable Network Equipment Building System NEBS Level 3 compliant Fibre Channel mass storage subsystems NEBS Level 3 is the highest level of NEBS criteria used to assure maximum operability of networking equipment in mission critical environments such as telecommunications central offices In addition to the arrays mentioned above one mixed platform configuration is supported
292. licy is preconfigured to enable write back cache Use the Write Policy menu option to configure a write policy for the logical volume that is different from the globaL write policy see Enabling and Disabling Write Back Cache on page 227 m Logical Volume Assignment The logical volume will be assigned to the Primary Controller by default Use the Logical Volume Assignment option to assign the logical volume to the Secondary controller 7 Optional Assign a write policy for the logical volume that is different from the write policy assigned to the RAID array The write policy assigned to the logical volume is displayed in the list of logical volume options You can change the logical volume s write policy at any time 152 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Note The Default write policy displayed is the global write policy a Select Write Policy The following write policy options are displayed a Default default This menu option assigns the global write policy If the global setting for write policy is changed automatically changes the write policy for this logical volume As described in Cache Write Policy Guidelines on page 30 the array can be configured to dynamically switch write policy from write back cache to write through cache if specified events occur Write policy is only automatically switched for logical volumes with write policy configured to Default See
293. ller with the null modem cable supplied with your array The Connecting Your Array chapter of the Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array contains instructions for setting up communications once this connection is made Platform specific instructions are found in the appendix that is appropriate for your hardware and operating system You can also access the controller firmware through telnet sessions The default TCP IP connection method is to use the IP address gateway and netmask assigned by a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server If your network has a DHCP server you can access the controller s Ethernet port using that IP address without having to set up the RS 232 port connection described above The Connecting Your Array chapter of the Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array contains a full description of the various in band and out of band connections available to you Setting an IP Address To access the array using the Ethernet port the controller must have an IP address The default setting uses the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP to automatically assign an IP address if you have a DHCP server on your network and DHCP support is enabled You can set the IP address by typing in values for the IP address itself the subnet mask and the IP address of the gateway manually If your network is using a Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP server or a Dynamic
294. lt 4 5V Default 13 2V Default 10 8V Default 90 C Default 0 C Default 80 C Default 0 C Appendix D Disable 4 0V 4 8V Disable 12 5V 14 4V Disable 9 6V 11 5V Disable 50 100 C Disable 0 20 C Disable 50 100 C Disable 0 20 C Parameter Summary Tables 341 Default System Functions The following system function parameters are available TABLE D 15 System Function Parameters User Defined Parameter FC and SATA Default Setting SCSI Default Setting Range of Values Mute Beeper No No Yes No Change Password No No Type a password No Reset Controller No No Yes No Shutdown controller reserved No No Yes No Controller Maintenance Restore NVRAM from disks No No Yes No Save NVRAM to disks No No Yes No 342 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Keeping Specific Parameter Defaults Default Parameter Fault Management SDRAM ECC SCSI Parameters Data Transfer Rate sync transfer clock Wide Transfer Parity Check Spin Up Parameters SCSI Motor Spin Up SCSI Reset at Power Up Disk Access Delay Time Network Protocol Support PriAgent Do Not Change these Default Parameters unless directed by Technical Support Enabled 80 MHz Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 15 none to 75 seconds Enabled Appendix D Parameter Summary Tables 343 344 Sun StorEdge 3000 Fami
295. ly RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 APPENDIX E Event Messages This appendix lists the following event messages a Controller Events on page 346 a Controller Alerts on page 346 a Controller Warnings on page 348 a Controller Notifications on page 349 m Drive Events on page 350 a Drive Alerts on page 350 a Drive Warnings on page 352 a Drive Notifications on page 353 m Channel Events on page 354 a Channel Alerts on page 354 a Channel Notifications on page 357 m Logical Drive Events on page 357 a Logical Drive Alerts on page 358 as Logical Drive Notifications on page 361 m General Target Events on page 365 SAF TE Device Events on page 365 Controller Self Diagnostic Events on page 367 I C Device Events on page 368 SES Device Events on page 368 General Peripheral Device Events on page 370 345 There are three categories of events as shown in TABLE E 1 TABLEE 1 Categories of Event Messages Category Description Alert Errors that need to be attended to immediately might require reconnecting cables replacing a component or rebuilding a drive Warning Errors that might indicate a temporary condition a possible component problem or the need to adjust controller parameters Press Escape to clear message Notification Informational message sent from controller firmware press Escape to clear
296. m 58 XXV TABLE 5 1 TABLE 5 2 TABLE 7 1 TABLE 8 1 TABLE 8 2 TABLE 9 1 TABLE 11 1 TABLE 11 2 TABLE 12 1 TABLE 12 2 TABLE 12 3 TABLE 12 4 TABLE 12 5 TABLE 12 6 TABLE 12 7 TABLE 12 8 TABLE 12 9 TABLE 14 1 TABLE 14 2 TABLE 14 3 TABLE 14 4 TABLE A 1 TABLE A 2 TABLE A 3 TABLE B 1 TABLE B 2 TABLE B 3 TABLE B 4 TABLE B 5 TABLE B 6 ID Values Assigned to Each ID Range 92 Cylinder and Head Mapping for the Solaris Operating System 95 Parameters Displayed in the Logical Volume Status Window 151 Configuration for 1024 LUNs 160 Example of ID Assignments for 64 LUNs With Multipathing Enabled 161 ID Switch Settings for FC Expansion Units 171 System Group Objects 217 Cylinder and Head Mapping for the Solaris Operating System 234 Fan Status and Fan Speeds 253 Relationship Between Cooling Elements Fans and Power Supply Modules 254 Temperature Sensor Locations FC and SATA 255 Voltage Sensors for Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Arrays 256 Voltage Sensors for Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Arrays 256 Power Supply Sensors FC and SATA 257 Location of Cooling Fans 260 Temperature Sensor Locations SCSI 261 Power Supply Sensors SCSI 261 Battery Status Indicators 284 Parameters Displayed in the Logical Drive Status Window 286 Parameters Displayed in the Physical Drive Status Window 289 Parameters Displayed in the Channel Status Table 291 RAID Level Overview 309 RAID Level Characteris
297. m Create six host IDs this requires three host drives perform one of the following steps and then map the 128 partitions to the 6 host IDs m Create 4 logical drives of 32 partitions each Create 5 logical drives with the total number of partitions equaling 128 four logical drives with 25 partitions each and one with 28 partitions a Create 6 logical drives 5 logical drives with 21 partitions each and 1 with 23 partitions For details about how to add host IDs see To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID on page 56 Note For an overview of how partitions LUNs and host IDs work refer to Mapping a Partition to a Host LUN on page 72 v To Create 128 LUNs 1 Create a minimum of four host IDs By default you have two host IDs Channel 1 ID 0 primary controller and Channel 3 ID 1 secondary controller You can have a total of two IDs per channel one for the primary controller and one for the secondary controller See To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID on page 56 for more information 2 Confirm that the allowed number of LUNs per host ID is 32 3 Choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters 158 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 4 If the LUNs per Host SCSI ID setting is not 32 choose LUNs per Host SCSI ID and select 32 Then choose Yes to confirm view view view view view Maximum Queued I 0 Count 256
298. m Information view and edit Event logs FIGURE 2 2 Firmware Main Menu Note Because Fibre Channel SATA and SCSI arrays share the same controller firmware most menu options are the same Parameter values might vary according to the array type configuration drive type and so forth 14 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Use the following keys to navigate within the Main Menu and all its submenus TABLE 2 2 Navigation Keys Key Action oT Select menu options or other items that display onscreen Some screens may not be large enough to display all entries Use the up or down arrows to scroll to these entries Return or Enter Perform the selected menu option or display a submenu Escape Return to the previous menu without performing the selected menu option For some procedures that use the Return or Enter key to mark selected items for inclusion pressing Escape will perform the next step in the procedure Pressing Escape also clears event messages Ctrl L Ctrl key and Refresh the screen information L key together Boldface capital Access a menu command quickly if the menu option has a single letter in a menu capitalized letter that is highlighted option list Note If you are connected through a serial port connection including a Solaris tip session rather than through a telnet session it is possible that when a controller is inserted deasserted or failed over unwanted
299. m Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA expansion units connected to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC RAID array This special purpose configuration either alone or in combination with Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA expansion units is described in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array Chapter 1 Before You Begin 3 Key Concepts The following section briefly outlines several key concepts m RAID Planning Considerations on page 4 m Local and Global Spare Drives on page 5 m Using Both Local and Global Spare Drives on page 7 Further details are presented later in this guide where the appropriate menu options are described See also m Logical Drives on page 304 m Logical Volumes on page 305 m Channels Partitions and LUN Mapping on page 305 RAID Planning Considerations Here are some questions that can help you plan your RAID array m How many physical drives do you have You have from 5 drives to 12 drives in your array You can add expansion units if you need more drives m How many drives would you like to appear to the host computer Determine what capacity will be included in a logical configuration of drives A logical configuration of drives is displayed to the host as a single physical drive For the default logical drive configuration see Default Configurations on page 19 a What kind of host appl
300. m a logical drive When the logical drive is deleted properly this information is erased and the drive status is shown as FRMT rather than USED A drive with FRMT status has been formatted with 256 Mbyte of reserved space for storing controller specific information but has no user data on it If you remove the reserved space using the View and edit Drives menu the drive status changes to NEW To handle BAD drives see Scanning Drives for Bad Blocks on page 143 If two drives show BAD and MISSING status refer to the Troubleshooting chapter of the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array For detailed information about the Physical Drive Status Table see Physical Drive Status Table on page 288 SCSI Drive IDs SCSI Only Each SCSI array must be configured as a single bus configuration or a split bus configuration based on where the SCSI bus cable is attached on the I O module For bus configuration details refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your SCSI array The drive bus configuration determines how drives and drive IDs are assigned to drive channels on the controller Chapter 9 Physical Drives 169 m A single bus configuration assigns all 12 disk drive IDs in a controller to one channel typically CH 0 for the RAID array and CH 2 for an expansion unit RAID Array Single bus configuration default IDs O PES cHo
301. m only read operations on the disk or to perform both read and write operations on the disk 5 When configuration is complete choose Execute Drive Testing and then choose Yes to test the drive and to display the test progress indicator 6 Optional Press Escape if you want to close the progress indicator and return to the menu 7 Optional Select the same drive and choose scsi drive Utilities Read Write Test View Read Write Testing Progress to again view the progress of the read write test Chapter 9 Physical Drives 191 8 Optional To view other aspects of this test select the drive being tested and choose scsi drive Utilities Read Write Test m Choose List Current Bad Block Table to display a table of the bad blocks located so far m Choose Abort Drive Testing if you want to stop testing the drive 9 Choose scsi drive Utilities SCSI Drive Low Level Format Clear R W Test Completed Status and then choose Yes to clear the completed status and make the drive available for logical device operations such as adding reserved space and then adding the drive to a logical device Changing Disk Reserved Space Before a disk can be included in a logical drive the RAID controller needs to format an amount of space for storing controller specific data separately from user data Note You can change disk reserved space only for drives that are not configured as spare drives
302. marks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and in other countries Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation U S Government Rights Commercial use Government users are subject to the Sun Microsystems Inc standard license agreement and applicable provisions of the FAR and its supplements DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Copyright 2002 2006 Dot Hill Systems Corporation et d autres 2200 Faraday Avenue Suite 100 Carlsbad Californie 92008 Etats Unis Tous droits r serv s Sun Microsystems Inc et Dot Hill Systems Corporation peuvent avoir les droits de propri t intellectuels relatants a la technologie incorpor e dans le produit qui est d crit dans ce document En particulier et sans la limitation ces droits de propri t intellectuels peuvent inclure un ou plus des brevets am ricains num r s a http www sun com patents et un ou les brevets plus suppl mentaires ou les applications de brevet en attente dans les Etats Unis et dans les autres pays Ce produit ou document est prot g par un copyright et distribu avec des licences qui en restreignent l utilisation la copie la distribution et la d compilation Au
303. mation For additional troubleshooting tips refer to the Installation Operation and Service manual for your array and to the release notes for your array Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 APPENDIX A Basic RAID Concepts A redundant array of independent disks RAID offers major benefits in availability capacity and performance Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays provide complete RAID functionality and enhanced drive failure management This chapter covers the following concepts and planning guidelines m RAID Terminology Overview on page 304 a Logical Drives on page 304 a Logical Volumes on page 305 a Channels Partitions and LUN Mapping on page 305 m RAID Levels on page 308 RAID 0 on page 311 RAID 1 on page 311 RAID 1 0 on page 312 RAID 3 on page 313 RAID 5 on page 314 Advanced RAID Levels on page 315 See also a Local and Global Spare Drives on page 5 a Using Both Local and Global Spare Drives on page 7 303 RAID Terminology Overview Redundant array of independent disks RAID is a storage technology used to improve the processing capability of storage systems This technology is designed to provide reliability in disk array systems and to take advantage of the performance gains offered by an array of multiple disks over single disk storage RAID s two primary underlying concepts are a Distributing da
304. mber drive is cloned to the standby spare but the spare does not become the new source drive The standby spare drive clones the source drive without substituting it The status of the spare drive is displayed as a CLONE drive as soon as the cloning process is complete The source drive remains a member of the logical drive v To Enable Perpetual Clone 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select the member drive with a predicted error 3 Choose clone Failing drive Perpetual Clone and then choose Yes to clone the drive The controller automatically starts the cloning process using the existing standby local or global spare drive to clone the source drive Chapter 9 Physical Drives 181 Note If no standby drive local or global spare drive is available you must add a new drive and configure it as a global spare or local spare drive A notification message is displayed when the cloning process begins LG 0 Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 2 ID 10 Starting Clone 4 Press Escape to clear the message and display a progress bar 34732 2Q0MB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G ss a ee ee ee ees oe 347732 260MB A ON LINE SEAGATE 1T336753FSUN36G SES SUN StorEdge 3510F A 5 Optional To close the progress bar press Escape to return to the table of SCSI drives If you close the progress bar and want to return to it so you can view the cloning progress or abort the drive clon
305. merely shows a two letter code in front of the percentage completed These codes and their meanings are shown in TABLE 2 4 TABLE 2 4 Progress Indicator Prefix Meanings Prefix IX PX EX AX Description Logical Drive Initialization Parity Regeneration Logical Drive Expansion Add SCSI Drives 18 Device Capacities Firmware screens often present the capacity of devices such as logical drives All device capacity is displayed in powers of 1024 1 Kbyte 1024 bytes 1 Mbyte 1024 Kbyte 1 048 576 bytes 1 Gbyte 1024 Mbyte 1 073 741 824 bytes 1 Tbyte 1024 Gbyte 1 099 511 627 776 bytes Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines This chapter lists default configurations and provides guidelines you need to be aware of when configuring your array This chapter covers the following topics Default Configurations on page 19 a Default Logical Drive Configuration on page 20 a Default Channel Configurations on page 20 Maximum Drive Configurations per Array on page 22 Maximum Number of Disks and Maximum Usable Capacity per Logical Drive on page 23 Controller Operation Guidelines on page 26 a Dual Controller Guidelines on page 26 a Single Controller Guidelines on page 27 Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 Cache Write Policy Guidelines on pa
306. message Controller Events The controller records all array events during power on it records up to one thousand events Note Powering off or resetting the controller automatically deletes all recorded event log entries Controller event messages include the following Controller Alerts Controller ALERT Redundant Controller Failure Detected A controller in a dual redundant configuration has failed Controller SDRAM ECC Multi bits Error Detected SDRAM ECC multi bit error Controller SDRAM ECC Single bit Error Detected 346 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 SDRAM ECC single bit error Controller SDRAM Parity Error Detected SDRAM parity error Controller PCI Bus Parity Error Detected PCI bus parity error Controller ALERT Power Supply Unstable or NVRAM Failed Power supply unstable NVRAM has failed firmware update failure or incorrect configuration for example a controller combined with the wrong backplane type Memory Not Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config Memory capacity not sufficient to support current configuration CHL FATAL ERROR _ CHL _ channel fatal error Controller ALERT 12V Low Voltage Detected _ This event message indicates that voltage dropped below the low voltage threshold shown in parentheses N Appendix E Event Messages 34 Controller Warnings WARNING BBU Absent or Failed Correct It and Reset Ctlr to Take
307. meters Note No change to settings or status can be made using this menu option Use the following menu option to change threshold values v To View or Configure Thresholds 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Controller Peripheral Device Configuration Voltage and Temperature Parameters to display a list of trigger threshold categories 266 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 2 Select a parameter whose upper and lower thresholds you want to view or edit view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes View and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels Yiew and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices 3 u Uieu MESE E for 3 3U Events u Set Trigger Thresholds for 5U Events Adju Trigger Thresholds for 12 Events Pont Trigger Thresholds for CPU Temperature Events Trigger Thresholds for Hoard Temperature Events U Voltage and Temperature Parameters Upper and lower thresholds for the selected parameter are displayed 3 If you want to change a threshold select that threshold view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Feripheral devices 5 Tose Pediqgqer Thresholds for 3 3U Events ul Set T it Upper Threshold
308. mily arrays can use either SNMPv1 or community based SNMPv2 v2c protocols for SET and GET messages but they only send SNMPv1 trap messages Regardless of protocol the security mechanism is community based and the community name is public for traps as well as SET and GET messages SNMP Traps The controller agent sends an SNMPv1 trap message for each controller event SNMPv1 traps are identified by the value of three fields m enterprise m generic trap m specific trap The enterprise value is given as follows SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 42 2 180 product ID Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 213 where product ID is the Sun StorEdge array product number 3310 3320 3510 or 3511 The enterprises OID is defined by SNMPv2 SMI as 1so org dod internet private enterprises where the preceding string has the following numeric value ied Bye Ove Lig AL For example a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array has the following enterprise value SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 42 2 180 3510 This can be described numerically by the following value fips Oud aA sl oA a 2s LOO ool The generic trap field has the following value enterpriseSpecific where enterpriseSpecific has the numeric value 6 The specific trap field has the numeric value 1 Note While all products have a specific trap value of 1 the name for this value varies based on the product ID specified by the MIB Note The specific trap field always has the value
309. n Logical drive number PO Logical drive 0 of the primary controller where P primary controller and 0 logical drive number S1 Logical drive 1 of the secondary controller where S secondary controller and 1 logical drive number Logical drive ID number controller generated The logical volume to which this logical drive belongs NA indicates no logical volume Assigned RAID level Capacity of the logical drive Logical drive status The logical drive is in the process of copying from another drive The logical drive is being initiated The logical drive is in good condition A drive member failed in the logical drive More than one drive member in a logical drive has failed Two or more member drives in this logical drive have failed Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 TABLE 14 2 Parameter Status2 Status3 LN SB FL Name Parameters Displayed in the Logical Drive Status Window Continued SHUT DOWN REBUILDING ge o N A a A Q N Description The controller has been shut down using the Shutdown command Restart the controller to restore it to GOOD status The logical drive is being rebuilt Logical Drive status column 2 The logical drive is initializing Adding a physical drive to the logical drive Expanding a logical drive Logical Drive status column 3 Stripe size The logical drive is rebuilding Regenerating parity on the logi
310. n Controller menu option first halts all I O activity and so this option should be used only when all I O activity from hosts has already been halted The Shutdown Controller menu option then writes the contents of cache to the drives v To Shut Down a Controller 1 From the Main Menu choose system Functions Shutdown Controller and then choose Yes to confirm that you want to shut down the controller A status and confirmation message tells you that the controller shutdown is complete and asks if you want to reset the controller x Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit Drives at hhutdown Controller Completed Power off Controller or Reset Controller Reset Controller es No Shutdown controller Controller maintenance 2 Choose Yes if you want to reset the controller Chapter 13 System Functions and Event Logs 275 Note If you choose No you must power the controller off and on manually or use the CLI to restart it Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide for more information The Download Firmware Option Reserved This function is no longer available See the appropriate patch readme file in a firmware patch for firmware download procedures The Advanced Maintenance Functions Option Reserved This function is no longer available Saving Your Configuration NVRAM to Dis
311. n both of the host channels that connect with that host With LUN mapping only one partition can be mapped to each LUN To assign multiple partitions to the same LUN use LUN filtering rather than LUN mapping LUN mapping is most effective when only one host is connected to a host channel Channel IDs represent the physical connection between the HBA and the array The host ID is an identifier assigned to the channel so that the host can identify LUNs The following figure shows the relationship between a host ID and a LUN FIGURE 5 2 LUNs Resemble Drawers in a File Cabinet The ID is like a cabinet and the drawers are like the LUNs m The maximum number of LUNs that can be created for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or a Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array in a point to point configuration is 128 110 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 a The maximum number of LUNs that can be created for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or a Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array in a loop configuration is 1024 To create a total of 1024 LUNs see Planning for 1024 LUNs on an FC or SATA Array Optional Loop Mode Only on page 159 The following figure illustrates mapping partitions to host ID LUNs Channel 1 Channel 3 Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 Partition 2 Partition O Logical drive O LUN 1 Logical drive 1 Partition 1 Partition 1 Logical drive 1 LUN 2 Logical drive 0 Partition 2 Partition O FIGURE 5
312. n not busy writes the data to the disk drive A cache writing strategy used to control write operations The write policy options are CIFS write back and write through cache A cache writing strategy in which the array controller writes the data to the disk drive before signaling the host operating system that the process is complete Write through cache has lower write operation and throughput performance than write back cache but it is the safer strategy with minimum risk of data loss on power failure WWNa worldwide name A globally unique hard coded and embedded number assigned by the manufacturer and registered under IEEE that is used to identify hardware Glossary 393 394 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Index Numerics 1024 LUNs in loop mode with added host IDs FC and SATA 91 1024 LUNs loop mode FC and SATA 159 128 LUNs in point to point mode FC and SATA 91 128 LUNs with added host IDs SCSI 56 64 LUNs default SCSI 56 64 LUNs redundant point to point 160 A agent ini file creating for SNMP 222 SNMP parameters 225 audible alarms silencing 271 auto assigning global spare drives FC and SATA 241 B BAD drive status 289 battery charging status 12 operation 283 shelf life 284 status indicators 284 temperature limit 284 baud rate setting 208 beeper muting 271 C cache battery support 285 default parameters 335 enabling write
313. n size of 20000 Mbyte was entered the remaining storage of 20000 Mbyte is allocated to the partition below the newly created partition Offset MB gt Size lt MB gt E 7 20000 1 29000 29008 M Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 71 8 Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to partition the remaining capacity of your logical drive For information on deleting a partition see Deleting a Logical Drive Partition on page 128 Mapping a Partition to a Host LUN A partition is a division of the logical drive that appears as a physical drive to any host that has access to that partition For Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI arrays and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI arrays you can create a maximum of 32 partitions per logical drive So that host bus adapters HBAs recognize the partitions when the host bus is reinitialized each partition must be mapped to a host LUN logical unit number Channel IDs represent the physical connection between the HBA and the array The host ID is an identifier assigned to the channel so that the host can identify LUNs The following figure shows the relationship between a host ID and a LUN FIGURE 4 2 LUNs Resemble Drawers in a File Cabinet Identified by an ID The ID is like a cabinet and the drawers are the LUNs m Each cabinet ID can have up to 32 drawers LUNs m The maximum number of LUNs that can be created for a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array is 128 To create 128
314. navigate to the patch 2 Read the README text file associated with that patch for detailed instructions on downloading and installing the firmware upgrade 3 Follow those instructions to download and install the patch Installing Firmware Upgrades It is important that you run a version of firmware that is supported by your array Before updating your firmware make sure that the version of firmware you want to use is supported by your array 294 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Refer to the release notes for your array for Sun Microsystems patches containing firmware upgrades that are available for your array Refer to SunSolve Online for subsequent patches containing firmware upgrades If you are downloading a Sun patch that includes a firmware upgrade the README file associated with that patch tells you which Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays support that firmware release Caution Major upgrades of controller firmware or replacing a controller with one that has a significantly different version of firmware might involve differences in non volatile RAM NVRAM that require following special upgrade procedures For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide and to the release notes for your array To download new versions of controller firmware or SES and PLD firmware use one of the following tools m The Sun StorEdge CLI with an in band connection for L
315. nd ENABLED 0 for OFF or 1 for ON This configuration enables the sending of controller events as SNMP traps to a single host IP address RECEIVER1 and the sending of controller events in email messages from a specified email address GSENDER_MAIL_BOX through its SMTP mail server SMTP_SERVER to a single email address also called RECEIVER1 but different from the host computer receiving the SMTP traps Sending controller events as broadcast messages is not enabled and not specified in the file SNMP_TRAP ENABLED 1 COMMUNITY public RECEIVER1 nnn nnn nnn nnn EMAIL ENABLED 1 SUBJECT RAID Event SENDER_MAIL BOX xxxx address com SMEP SERVER 129 lt 1 23537123 123 RECEIVER1 xxxx address com A Complete Sample agent ini File This configuration enables the sending of controller events of any severity level as SNMP traps to four host IP addresses and the sending of controller events in email messages to four email addresses It also enables sending controller events as broadcast messages to four host IP addresses at the same time 224 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 SNMP_TRAP ENABLED 1 SEVERITY RECEIVER1 192 RECEIVER2 192 RECEIVER3 192 RECEIVER4 192 EMAIL ENABLED 1 SEVERITY 1 SUBJECT Event from StorEdge RAID Controller SENDER_MATL BOX user example com SMTP_SERVER 192 168 0 1 RECEIVER1 userl example RECEIVER2 user2 example RECEIVER3 user3 example RECEIVER4 user4
316. ndix E The cause of the error condition determines how the alarm is silenced m If an alarm is caused by a controller event use the Mute beeper menu option to disable the system alarm until another error event occurs a If an alarm is caused by a failed component push the Reset button on the right ear of the array 271 Note If the alarm is caused by a failed component Mute beeper has no effect v To Change the Beeper Setting From the Main Menu choose system Functions gt Mute beeper and then choose Yes to turn the beeper off until another event occurs 272 Setting and Changing the Controller Password Use the controller s password to protect an array from unauthorized entry Once a password has been set the user can configure and monitor the RAID controller only after providing the correct password If a password is deleted or no password has been set you may still be prompted for a password In this case press Return to continue The controller password is also used whenever a user accesses the array using telnet or FTP if those protocols have been enabled If a password is deleted or no password has been set you may still be prompted for a password In this case press Return to continue See Network Protocol Support on page 211 for more information about enabling and disabling network protocols Note The controller verifies the password when you enter the Main Menu from the i
317. ndom I O to Sequential I O You are prompted to reset the controller NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until all Logical Drives are deleted and then the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 83 4 Choose Yes to reset the controller If you do not reset the controller now the optimization mode remains unchanged Physical Drive Status Before configuring physical drives into a logical drive you must determine the availability of the physical drives in your enclosure Only drives with a status of FRMT DRV are available Note A drive that does not show a status of FRMT DRV needs to have reserved space added See Changing Disk Reserved Space on page 192 for more information v To Check Physical Drive Availability 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives A list of all the installed physical drives is displayed ani 1o size cm fepeea re ono seatus Vendor and Product 1D ee ie E Sire EE 6 34732 200ME A ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G EE SE EET 34732 20HMB oe OM LIMNE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G s 34732 200MB ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G 9 34732 200MB ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G 34732 2G MB GLOBAL STAND BY SEAGATE 1336 753FSUN36G 2 Use the arrow keys to scroll through the table and c
318. nfiguration The following figures show the channel numbers 0 1 4 and 5 of each host port and the host ID for each channel N A means that the port does not have a second ID assignment The primary controller is the top I O controller module and the secondary controller is the bottom I O controller module The dashed lines between two ports indicate a port bypass circuit that functions as a mini hub and has the following advantages m The port bypass circuit on each channel connects the upper and lower ports on the same channel and provides access to both controllers at the same time m Since there are host connections to two channels if one host connection is removed the other host connection remains operational m Therefore if you have a redundant multipathing configuration in which you have two host connections to each logical drive and one connection fails the remaining path maintains a connection to the logical drive In FIGURE 3 1 and FIGURE 3 2 with multipathing software to reroute the data paths each logical drive remains fully operational when the following conditions occur m One switch fails or is disconnected and the logical drive is routed to the second switch For example if switch 0 fails switch 1 automatically accesses logical drive 0 through the cabling to the lower port on PID 42 m One I O controller module fails and all the host IDs for that controller are reassigned moved to the second 1 O controller m
319. nfiguration NVRAM to a Disk on page 78 for more information 14 Solaris operating system only For the Solaris operating system to recognize a LUN you must first manually write the label using the Auto configure option of the format 1M utility as described in To Label a LUN on page 76 Labeling a LUN Solaris Operating System Only For the Solaris operating system to recognize a LUN you must first manually write the label using the Auto configure option of the format command For additional operating system information refer to the Installation Operation and Service Manual for your Sun StorEdge 3000 family array v To Label a LUN 1 On the data host type format at the root prompt 2 Specify the disk number when prompted 1 Type Y at the following prompt if it is deployed and press Return Disk not labeled Label it now Y The Solaris operating system s Format menu is displayed 76 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 2 Type type to select a drive type 3 Type 0 to choose the Auto configure menu option Choose the Auto configure menu option regardless of which drive types are displayed by the type option 4 Type label and press Y when prompted to continue format gt label Ready to label disk continue y 5 Type quit to finish using the Format menu Solaris Operating System Device Files Perform the following procedure to create device files
320. nformation on the remaining disks In RAID 3 the total disk capacity is equivalent to the sum of the capacities of all drives in the combination excluding the parity drive Thus combining four 1 Gbyte drives for example creates a single logical drive with a total usable capacity of 3 Gbyte This combination appears to the system as a single logical drive RAID 3 improves data transfer rates when data is being read in small chunks or sequentially However in write operations that do not span every drive performance is reduced because the information stored in the parity drive must be recalculated and rewritten every time new data is written limiting simultaneous I O Appendix A Basic RAID Concepts 313 Logical drive Physical disks Dedicated parity Parity 3 4 Parity 7 8 FIGURE A 9 RAID 3 Configuration RAID 5 RAID 5 implements multiple block striping with distributed parity This RAID level offers redundancy with the parity information distributed across all disks in the array Data and its parity are never stored on the same disk In the event that a disk fails original data can be reconstructed using the parity information and the information on the remaining disks 314 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Logical drive Physical disks Striping nondedicated parity Block 4 FIGURE A 10 RAID 5 Configuration lt Block 7 RAID 5 offers inc
321. ng Rebuild Priority 242 v To Set the Rebuild Priority 242 Verification on Writes 243 v To Enable and Disable Verification Methods 243 Redundant Controller Parameters 244 Enabling and Disabling Cache Synchronization 244 v To Enable or Disable Cache Synchronization 244 Controller Parameters 245 Configuring a Controller Name 245 v To View and Display the Controller Name 245 Password Validation Timeout 246 v To Set a Password Validation Timeout 246 Controller Unique Identifier Reserved 246 v To Specify the Controller Unique Identifier 247 Setting the Controller s Date and Time 247 v To Set the Controller s Time Zone 247 v To Set the Controller Date and Time 248 12 Peripheral Devices 249 Viewing Peripheral Device Controller Status 249 Viewing SES Status FC and SATA Only 250 v To Check the Status of SES Components FC and SATA Only 251 Identifying Fans FC and SATA Only 252 v To View the Status of Each Fan 253 SES Temperature Sensor Locations FC and SATA Only 255 Contents xv SES Voltage Sensors FC and SATA Only 256 SES Power Supply Sensors FC and SATA Only 257 Viewing Peripheral Device SAF TE Status SCSI Only 258 v To Check the Status of SAF TE Components SCSI Only 258 Identifying Fans SCSI Only 259 SAF TE Temperature Sensor Locations SCSI Only 260 SAF TE Power Supply Sensors SCSI Only 261 Setting Peripheral Device Entry 262 Redundant Controller Primary 262 Forcing Primary Controller Failure Reserv
322. ng event notifications and takes over all processes The surviving controller is always the primary controller regardless of its original status and any replacement controller afterward assumes the role of the secondary controller The failover and failback processes are completely transparent to hosts Controllers are hot swappable if they are in a redundant configuration Replacing a failed controller takes only a few minutes Since the I O connections are on the controllers you might experience some unavailability between the time when cables on the failed controller are disconnected and the time when a new controller is installed and its cables are connected To maintain your redundant controller configuration replace a failed controller as soon as possible For details refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide RAID LUNs Not Visible to Host By default all RAID arrays are preconfigured with one or two logical drives For a logical drive to be visible to the host server its partitions must be mapped to host LUNs For mapping details see Mapping a Partition to a Host LUN on page 72 for SCSI arrays or LUN Mapping on page 110 for FC and SATA arrays To make the mapped LUNs visible to a specific host perform any steps required for your operating system Refer to the Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array to see host specific information about different operating systems Chapter 14 Mai
323. nit Gigabyte 1024 Mbyte or 1 073 741 824 bytes Gigabit Interface Converter A hot swappable input output device that plugs into a Gigabit Ethernet port or Fibre Channel A spare drive that is available to all logical drives in an array Spare drives can be part of automatic logical drive rebuild A group is a data object that enables multiple servers to be contained under a single category Groups are similar in concept to domains and enable you to organize servers Host bus adapter A drive in a RAID 1 or RAID 5 configuration that contains no data and acts as a standby in case another drive fails The ability of a field replaceable unit FRU to be removed and replaced while the RAID array remains powered on and operational Identifier number The process of writing a specific pattern to all data blocks on all drives in a logical drive This process overwrites and destroys existing data on the disks and the logical drive Initialization is required to make the entire logical drive consistent at the onset Initialization ensures that any parity checks performed in the future are executed correctly Just a Bunch of Disks A storage device that consist of drives with no controllers Local area network Logical drive A section of disk storage space that is presented to the host operating system as a single physical drive A logical drive might be located on one or more physical drives Glossary 389 LUN LUN mapping
324. nitial screen or make configuration changes If the controller is left unattended Password Validation Timeout can be set to Always Check Setting validation timeout to Always Check protects the controller configuration from any unauthorized change Note The controller password and controller name share a 16 character space The maximum characters for the controller password is 15 When the controller name occupies 15 characters there is only one character left for the controller password and vice versa The procedure for specifying a password differs if no password is currently in effect Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 M 1 To Create a New Password From the Main Menu choose system Functions change Password so you can type in a new password Type the password you want to use and then press Return Note The controller password is case sensitive Type the password again and then press Return to confirm your choice The new password takes effect immediately To Change an Existing Password From the Main Menu choose system Functions change Password so you can type in a different password You are prompted to type the old password The password cannot be changed until the old password is first typed correctly Note The controller password is case sensitive Type the current password and then press Return If the existing password is n
325. nits if needed Create at least two logical drives logical drive 0 and logical drive 1 and configure spare drives Leave half of the logical drives assigned to the primary controller default assignment Assign the other half of the logical drives to the secondary controller to load balance the I O Create up to 32 partitions LUNs in each logical drive yy Change the Fibre Connection Option to Point to point only view and edit Configuration parameters Host side SCSI Parameters Fibre Connections Option Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 37 6 For ease of use in configuring LUNs change the host IDs on the four channels to the following assignments Channel 0 PID 40 assigned to the primary controller Channel 1 PID 41 assigned to the primary controller Channel 4 SID 50 assigned to the secondary controller Channel 5 SID 51 assigned to the secondary controller Note Do not use the Loop preferred otherwise point to point menu option This command is reserved for special use and should be used only if directed by technical support 7 Map logical drive 0 to channels 0 and 1 of the primary controller Map LUN numbers 0 through 31 to the single ID on each host channel 8 Map logical drive 1 to channels 4 and 5 of the secondary controller Map LUN numbers 0 through 31 to the single ID on each host channel Since each set of LUNs is assigned to two channels for redundan
326. ns between each server and the array 2 Install and enable multipathing software on the server 3 Map the logical drive each server is using to the controller channels that the server is connected to DAS configurations are typically implemented using a fabric loop FL_port mode A loop configuration example is described under A Sample DAS Loop Configuration on page 39 Fabric loop FL_port connections between a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array and multiple servers allow up to 1024 LUNs to be presented to servers For guidelines on how to create 1024 LUNs see Planning for 1024 LUNs on an FC or SATA Array Optional Loop Mode Only on page 159 Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 39 Server 1 Server 2 AUN 5 S SPEED LINK 268 ON NO LINK or 1GB OFf FC CONNECTOR LED C4 olL_ wave Jo e LS __AcTivity S S ine 4 10 100 LINK bi ON Fa eon Oo Ore ae FC CONNECTOR T FC2 TOP SLOT FC3 BOTTOM SLOT FC4 RENS GEx3 GEx3 ore nese L LINK S SPEED LINK ON 2GB ON NO LINK OFF1GB_ OFF FC CONNECTOR LEDS TOP SLOT LOOP A BOTTOM SLOT LOOP B L LINK S SPEED LINK ON 2GB ON NO LINK OFF1GB_ OFF FC CONNECTOR LEDS L LINK S SPEED LINK ON f2GB ON NO LINK OFF1GB_ OFF FC CONNECTOR LEDS TOP SLOT LOOP A p SLOT LOOP B L LINK S SPEED LINK ON J2GB ON NO LINK OFF f1GB
327. ntaining Your Array 297 Rebuilding Logical Drives This section describes automatic and manual procedures for rebuilding logical drives The time required to rebuild a logical drive is determined by the size of the logical drive the I O that is being processed by the controller and the array s Rebuild Priority setting With no I O being processed the time required to build a 2 Tbyte RAID 5 logical drive can be approximately m 4 5 hours for a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array m 6 5 hours for a Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array Note As disks fail and are replaced the rebuild process regenerates the data and parity information that was on the failed disk However the NVRAM configuration file that was present on the disk is not re created After the rebuild process is complete restore your configuration as described in Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk on page 280 Automatic Logical Drive Rebuild Rebuild with Spare When a member drive in a logical drive fails the controller first determines whether there is a local spare drive assigned to the logical drive If there is a local spare drive the controller automatically starts to rebuild the data from the failed drive onto the spare If there is no local spare drive available the controller searches for a global spare drive If there is a global spare the controller automatically uses the global spare to rebuild the logical drive Failed Dr
328. nts reporting activity on each network device to the workstation console used to oversee the 212 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 network The agents return information contained in a Management Information Base MIB which is a data structure that defines what is obtainable from the device and what can be controlled turned on and off etc The Sun StorEdge MIB for your array is included with the latest controller firmware patch Refer to the patch README for the file name and location Refer to the documentation for your SNMP manager for details on installing MIB files Instructions for loading MIBs in HP OpenView Network Node Manager are provided in Appendix F An SNMP Object Identifier OID is a number assigned to devices in a network for identification purposes OID numbering is hierarchical Using the IETF notation of digits and dots resembling very long IP addresses various registries such as ANSI assign high level numbers to vendors and organizations They in turn append digits to the number to identify individual devices or software processes For details on sending SNMP traps via the RAID firmware see Configuring the Notification Processing Center NPC on page 222 For information on using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to send SNMP traps refer to the Email and SNMP appendix in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide Note Sun StorEdge 3000 fa
329. nu option differs from other event triggers It forces a controller shutdown rather than merely a change in cache policy if a temperature is detected that exceeds system threshold limits You can adjust this setting to shut down the controller as soon as the temperature limit is exceeded or after a delay ranging from two minutes to an hour or disable the controller shutdown entirely Choose Enable for an immediate shutdown after the upper threshold limit is exceeded or choose Disable if you want no trigger for this event Otherwise select the time intervals you want to elapse after the threshold is exceeded before the controller shutdown takes place v To Configure Over Temperature Controller Shutdown 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Set Peripheral Device Entry Event Trigger Operations Temperature exceeds threshold to display a menu of options and shutdown delay intervals 2 Select the option or interval you want and then choose Yes to confirm your choice Note For some NEBS compliance testing including thermal margining it might be necessary to run for a period of hours at a temperature that exceeds the maximum temperature threshold you can set To perform this testing Disable the Temperature exceeds threshold menu option until the tests are complete Then choose this menu option again and choose Enable or a specified shutdown delay interval to protect your system Adjust
330. o point configuration m You can add up to eight IDs per channel four IDs on each controller which forces the fabric switch port type to become FC AL Loop To ensure F port behavior full fabric full duplex when attaching to a switch only one ID can be present on each channel and the array port must be set to point to point mode a With four host channels and four host IDs you should load balance the host ID setup so that half the IDs are on the primary controller and half the IDs are on the secondary controller When setting up LUNs map each LUN to either two PIDs or two SIDs For example to provide redundancy map half of the LUNs across Channel 0 PID 40 and Channel 4 PID 42 and then map the other half of your LUNs across Channel 1 SID 41 and Channel 5 SID 43 The hosts are in turn dual pathed to the same two switched fabrics m Point to point mode enables a maximum of 128 LUNs per array In a redundant configuration 32 LUNs are dual mapped across two channels on the primary controller and another 32 LUNs are dual mapped across the secondary controller for a total of 64 distinct LUNs To use more than 64 LUNs you must change to Loop only mode add host IDs to one or more channels and add 32 LUNs for each host ID Note When in loop mode and connected to a fabric switch each host ID is displayed as a loop device on the switch so that if all 16 IDs are active on a given channel the array looks like a loop with 16 nod
331. o years if the unit is continuously operated at 77 degrees F 25 degrees C If the unit is continuously operated at 95 degrees F 35 degrees C or higher the battery should be changed every year The shelf life of your battery is three years Note The RAID controller has a temperature sensor which shuts off battery charging when the temperature reaches 129 degrees F 54 degrees C When this happens the battery status might be reported as BAD but no alarm is written to the event log because no actual battery failure has occurred This behavior is normal As soon as the temperature returns to the normal range battery charging resumes and the battery status is reported correctly It is not necessary to replace or otherwise interfere with the battery in this situation 284 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array to see your array s acceptable operating and nonoperating temperature ranges For information about the date of manufacture and how to replace the battery module refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide Battery Support for Cache Operations Unfinished writes are cached in memory in write back mode If power to the array is discontinued data stored in the cache memory is not lost Battery modules can support cache memory for several days Write cache is not automatically disabled when
332. odule For example if the upper I O controller module is removed host IDs 40 and 44 are automatically moved to the lower module and are managed by the second controller m An I O controller module fails or one cable is removed from an I O controller module and all I O traffic to the disconnected channel is rerouted through the second port host LUN assigned to the logical drive For example if you remove the cable to channel 4 the data path for logical drive 1 switches to the port on channel 5 34 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Switch 0 Map LGO to PIDs 40 and 44 Map LG1 to SIDs 42 and 46 Host port on channel number N PID 40 PID44 Host IDs on primary controller SID 42 SID46 Host IDs on secondary controller N A Not applicable no ID on that controller Port bypass circuit FIGURE 3 1 A Point to Point Configuration with a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Two Switches Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 35 N A O Q sin42 1 Map LGO to PIDs 40 and 44 Map LG1 to SIDs 42 and 46 Host port on channel number N PID 40 PID44 Host IDs on primary controller SID 42 SID46 Host IDs on secondary controller N A Not applicable no ID on that controller Port bypass circuit FIGURE 3 2 A Point to Point Configuration With a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array and Two Switches Note These illustrations show the default
333. of intervals is displayed 2 Select an interval and then choose Yes to confirm When you choose an interval to enable the periodic drive check time the controller polls all connected drives in the controller s drive channels at the assigned interval Drive removal is detected even if no host attempts to access data on the drive Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Use this menu option to enable SMART functionality See Using SMART Functionality on page 185 for information about how to configure your Drive Predictable Failure Mode setting Note SMART functionality is not supported on the SATA drives used in Sun StorEdge 3511 RAID controllers or expansion units Auto Assign Global Spare Drive FC and SATA Only This feature is disabled by default When you choose Auto Assign Global Spare Drive the system automatically assigns global spare status to the unassigned drive with the lowest drive ID This enables the array to use the global spare to rebuild a logical drive automatically without user intervention when a failing drive needs to be replaced Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 241 v To Automatically Assign Replacements to Faulty Drives From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side Parameters Auto Assign Global Spare Drive and then choose Yes to change the setting Media Scan at Power Up This menu option specifies whether Media Scan should automatically b
334. oller Optional Configure the logical drive s write policy Write back cache is the preconfigured global logical drive write policy which is specified on the Caching Parameters submenu See Enabling and Disabling Write Back Cache on page 227 for the procedure on setting the global caching parameter This option enables you to assign a write policy per logical drive that is either the same as or different than the global setting Write policy is discussed in more detail in Cache Write Policy Guidelines on page 30 a Choose Write Policy Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 63 64 10 Note The Default write policy displayed is the global write policy assigned to all logical drives The following write policy options are displayed Default default Assigns the global write policy If the global setting for write policy is changed automatically changes the write policy for this logical drive As described in Cache Write Policy Guidelines on page 30 the array can be configured to dynamically switch write policy from write back cache to write through cache if specified events occur Write policy is only automatically switched for logical drives with write policy configured to Default See Event Trigger Operations on page 263 for more information a Write Back Assigns write back cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy a Write Through Assigns w
335. oller Status To view the status of each controller from the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices gt View Peripheral Device Status A table displays the status of the available peripheral devices 249 view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit Drives view and edit channel view and edit Configuration parameters i eripheral devices ITEM STATUS LOCATION ees edundant Controller Failhback Complete Primar Enclosure Device FIGURE 12 1 View Peripheral Device Status Viewing SES Status FC and SATA Only A Fibre Channel array s SCSI Enclosure Services SES processor is located on the I O module The SES processor monitors chassis based environmental conditions such as temperature sensor readings cooling fans status the beeper speaker condition power supplies and slot status The SES processor is supported by Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and the Sun StorEdge CLI These chassis sensors are separate from the controller sensors described in Viewing Controller Voltage and Temperature Status on page 266 For Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA JBOD arrays both Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and the Sun StorEdge CLI access the SES processor using device files in dev es such as dev es ses0 as shown in the following example sccli Available devices 1 dev rdsk c4t0d0s2 SUN StorEdge 3310
336. on below the newly created partition Offset MB gt Size lt MB gt Pt m al al EEEE 1 2AAAA 2AAAA 8 Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to partition the remaining capacity of your logical drive For information on deleting a partition see Deleting a Logical Drive Partition on page 128 Mapping a Partition to a Host LUN A partition is a division of the logical drive that appears as a physical drive to any host that has access to that partition You can create a maximum of 32 partitions per logical drive So that host bus adapters HBAs recognize the partitions when the host bus is reinitialized each partition must be mapped to a host LUN logical unit number Two methods can be used to map a partition to a host m LUN mapping m LUN filtering Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 109 Note When you modify a partition you must first unmap the LUN Note If you plan to map 128 or more LUNs the process is easier if you use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for more information LUN Mapping Map a partition to a LUN on a host channel to create a connection between that host channel and the partition Note that with LUN mapping all hosts on the mapped host channel have full access to all partitions mapped to LUNs on that channel To provide redundant connections between a host and a partition map the partition to a LUN o
337. on to Default you can choose among disk stripe sizes of 4 Kbyte 8 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 32 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte and 256 Kbyte If you specified sequential optimization in addition to Default you can choose among disk stripe sizes of 16 Kbyte 32 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte and 256 Kbyte Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 65 b Choose Default to assign the stripe size per Optimization mode or choose a different stripe size from the menu Default stripe size per optimization mode is shown in Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 The selected stripe size is displayed in the list of logical drive options 12 Once all logical drive options have been assigned press Escape to display the settings you have chosen Raid Level z RAID 5 Online SCSI Drives z 3 Maximum Drive Capacity 200060 ME Disk Reserved Space z 256 MB Spare SCSI Drives Logical Drive Assignment Secondary Controller Write Policy gt Default Weite Back gt Initialize Mode z On Line Stripe Size z 128K Bytes Create Logical Drive Yes No 13 Verify that all the information is correct and then choose Yes to create the logical drive Note If the logical drive has not been configured correctly select No to return to the logical drive status table so you can configure the drive correctly Messages indicate that the logical drive initialization has begun and then that it has complete
338. onal A Cancel 3 To display the event in the Alarm browser select an appropriate category Since only one trap type is supported all events will go into this category In this example a category of Status Alarms is used 4 Enter a message for the event in the Event Log Message text box In this example 1 represents the variable string of the SNMP trap See the HP OpenView documentation for details on other variables available as part of the event message 380 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 5 To view alarms from the main menu bar choose Fault Alarms The following dialog is displayed je Al Alarms Browser cavcsis File Action View Ack Corr Severity Normal LG 0 ALERT CHL 2 I0 0 Media Scan Aborted Primary Normal LG 0 ALERT CHL 2 ID 1 Media Scan Aborted Primary Normal LG 0 ALERT CHL 2 ID 2 Media Scan Aborted Primary 3 of 3 Alarms Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Nernimy 0 Mor 3 Filters Sourc Viewing and Setting System Group Objects SNMP must be enabled on the array to view and set system group objects From the RAID firmware Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Communication Parameters Network Protocol Support SNMP and verify that SNMP is enabled 1 From HP OpenView browse the system group objects for a node by selecting the node on the segment map 2 Choose Tools SNMP MIB Brows
339. onnection 232 Peripheral Device Type Parameters Reserved 232 Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration 232 v To Configure Sector Ranges Head Ranges and Cylinder Ranges 233 Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte on Solaris Systems 233 Configuring In Band EI Management 234 v To Configure In Band EI Management 234 Fibre Connection Options FC and SATA Only 234 v To Confirm or Change the Fibre Connection for the Array 235 Drive Side Parameters Menu 236 Configuring Drive Motor Spin Up Reserved 236 v To Spin Up SCSI Hard Drives Reserved 236 Configuring Disk Access Delay Time 237 v To Set Disk Access Delay Time 237 Configuring Drive I O Timeout 237 v To Choose Drive I O Timeout 237 Configuring the Maximum Tag Count Tag Command Queuing 238 v To Change the Maximum Tag Count Setting 238 Configuring Periodic Drive Check Time 239 v To Set the Periodic Drive Check Time 239 Configuring Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time 239 v To Set the Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time 240 Configuring Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time 240 v To Set the Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time 241 Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART 241 xiv Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Auto Assign Global Spare Drive FC and SATA Only 241 v To Automatically Assign Replacements to Faulty Drives 242 Media Scan at Power Up 242 Disk Array Parameters Menu 242 Setti
340. ontroller menu option It is important that you distinguish between the results of these two menu options Use Reset Controller menu option to reset the controller without saving the contents of the controller s cache to disk This can be desirable if you believe that a software crash or hardware fault might have corrupted the cached data Caution If you want to write the cache contents to disk do not use Reset Controller Instead use the Shutdown Controller menu option and choose Yes when the Reset Controller prompt is displayed See Shutting Down the Controller on page 275 for more information v To Reset the Controller Without Saving Cache Contents 1 From the Main Menu choose system Functions Reset controller and then choose Yes to reset the controller The controller is reset Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Caution Resetting the controller does not preserve the contents of the cache or write the contents of cache to disk When the controller is reset all cache contents are lost See Shutting Down the Controller on page 275 for information about writing the contents of cache to disk before resetting the controller Shutting Down the Controller Always shut down the controller before removing power to the array After you have chosen this menu option you can optionally reset the controller so that it is restarted after the shutdown The Shutdow
341. ormation Partition O 2 GB Logical drive 0 RAID 5 8 GB Partition 1 1 GB Partition 2 5 GB Partition O 2 5 GB Partition 1 1 5 GB Logical drive 1 ee RAID 3 6 GB Partition 2 2 GB FIGURE 4 1 Partitions in Logical Drives To Partition a Logical Drive Optional Caution Make sure any data that you want to save on this partition has been backed up before you partition the logical drive 70 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives Select the logical drive you want to partition Choose Partition logical drive If the logical drive has not already been partitioned the following warning is displayed This operation may result in the LOSS OF ALL DATA on the Logical Disk Partition Logical Drive Choose Yes to confirm A list of the partitions on this logical drive is displayed If the logical drive has not yet been partitioned all the logical drive capacity is listed as partition 0 Select a partition A Partition Size dialog is displayed Type the desired size of the selected partition The following warning is displayed This operation will result in the LOSS OF ALL DATA on the partition Partition Logical Drive Choose Yes to confirm The remaining capacity of the logical drive is automatically allocated to the next partition In the following example a partitio
342. ort for that channel is configured at 2 GHz This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 5 Choose Yes to reset the controller 204 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Issuing a Loop Initialization Primitive FC and SATA Only Whenever a device is added to or removed from a Fibre Channel loop issue a Loop Initialization Primitive LIP so that devices on the loop repeat the discovery process To Issue a LIP From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS to display the Channel Status Table Select a channel on which you want to issue the LIP Choose issUe lip and then choose Yes to issue a LIP Chapter 10 Host and Drive Channels 205 206 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 1 1 Configuration Parameters This chapter describes viewing and editing configuration parameters Topics covered include a Communication Parameters on page 208 RS 232 Port Configuration Reserved on page 208 Setting an IP Address on page 209 Network Protocol Support on page 211 Setting Telnet Inactivity Timeout Time on page 212 m SNMP on page 212 SNMP Traps on page 213 SNMP Trap Obje
343. ost channel IDs identify the controller to the host Some applications require that specific IDs be assigned to host channels before they can recognize the array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array default host channel IDs are shown in TABLE 3 2 and TABLE 3 3 under Default Channel Configurations on page 20 The number of host IDs depends on the configuration mode a In point to point mode only one ID should be assigned to each channel m In loop mode up to 16 IDs can be assigned to each Fibre Channel not to exceed a maximum of 32 IDs per array 90 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Each host ID can have up to 32 partitions which are then mapped to LUNs to create a total not to exceed 128 in point to point mode or 1024 in loop mode To map 1024 partitions in loop mode you must add additional host IDs so that 32 IDs are mapped to the array s channels Several configurations are possible such as eight IDs mapped to each of the four host channels or sixteen IDs mapped to two channels and none to the other two For more information see Planning for 1024 LUNs on an FC or SATA Array Optional Loop Mode Only on page 159 Each host channel has a unique primary and secondary ID available Typically host IDs are distributed between the primary and secondary controllers to load balance the I O in the most effective manner for the network You can m Edit each host ID to chang
344. osure SID Secondary controller identifier number SMART Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology The industry standard reliability prediction indicator for both the IDE ATA and SCSI hard disk drives Hard disk drives with SMART offer early warning of some hard disk failures so critical data can be protected SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for sending email messages between servers and from mail clients to mail servers The messages can then be retrieved with an email client using either POP or IMAP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A set of protocols for managing complex networks SNMP works by sending messages called protocol data units PDUs to different parts of a network SNMP compliant devices called agents store data about themselves in Management Information Bases MIBs and return this data to the SNMP requesters spanning Making use of the firmware s striping capability to stripe data across two otherwise independent RAID logical drives The two spanned logical drives are presented to the operating system as one logical drive standby drive A drive that is marked as a spare to support automatic data rebuilding after a physical drive associated with a logical drive fails For a standby drive to take the place of another drive it must be at least equal in size to the failed drive and all of the logical drives dependent on the failed disk must be redundant RAID 1 1 0 3 and 5 state T
345. ot typed correctly an error message is displayed and you cannot change the password If the password is correct you are prompted for a new password Type a new password and then press Return A dialog prompts you to re enter the password Type the password again and then press Return to confirm your choice The new password takes effect immediately To Disable an Existing Password From the Main Menu choose system Functions change Password You are prompted to type the old password The password cannot be changed until the old password is first typed correctly Chapter 13 System Functions and Event Logs 273 Note The controller password is case sensitive 2 Type the old password in the text area and press Return If the existing password is not typed correctly an error message is displayed and you cannot change the password If the password is correct you are prompted for a new password 3 Press Return without typing anything A dialog prompts you to re enter the password 4 Press Return again to confirm your choice The controller password is deleted and password protection is disabled 274 Resetting the Controller It is sometimes necessary after changing controller parameters to reset the controller before the parameter changes can take effect However there are two ways of resetting a controller from the firmware application the Reset Controller menu option and the Shutdown C
346. ow Event or BBU Failed Event Trigger From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Set Peripheral Device Entry Event Trigger Operations BBU Low or Failed and choose Yes to confirm the change Configuring the Power Supply Failed Event Trigger If the array has been configured with the write back cache mode enabled enable this menu option if you want the array to automatically revert to write through cache mode write back disabled if one of the array s power supplies fails To Enable or Disable the Power Supply Failed Event Trigger From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Set Peripheral Device Entry Event Trigger Operations Power Supply Failed and choose Yes to confirm the change Configuring the Fan Failure Event Trigger If the array has been configured with the write back cache mode enabled enable this menu option if you want the array to automatically revert to write through cache mode write back disabled if one of the array s cooling fans fails Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 v To Enable or Disable the Fan Failure Event Trigger From the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Set Peripheral Device Entry Event Trigger Operations Fan Failure and choose Yes to confirm the change Configuring the Temperature Exceeds Threshold Event Trigger The Temperature exceeds threshold me
347. ow to modify the RAID level or add more logical drives In these procedures you configure a logical drive to contain one or more physical drives based on the desired RAID level and divide the logical drive into additional partitions Note Depending on the size and RAID level it can take up to several hours to build a logical drive Online initialization however enables you to begin configuring and using the logical drive before initialization is complete Creating a 2 Tbyte RAID 5 logical drive can take up to m 2 25 hours for Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI arrays and Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays m 10 3 hours for Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte Solaris Operating System Only The Solaris operating system requires drive geometry for various operations including newfs For the appropriate drive geometry to be presented to the Solaris operating system for logical drives larger than 253 Gbyte change the default settings to cover all logical drives over 253 Gbyte These settings work for smaller configurations as well The controller automatically adjusts the sector count so the operating system can read the correct drive capacity For Solaris operating system configurations use the values in the following table TABLE 5 2 Cylinder and Head Mapping for the Solaris Operating System Logical Drive Capacity Cylinder Head Sector lt 253 GB lt 65536 default Variable Variable default 253 GB 1
348. p a written record of your configuration before saving or restoring configuration files Caution Before restoring a configuration file be certain that the configuration file you apply matches the array to which you apply it If host IDs logical drive controller assignments or other controller dependent configuration information described in Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 has changed since the configuration file was saved you might lose access to mismatched channels or drives You have to change cabling or host or drive channel IDs to correct this mismatch and restore access On host Solaris workstations the address of the RAID controller channel must also match what is described in etc vfstab Note Using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program you can save a configuration file that can restore all configurations and rebuild all logical drives However it also erases all data when it rebuilds the logical drives so this operation should be performed only when no data has been stored or after all data has been transferred to another array Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 v To Restore Saved Configuration Settings 1 Choose system Functions Controller maintenance Restore nvram from disks and then choose Yes to restore the NVRAM from disk This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is R
349. pansion by Copy and Replace New drive New drive 73 GB 73 GB Additional capacity is displayed as a new partition The new partition must be mapped to a host LUN for the HBA to recognize it v To Copy and Replace a Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select a target logical drive 3 Choose cOpy and replace drive The physical drives belonging to the selected logical drive are listed 4 Select the member drive the source drive that you want to replace with a larger drive A table of available physical drives is displayed Chapter 6 Logical Drives 141 5 Select a new drive onto which you will copy the content of the source drive The channel number and ID number of both the source drive and the destination drive are displayed in a confirmation message ie oY aro size cm seres afefe mae ee E ee a ee Eee ee a eee eee GOOD 5 B _ 3 a a GC a n ere HONE FRMT_ DRU SEAGATE 1T336753FSUN36G Source Drive FRAT DRY SEAGATE T336753FSUH36G Channel 2 ID 6 FRNT DRU INE Channel 2 I D Size MB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Uendor and Product ID F RMT DRU Sel Copy and Replace Drive Yes No Choose Yes to confirm 6 A notification message is displayed LG 0 Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 2 ID 6 Starting Clone 7 Press Escape to view the progress 55 Completed A notification message informs you when the process is complete L
350. pheral Device Notifications 372 F SNMP Management Using HP OpenView 375 Loading MIBs 376 Configuring Events 379 Viewing and Setting System Group Objects 381 Viewing Enterprise Objects 384 xx Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Glossary 387 Index 395 Contents xxi xxii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 FIGURE 1 1 FIGURE 1 2 FIGURE 1 3 FIGURE 2 1 FIGURE 2 2 FIGURE 2 3 FIGURE 3 1 FIGURE 3 2 FIGURE 3 3 FIGURE 3 4 FIGURE 4 1 FIGURE 4 2 FIGURE 4 3 FIGURE 5 1 FIGURE 5 2 FIGURE 5 3 FIGURE 5 4 FIGURE 6 1 Figures Local Dedicated Spare 6 Global Spare 7 Mixing Local and Global Spares 7 Initial Firmware Screen 12 Firmware Main Menu 14 Progress Indicator and Descriptive Message 17 A Point to Point Configuration with a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Two Switches 35 A Point to Point Configuration With a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array and Two Switches 36 A DAS Configuration With Four Servers a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Two Expansion Units 40 A DAS Configuration With Four Servers a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array and Two Expansion Units 41 Partitions in Logical Drives 70 LUNs Resemble Drawers in a File Cabinet Identified by anID 72 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs 73 Partitions in Logical Drives 108 LUNs Resemble Drawers in a File Cabinet 110
351. place the power supply module and fan Cooling elements in the status table can be identified for replacement as shown in TABLE 12 2 Cooling fan locations are identified in FIGURE 12 2 TABLE 12 2 Relationship Between Cooling Elements Fans and Power Supply Modules Cooling Element Cooling element 0 Cooling element 1 Cooling element 2 Cooling element 3 Fan and Power Supply Module FAN 0 PS 0 FAN 1 PS 0 FAN 2 PS 1 FAN 3 PS 1 FIGURE 12 2 FC and SATA Cooling Fan Locations Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 SES Temperature Sensor Locations FC and SATA Only Monitoring temperature at different points within the array is one of the most important SES functions High temperatures can cause significant damage if they go unnoticed There are a number of different sensors at key points in the enclosure The following table shows the location of each of those sensors The element ID corresponds to the identifier shown when you choose view and edit Peripheral devices View Peripheral Device Status SES Device Temperature Sensors Note Press the down arrow to access an element ID that is not currently displayed in the displayed list of sensors TABLE 12 3 Temperature Sensor Locations FC and SATA Element ID Description Drive Midplane Left Temperature Sensor 1 Drive Midplane Left Temperature Sensor 2 Drive Midplane Center Temperature Sensor 3 0 1 2 3
352. plays of event messages Viewing Event Logs on the Screen on page 281 for more information about event messages Navigation Terminology and Conventions The firmware procedures use terminology and character conventions to indicate a sequence of steps a specific menu option or a series of menu options TABLE 2 3 Navigation Terminology and Character Conventions Terminology or Convention Meaning Choose The term choose preceding a menu option indicates that the menu option should be highlighted using the arrow keys and then selected by pressing the Return or Enter key Alternatively you can choose some menu options by using the following keyboard shortcut Single bold face capital letter in a The bold face capital letter key is a shortcut key menu option list Press the key that corresponds to the capitalized letter to choose that menu option quotation marks Quotation marks indicate a menu option menu option 1 menu option 2 gt This represents a series of nested menus options menu option 3 that are selected with arrow keys Press Return after each selection to access the next menu item and to complete the series Select The term select preceding a device or other selectable entity indicates that the entity should be highlighted using the arrow keys and then selected by pressing the Return or Enter key For instance you select a physical drive to add it toa logical drive 16 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family
353. port is removed that I O path is broken unless multipathing software has established a separate path from the host to the operational controller Supporting hot swap servicing of a failed controller requires the use of multipathing software such as Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software on the connected servers Note Multipathing for Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays is provided by Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software Refer to the release notes for your array for information about which versions of Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software are supported for your host Remember these important considerations m A single logical drive can be mapped to only one controller either the primary controller or the secondary controller m Ina point to point configuration only one host ID per channel is allowed The host ID can be assigned to the primary controller and be a PID or it can be assigned to the secondary controller and be a SID m If you have two switches and set up multipathing to keep all logical drive connections operational for any switch failure or the removal of any I O controller module ensure that each logical drive is mapped to two ports one on Chapter 3 Configuration Defaults and Guidelines 33 each I O controller module and on two channels The cables from the two ports mapped to each logical drive must be cabled to two separate switches See FIGURE 3 1 and FIGURE 3 2 for examples of this co
354. ption It is reserved and should be used only by qualified technicians v To Change the Sync Transfer Clock Speed SCSI Only 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS 2 Select the drive channel or host channel whose sync transfer clock speed you want to change 3 Choose sync transfer Clock to display a menu of sync transfer clock speeds 4 Select a clock speed and choose Yes to confirm your choice This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 5 Choose Yes to reset the controller Chapter 10 Host and Drive Channels 199 Setting the SCSI Transfer Width SCSI Only Typically the default setting for transfer width is not changed for the host or drive channel Do not use this menu option It is reserved and should be used only by qualified technicians v To Change the Transfer Width Options SCSI Only 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS 2 Select the drive channel or host channel whose transfer width you want to change 3 Choose Wide transfer and choose Yes to enable or disable wide transfer This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESE
355. r all DRV RCCOM channels which leaves other channels free for host or drive functions If performance issues are particularly important you can spread the combined DRV RCCOM functions over four channels Alternatively you can configure two channels so that they are used exclusively for RCCOM ensuring maximum I O performance on the other host and drive channels These two configurations are described below Using Four DRV RCCOM Channels If only channels 0 and 1 are used for communication with servers channels 4 and 5 can be configured as DRV RCCOM thus providing four DRV RCCOM channels channels 2 3 4 and 5 An advantage of this configuration is that channels 4 and 5 are still available for connection of expansion units The performance impact of RCCOM is reduced because it is now distributed over four channels instead of two If at a later time you choose to add an expansion unit it will not be necessary to interrupt service by resetting the controller after reconfiguring a channel v To Configure Channels 4 and 5 as Additional DRV RCCOM Channels 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS 2 Select channel 4 3 Choose channel Mode Drive RCCOM and then choose Yes to confirm the change 4 Choose No to decline the controller reset since you have another channel to reconfigure 5 Press Enter to return to the menu 6 Choose Secondary controller scsi id 7 Specify a secondar
356. r to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array to see more information about point to point configurations Note Some versions of operating system software or utilities might not display all mapped LUNs if there is no partition or logical drive mapped to LUN 0 Map a partition or logical drive to LUN 0 if you are in doubt or refer to your operating system documentation 156 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 FIGURE 8 1 Filing Cabinet Represents the SCSI or FC ID Each ID LUN looks like a storage device to the host computer Channel 3 Channel 1 Logical drive 0 Logical drive Partition 2 Partition O Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 Partition 1 g Partition 1 Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 Partition O Partition 2 FIGURE 8 2 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs Chapter 8 Host LUNs 157 Planning for 128 LUNs ona SCSI Array Optional You can create up to 128 LUNs which is the maximum number of storage partitions that can be mapped on a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array There are several ways you can meet this requirement For example you can set up one of the following configurations m Create four host IDs and four logical drives Partition each logical drive into 32 partitions 4 x 32 128 Map the 128 partitions to the four host IDs This is the most commonly used configuration or
357. rEdge 3510 FC arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays m Chapter 6 describes the view and edit Logical drives menu option and related procedures m Chapter 7 describes the view and edit logical Volumes menu option and related procedures m Chapter 8 describes the view and edit Host luns menu option and related procedures m Chapter 9 describes the view and edit scsi Drives menu option and related procedures m Chapter 10 describes the view and edit channelS menu option and related procedures m Chapter 11 describes the view and edit Configuration parameters menu option and related procedures m Chapter 12 describes the view and edit Peripheral devices menu option and related procedures m Chapter 13 describes the system Functions menu option array information and event logs m Chapter 14 describes array maintenance procedures m Appendix A introduces RAID terminology and concepts m Appendix B provides the array firmware specifications m Appendix C summarizes controller parameters for optimization and parameter defaults that should not be changed m Appendix D lists the firmware parameter settings for Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI arrays and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI arrays m Appendix E lists and describes firmware event messages m Appendix F describes SNMP management using applications such as HP OpenView m Glossary
358. re drive USED DRV The drive was previously configured as part of a logical drive from which it has been removed it still contains data from that logical drive FRMT DRV The drive has been formatted with reserved space allocated for controller specific information BAD Failed drive ABSENT Drive slot is not occupied or the drive is defective and cannot be detected MISSING Drive once existed but is now missing SB MISS Spare drive missing Vendor and product model information of the drive When a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array is powered up it can take approximate ly 30 40 seconds before the drive speed is displayed correctly Before that happens the drive speed can display as Async Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Array 289 A physical drive has a USED status when it was once part of a logical drive but no longer is This can happen for instance when a drive in a RAID 5 array is replaced by a spare drive and the logical drive is rebuilt with the new drive If the removed drive is later reinstalled in the array and scanned the drive status is identified as USED because the drive still has data on it from a logical drive When a logical drive is deleted properly this user information is erased and the drive status is shown as FRMT rather than USED A drive with FRMT status has been formatted with either 64 KB or 256 MB of reserved space for storing controller specific information but has no user da
359. re information Note Using the Sun StorEdge CLI set cache parameters command to change optimization mode can result in a pre existing logical drive having a stripe size that because it is inappropriate for that optimization mode could not have been selected at the time the logical drive was created This combination will not yield the best performance possible but there is no risk of data loss or other data related problems You can avoid this inefficiency by choosing stripe sizes and an optimization mode that are appropriate for your applications Since the cache block size works in conjunction with stripe size the optimization mode you choose determines default logical drive stripe sizes that are consistent with the cache block size setting But you can now fine tune performance by specifying each logical drive s stripe size so that it matches your application needs using a firmware menu option that is available at the time you create the logical drive See Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 for more information Note Once the stripe size is selected and data is written to logical drives the only way to change the stripe size of an individual logical drive is to back up all its data to another location delete the logical drive and create a logical drive with the stripe size that you want See Optional Configure the logical drive stripe size on page 65 for information about how to set the
360. reased data transfer rates when data is accessed randomly or in large chunks and reduced data access time during simultaneous I O operations Advanced RAID Levels The following advanced RAID levels require the use of the array s built in volume manager These combination RAID levels provide the protection benefits of RAID 1 3 or 5 with the performance of RAID 1 To use advanced RAID first create two or more RAID 1 3 or 5 arrays and then join them The following table provides a description of the advanced RAID levels TABLE A 3 Advanced RAID Levels RAID Level Description RAID 3 0 30 RAID 3 logical drives that have been joined together using the array s built in volume manager RAID 5 0 50 RAID 5 logical drives that have been joined together using the array s volume manager Appendix A Basic RAID Concepts 315 316 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 APPENDIX B Firmware Specifications This appendix contains the firmware specifications in the following tables Security on page 321 Basic RAID Management on page 317 Advanced Features on page 318 Caching Operation on page 319 RAID Expansion on page 319 Redundant Controller on page 320 Data Safety on page 320 Environment Management on page 321 User Interface on page 322 TABLE B 1 Basic RAID Management Feature RAID Levels Maximum Number of Logical Drives Raid
361. reating logical drives on a SCSI array See Creating Logical Drives on page 95 for the procedure for creating logical drives on FC and SATA arrays See Deleting Logical Drives on page 49 for the procedure for deleting logical drives on SCSI arrays Deleting a Logical Drive See Deleting Logical Drives on page 81 for the procedure for deleting logical drives on FC and SATA arrays See Deleting Logical Drives on page 49 for the procedure for deleting logical drives on a SCSI arrays Caution This operation erases all data on the logical drive Therefore if any data exists on the logical drive copy it to another location or back it up before it is deleted Chapter 6 Logical Drives 127 Partitioning a Logical Drive See Partitions on page 70 for a description of logical drive partitions and a procedure for partitioning a logical drive on a SCSI array See Partitions on page 107 for a description of logical drive partitions and a procedure for an FC or SATA array 128 Deleting a Logical Drive Partition When you delete a partition on a logical drive all of the capacity of the deleted partition is added to the remaining partition with the highest partition number For example if a logical drive contains partitions 0 through 3 and you delete partition 3 all of the capacity of partition 3 is added to partition 2 To Delete a Logical Drive Partition From the Main Menu choose
362. rior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 13 Choose Yes to reset the controller Fibre Connection Protocol See Fibre Connection Protocol Guidelines on page 31 for a detailed description of Loop and Point to Point operation v To Change the Fibre Connection Protocol 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host side Parameters Fibre Connection Option The fibre connection that is currently assigned to the array is displayed 2 Choose Loop only or Point to point only as appropriate Note Do not use the command Loop preferred otherwise point to point This command is reserved for special use and should be used only if you are directed to do so by technical support This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 94 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 3 Choose Yes to reset the controller Creating Logical Drives The RAID array is preconfigured with one RAID 0 logical drive as described in Default Logical Drive Configuration on page 20 Each logical drive consists of a single partition by default This section describes h
363. rite through cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy b Choose a write policy option Change Write Policy Default Write Back Weite Through Note You can change the logical drive logical drive s write policy at any time as explained in Changing Write Policy for a Logical Drive on page 145 Optional Set the logical drive initialization mode by choosing Initialize Mode from the list of logical drive options and then choosing Yes to change the initialization mode The assigned initialization mode is displayed in the list of logical drive options You can choose between these two logical drive initialization options m On Line default This option enables you to configure and use the logical drive before initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive while performing I O operations initializing a logical drive on line requires more time than off line initialization Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 11 a Off Line This menu option enables you to configure and use the drive only after initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive without having to also perform I O operations off line initialization requires less time than on line initialization Because logical drive initialization can take a considerable amount of time depending on the size of your physical disks and logical dr
364. rive Partition on page 113 136 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 8 Solaris operating system only For the Solaris operating system to recognize a LUN you must first manually write the label using the Auto configure option of the format 1M utility For the SCSI array see To Label a LUN on page 76 For the FC array or SATA array see To Label a LUN on page 121 Performing a Parity Check In normal operation many sectors of physical drives might not be accessed for long periods of time For RAID 3 and RAID 5 configurations the primary purpose of the parity checking operation is to ensure that all sectors of the media can be successfully read and to provide alerts if a drive is starting to experience read or write errors A RAID 3 and RAID 5 parity checking operation recalculates the parity of data stripes in each of the logical drive s RAID stripe sets and compares it with the stored parity If a discrepancy is found and if the Generate Check Parity Error Event menu option is enabled an error is reported and the new correct parity is substituted for the stored parity See To Enable or Disable Reporting Inconsistent Parity Errors as System Events on page 139 for more information For RAID 1 configurations if an inconsistency is encountered data is copied from the master disk to the slave disk If a bad block is encountered when parity is regenerated data is copied
365. rives View and edit logical Wolumes u CHL 1 ID A Primary Controll y u CHL 3 ID i Secondary Contro v CHL 3 ID i2 Primary Control view system Information view and edit Event logs Repeat Step 4 through Step 7 to map additional partitions to host LUNs on this channel and logical drive Press Escape If you are LUN mapping a redundant configuration repeat Step 2 through Step 7 to map partitions to host LUNs with other IDs on the logical drive assigned to the primary controller When you map a partition to two channels in a redundant configuration the number in the Partition column of the partition table displays an asterisk to indicate that the partition is mapped to two LUNs Note If you are using host based multipathing software map each partition to two or more host IDs so multiple paths will be available from the partition to the host Repeat Step 2 through Step 10 to map hosts to the secondary controller Chapter 4 First Time Configuration for SCSI Arrays 75 12 To verify unique mapping of each LUN unique LUN number unique DRV number or unique Partition number a From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns b Select the appropriate controller and ID and press Return to review the LUN information A mapped LUN displays a number in the host LUN partition window 13 When all host LUNs have been mapped save the updated configuration to nonvolatile memory See Saving Co
366. rives the disk space available for storage is equal to five disk drives 5 x 36 Mbyte or 180 Mbyte Channel Any path used for the transfer of data and control information between storage devices and a storage controller or I O adapter Also refers to one SCSI bus on a disk array controller Each disk array controller provides at least one channel International Special Committee on Radio Interference Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See mirroring RAID1 Electromagnetic compatibility Event monitoring unit Fibre Channel network built around one or more switches Functions as a routing engine that actively directs data transfer from source to destination and arbitrates every connection Bandwidth per node via a Fabric switch remains constant when more nodes are added and a node on a switch port uses a data path of up to 100 Mbyte sec to send or receive data A mode of operation for failure tolerant arrays in which a component has failed and its function has been assumed by a redundant component The capacity to cope with internal hardware problems without interrupting the array s data availability often by using backup systems brought online when a failure is detected Many arrays provide fault tolerance by using RAID architecture to give protection against loss of data when a single disk drive fails Using RAID 1 mirroring RAID 3 or RAID 5 striping with parity or RAID 1 0 mirroring and striping techniques the array
367. rl C again at any time to enable pop up displays of event messages Chapter 13 System Functions and Event Logs 281 v To View The Array s Event Log 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Event logs to display a log of recent event messages Event Logs LG i Logical Drive NOTICE Starting On Line Initialization Thu Jul i 13 45 11 2684 gt M MH HH HH _ FP Creation of Logical Drive 1 Completed Thu Jul 1 13 45 11 2664 gt M ii 4i 4T THTMT _ PF LG i1 Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Creation Thu Jul 1 13 45 02 2604 gt M ii O J e H H _ _ FP LG 6 Logical Drive NOTICE Starting On Line Initialization Thu Jul 1 13 44 31 26046 gt HH FP Creation of Logical Drive A Completed Thu Jul i 13 44 31 26848 gt M i Ho _ T _ _ FP LG Logical Drive MOTICE Starting Creation Thu Jul 1 13 44 30 26084 gt M i iT FP Controller Initialization Completed Thu Jul 1 13 10 13 2684 gt M i i _ _ _A_ j wx Mmidt Controller Initialization Completed Thu Jul i 13 10 07 264 gt _ _ T_T P 2 Use your arrow keys to move up and down through the list 3 To clear events from the log after you have read them use your arrow keys to move down to the first event you want to clear and press Return and then choose Yes to clear that event log entry and all entries beneath it in the list Note Resetting
368. rmance and greater failure tolerance than a single controller American National Standards Institute Address Resolution Protocol A process in which data is automatically reconstructed after a drive failure and written to a standby spare drive An automatic rebuild also occurs when a new drive is installed manually in place of a failed drive If the rebuild process is interrupted by a reset use the Manual Rebuild command from the firmware application to restart the rebuilding process See striping RAID 3 A technique that breaks data into logical blocks the size of a disk block and then stripes these blocks across several drives One drive is dedicated to parity In the event that a disk fails the original data can be reconstructed using the parity information and the information on the remaining drives Allows data to be stored in a predesignated area of a disk or RAM random access memory Caching is used to speed up the operation of RAID arrays disk drives computers and servers or other peripheral devices 387 capacity CH channel CISPR DHCP disk mirroring EMC EMU Fabric Fabric switch failover fault tolerance fault tolerant logical drive FC AL Fibre Channel Fibre Channel HBAs 388 The total number of physical drives available for data storage in a RAID array logical drive For example if the capacity is N 1 and the total number of disk drives in a logical drives is six 36 Mbyte d
369. rmation specifying which sections you want to enable and the host and email addresses necessary For a sample file enabling the sending of events as SMTP traps see A Simple Sample agent ini File on page 224 For a sample file enabling the sending of events as SMTP traps email and broadcast notifications see A Complete Sample agent ini File on page 224 For a full description of agent ini file parameters see agent ini File Parameters on page 225 Save the file as agent ini FTP to your array from your workstation Login as root and press Return When prompted for a password press Return If you have previously specified a password for the controller you need to type that password when prompted Set the filetype to binary BIN cd to the cfg directory put the file from your workstation into the cfg directory Quit the FTP session Optional For security reasons disable FTP on your array by choosing view and edit Configuration parameters Communication Parameters Network Protocol Support FTP and verifying that it is disabled Reset the controllers by choosing system Functions Reset controller Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 223 A Simple Sample agent ini File A basic sample configuration is shown below where nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of the machine you are referring to xxxx address com is the sender or recipient s email address a
370. rnet port This architecture ensures continuous access for communication should either controller fail Since the connection is established with only one controller at a time even when the array is in redundant mode the CurSyncClk and CurWid settings are displayed only for the connected controller Therefore if a user maps one LUN to the primary controller and another LUN to a secondary controller only the LUN mapped with the currently connected controller is displayed through the serial and Ethernet port Caution Do not change the PID and SID values of drive channels TABLE 14 4 Parameters Displayed in the Channel Status Table Parameters Description Chl Channel s ID Mode Channel mode RCCOM Redundant controller communication channel Displays as RCC in the Channel Status table Host The channel is functioning as a host channel Drive The channel is functioning as a drive channel DRV RCC The channel is functioning as a drive channel with a redundant controller communication channel Fibre Channel only PID Primary controller s ID mapping E Multiple IDs were applied host channel mode only The ID to which host LUNs are mapped in the host channel mode The ID for the primary controller in the drive channel mode NA No ID applied Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Array 291 TABLE 14 4 Parameters Displayed in the Channel Status Table Continued Parameters SID DefSynClk DefWid Term CurSynClk Descript
371. rocedure on a logical drive recalculates the parity of data stripes in each of the logical drive s RAID stripe sets and compares it with the stored parity If a discrepancy is found an error is reported and the new correct parity is substituted for the stored parity For RAID 1 configurations data is compared with mirrored data but since RAID 1 does not store parity no automatic correction is possible A pair of interconnected controller units Expansion units interconnected to the pair of controller units can also be part of the partner group Primary controller identifier number Programmable Logic Array Offers flexible features for more complex designs Programmable logic device A generic term for an integrated circuit that can be programmed in a laboratory to perform complex functions redundant array of independent disks An arrangement of two or more disk drives combined into a single virtual drive to provide more disk storage space better performance and reliability and redundant backup of data Various combinations of these features are described by defined RAID levels Arrays can support RAID 0 1 1 0 3 and 5 Various techniques using combinations of mirroring striping duplexing and parity to implement a RAID array are called RAID levels Each technique uses a distinct algorithm to offer a mix of performance reliability and cost Reverse Address Resolution Protocol Reliability Availability and Serviceability
372. rprises sun prod storEdgeEL storEdges510 snRAIDS510 ext Interface ctlrConfiguration ldTable lvTable Town Tree part Table lunTable Describe hddTable chlTable Start Query luTable lulewTable extLunTable Up Tree HIB Instance SHMP Set Value pa A A HIB Values IdEntry ldID 1 O9E2S47E IdEntry ldID 2 49792206 IdEntry ldID 4 2FS060S4 IdEntry ldSize 1 826221 IdEntry ldSize 2 826221 IdEntry ldSize 3 826221 IdEntry ldBlkSizeldx 1 17 IdEntry ldBlkSizeldx 2 17 IdEntry ldBlkSizeldx 3 17 IdEntry ld0pHodes 1 134 For details on OIDs and descriptions available for enterprise objects see the MIB for your array Appendix F SNMP Management Using HP OpenView 385 386 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Glossary The glossary lists acronyms and defines RAID terms found throughout the documentation It also includes definitions of the operational states for disk drives and logical drives active active controllers ANSI ARP automatic rebuild block striping block striping with dedicated parity caching A pair of components such as storage controllers in a failure tolerant RAID array that share a task or set of tasks when both are functioning normally When one component of the pair fails the other takes the entire load Dual active controllers are connected to the same set of devices and provide a combination of higher I O perfo
373. rray Chapter9 Physical Drives 173 v To Assign a Global Spare 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select the drive you want to designate as a spare 3 Choose add Global spare drive and then choose Yes to assign the global spare Deleting a Spare Drive This section describes how to delete a local spare or global spare drive v To Delete a Spare Drive 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives 2 Select the local spare drive or global spare drive you want to delete 3 Choose Delete global local spare drive and then choose Yes to delete the spare drive The status of the spare drive you deleted or any drive you replaced from a logical unit is now indicated as FRMT DRV This drive can now be assigned to another logical device Scanning Drives SCSI Only When a SCSI array is powered on the controller scans all physical drives that are connected through drive channels Unlike Fibre Channel and SATA arrays if a SCSI array has completed initialization and then a physical drive is connected the controller does not recognize the new drive until the next controller reset This difference in behavior is due to differences between Fibre Channel and SCSI architectures and protocols Use the Scan scsi drive menu option to force the controller to scan a drive that has been added to a SCSI array 174 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide e May 2
374. rs Guide May 2006 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Rebuild Failed The rebuilding operation on logical drive LG_ has failed It can be the result of the following conditions a The rebuild has been canceled by a user a The drive used for rebuild failed during the rebuild process a Bad blocks have been encountered on yet another member drive during the rebuild process LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Parity Regeneration Failed During the parity regeneration process one member drive failed LG ALERT CHL ID Media Scan Failed Media scan failed on the member of logical drive LG_ CHL_ ID_ LG ALERT CHL ID Media Scan Aborted Media scan canceled by user or aborted on the member of logical drive LG_ CHL_ ID_ for array integrity concerns LG _ Logical Drive ALERT CHL _ ID _ Clone Failed Cloning process failed when proceeding with the member of logical drive LG_ CHL_ ID_ LG Logical Drive ALERT Logical Drive Bad Block Table FULL Bad block table full with entries found in logical drive LG_ Appendix E Event Messages 359 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Logical Drive Bad Block Table BAD Logical drive LG_ bad block table has failed LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Logical Drive On Line Init Table Bad The table storing information about online initialization progress of logical drive LG_ has failed LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Logical Drive Block Marked BAD One or more bad blocks found during media scan parity regen
375. s A multilevel RAID array includes logical drives of different RAID levels A multilevel RAID array with logical volume support offers the following available configurations m RAID 1 0 This is a standard feature of Sun StorEdge 3000 family RAID controllers It has the benefits of RAID 1 high availability and RAID 0 enhanced I O performance through striping Simply choose four or more drives for a RAID 1 logical drive and the RAID controller implements RAID 1 0 automatically m RAID 3 0 A logical volume itself is a multilevel RAID implementation A logical volume is composed of one or several logical drives with data striping RAID 0 A logical volume with several RAID 3 member logical drives can be considered as a RAID 3 0 or RAID 53 as defined in The RAID Book from the RAID Advisory Board m RAID 5 0 A logical volume with several RAID 5 member logical drives m RAID 5 1 Requires multiple RAID controllers In a RAID 5 1 array each layer 1 RAID controller handles one RAID 5 logical drive and a layer 2 RAID controller performs RAID 1 mirroring function to the virtual disks controlled by all of the layer 1 RAID controllers m RAID 5 5 Requires multiple RAID controllers In a RAID 5 5 array each layer 1 RAID controller handles one to several RAID 5 logical drives and a layer 2 RAID controller performs RAID 5 to the virtual disks provided by all of the layer 1 RAID controllers a RAID 10 Logical volume with RAID
376. s General target event messages include SAF TE device messages controller self diagnostic messages IC messages SES device messages and general peripheral device messages SAF TE Device Events SAF TE device event messages include the following SAF TE Device Alerts SAF TE Device _ ALERT Power Supply Failure Detected Idx __ Power supply device __ device ID__ failure detected by enclosure management SAF TE Device _ ALERT Cooling Fan Not Installed Idx _ Fan _ is missing from device slot SAF TE Device _ ALERT Cooling Fan Failure Detected Idx _ Cooling fan_ has failed SAF TE Device _ ALERT Elevated Temperature Alert Temperature exceeding threshold on SAF TE device_ SAF TE Device _ ALERT UPS Power Failure Detected UPS power failure detected through SAF TE device_ Appendix E Event Messages 365 SAF TE Device _ ALERT UPS Power Failure Detected UPS power failure detected through SAF TE device_ SAF TE Device Notifications SAF TE Device _ NOTICE Fan Back On Line Idx _ Device _ failed fan back on line device ID _ SAF TE Device _ NOTICE Temperature Back to Non Critical Levels Temperature restored to within safety range SAF TE Device _ NOTICE Power Supply Back On Line Idx _ Power supply module_ back on line device ID _ reported through SAF TE device _ SAF TE Device _ NOTICE UPS Power Back On Line UPS power restored reported through SAT TE de
377. s 215 Example snmptrapd f Lo n 2005 10 31 15 12 58 NET SNMP version 5 2 1 2 Started 2005 10 31 15 13 00 192 168 0 1 via UDP 192 168 2021 22766 TRAP SNMP v1 community public SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 42 2 180 3510 Enterprise Specific Trap 1 Uptime 4256 30 00 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 42 2 180 3510 1 2 3 1 1 STRING RAID Event Host 192 168 0 1 Serial Unique 4504 Severity Notification Time 10 31 2005 15 55 25 Controller BBU is Charging Secondary 2005 10 31 15 13 06 NET SNMP version 5 2 1 2 Stopped Note NET SNMP is a popular and freely available software package that includes command line tools for performing SNMP requests such as GET and SET and a daemon that listens for traps For more information see http www net snmp com Note The agent ini file must be configured with trap destinations in order to receive traps See To Create and Save the NPC Configuration File agent ini on page 223 System Group Objects Sun StorEdge products support standard system group objects under the iso org dod internet mgmt mib 2 subtree defined numerically as follows E e r The system group defines information about the system and includes the objects described in TABLE 11 1 216 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 TABLE 11 1 System Group Objects Object Access Description sysDescr Read Only A description of the entity sysObjectID ReadOnly Authoritativ
378. s Sun4 TrDISK_SCSI_Sense Codes html Appendix E Event Messages 351 CHL _ ID _ SCSI Drive ALERT Block Successfully Reassigned Block_number Sense_key Sense_code Rewrites attempted and bad blocks have been successfully reassigned CHL ID _ SCSI Drive ALERT Block Reassignment Failed Block_number Sense_key Sense_code Drive side block reassignment failed Drive will be considered as having media errors or failed CHL _ ID _ SCSI Target ALERT Data Overrun Underrun Detected Drive side SCSI target data overrun or underrun detected CHL ID _ SCSI Target ALERT Negotiation Error Detected Drive side SCSI target sync wide negotiation abnormality detected CHL ID SCSI Target ALERT Invalid Status Sense Data Received Sense_key Sense_code Drive side SCSI invalid status sense data received from target _ ID ALERT Redundant Path for CHL ID _ Failure Detected Disconnection with the pair loop of the loop connection where CHL _ ID _ resides may have occurred Drive Warnings SMART CH ID Predictable Failure Detected The SMART detect function has detected a Recovered Error 0x01 check condition 352 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 SMART CH 1D Predictable Failure Detected TEST Test Mode This message appears when simulating the SMART detect function This message shows that your drives support SMART functions SMART CH _ ID _ Predictable Failure Dete
379. s discussed in more detail in Cache Write Policy Guidelines on page 30 a Choose Write Policy Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 101 102 11 Note The Default write policy displayed is the global write policy assigned to all logical drives The following write policy options are displayed Default default Assigns the global write policy If the global setting for write policy is changed changing this setting automatically changes the write policy for this logical drive As described in Cache Write Policy Guidelines on page 30 the array can be configured to dynamically switch write policy from write back cache to write through cache if specified events occur Write policy is only automatically switched for logical drives with write policy configured to Default See Event Trigger Operations on page 263 for more information a Write Back Assigns write back cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy a Write Through Assigns write through cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy b Choose a write policy option Change Write Policy Default Write Back Weite Through Note You can change the logical drive logical drive s write policy at any time as explained in Changing Write Policy for a Logical Drive on page 145 Optional Set the logical drive initialization mode by choosing Initialize Mode from
380. screen To dismiss an event message after you ve read it press Escape To prevent event messages for displaying so that you can only read them by displaying the event message log press Ctrl C You can press Ctrl C again at any time to enable pop up displays of event messages Viewing Event Logs on the Screen on page 281 for more information about event messages Existing Logical Drive Configuration If you are configuring your array for the first time there is no need to review the existing configuration before you delete it If you are reconfiguring logical drives note the existing logical drive configuration to determine its status and any changes you want to make to the RAID level logical drive size number of physical drives that make up a selected logical drive and spare drives Also view the channel configuration to determine whether you want to make any changes to the channel mode and channel host IDs v To View the Logical Drive Configuration 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives The Logical Drive Status table is displayed For a description of the parameters see Logical Drive Status Table on page 285 1 fiw ofereo starus afefe C es es a a A EGEA CEES GOOD _ A ia E g o podno y ee o pono y ee o pono y ee o pono y ee o pono y ee o pono y ee dno o 2 Note the changes you want to make to the existing configuration 80 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID
381. se a different stripe size from the menu Default stripe size per optimization mode is shown in Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 The selected stripe size is displayed in the list of logical drive options 13 Once all logical drive options have been assigned press Escape to display the settings you have chosen Raid Level z RAID 5 Online SCSI Drives 3 Maximum Drive Capacity ZAHA ME Disk Reserved Space z 256 MB Spare SCSI Drives A Logical Drive Assignment Secondary Controller Write Policy gt Default Weite Back gt Initialize Mode On Line Stripe Size 128K Bytes Create Logical Drive 7 Yes No 14 Verify that all information is correct and then choose Yes to create the logical drive Note If the logical drive has not been configured correctly select No to return to the logical drive status table so that you can configure the drive correctly Messages indicate that the logical drive initialization has begun and then that it has completed 15 Press Escape to close the drive initialization message A progress bar displays the progress of initialization as it occurs You can press Escape to remove the initialization progress bar and continue working with menu options to create additional logical drives The percentage of completion for each initialization in progress is displayed in the upper left corner of the window BAT e i fal mrofsicecmm savus
382. sk The primary advantage of disk mirroring is 100 percent data redundancy Since the disk is mirrored it does not matter if one of the disks fails Both disks contain the same data at all times and either can act as the operational disk Disk mirroring provides 100 percent redundancy but is expensive because each drive in the array is duplicated A RAID technique RAID 5 that offers redundancy with the parity information distributed across all disks in the logical drive Data and its parity are never stored on the same disk In the event that a disk fails the original data can be reconstructed using the parity information and the information on the remaining disks Network Data Management Protocol non volatile random access memory A memory unit equipped with a battery so that the data stays intact even after main power is switched off A Fibre Channel port in a point to point or Fabric connection OpenBoot PROM OBP When you first start Solaris it shows an OK prompt which is the OBP It is a command line interface Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 out of band parity check partner group PID PLA PLD RAID RAID Level RARP RAS read policy rebuild rebuild priority Refers to the connections and devices that are not in the data path A process whereby the integrity of the redundant data on fault tolerant arrays RAID 3 and 5 is checked The parity checking p
383. strative purposes to identify the hardware SNMP managers such as HP Openview Network Node Manager can detect this object and value during the discovery process Example snmpget c public v 2c 192 168 0 2 sysObjectID 0 SNMPv2 MIB sysObjectID 0 OID SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 42 2 180 3310 1 Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 217 where public specifies the community name public 2c specifies the protocol version and 3310 indicates a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array sysUpTime This value specifies the time since the last controller reset or power on Example snmpget c public v 2c 192 168 0 2 sysUpTime 0 SNMPv2 MIB sysUpTime 0 Timeticks 1302400 3 37 04 00 sysContact This object is used to specify a person responsible for the array and their contact information The object can be set via the NET SNMP snmpset command Example snmpset c public v 2c 192 168 0 2 sysContact 0 s John Doe 212 555 1212 SNMPv2 MIB sysContact 0 STRING John Doe 212 555 1212 where s indicates the value is of type STRING snmpget c public v 2c 192 168 0 2 sysContact 0 SNMPv2 MIB sysContact 0 STRING John Doe 212 555 1212 sysName This object specifies a symbolic name for the array This value is equivalent to the controller name that can be set and displayed via the CLI This value can be set with an SNMP SET message 218 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 20
384. t a RAID array using a combination of mirroring striping duplexing and parity technologies These various techniques are referred to as RAID levels Each level offers a mix of performance reliability and cost Each level uses a distinct algorithm to implement fault tolerance There are several RAID level choices RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 3 RAID 5 RAID 1 0 RAID 3 0 30 and RAID 5 0 50 RAID 1 RAID 3 and RAID 5 are most commonly used Note NRAID does not provide data redundancy The NRAID option that appears in some firmware menus is not recommended 308 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Note Drives on separate channels can be included in a logical drive and logical drives of various RAID levels can be used to configure a logical volume The following table provides a brief overview of the RAID levels TABLE A 1 RAID Level Overview Number of Drives RAID Level Description Supported Capacity Redundancy 0 Striping 2 36 physical drives N No 1 Mirroring 2 physical drives N 2 Yes 1 0 Mirroring and 4 36 physical drives N 2 Yes striping even number only 3 Striping with 3 31 physical drives N 1 Yes dedicated parity 5 Striping with 3 31 physical drives N 1 Yes distributed parity 3 0 30 Striping of RAID 3 2 8 logical drives N of Yes logical drives logical drives 5 0 50 Striping of RAID5 2 8 logical drives N of Yes logical drives logical drives Capacity refers to the tota
385. t for SATA Expansion Units Attached to FC Arrays on page 85 for information about mixed drive support If mixed drive support is enabled select the type of logical drive you want to include in your logical volume Chapter 7 Logical Volumes 151 3 Select a logical volume number 0 7 that has not yet been defined and then choose Yes to confirm your choice The following notice is displayed Only logical drives that have single partition and are not mapped to host luns will be listed 4 Press Escape to clear the notice and display a list of logical drives that are available for inclusion in the logical volume you are creating 5 Select one or more available logical drives from the list and for each logical drive selected press Return to tag it to be included in the volume An asterisk is displayed in the LG field of the tagged drive te o or mofem stave f2foffei acne we 2EEDS EBO NA RATD1 34476 34476 __GooD GOOD _ E S IBI 2 2o al l E CS SEDFABG NA RATD1 344760 34476 ___GOOD CooD ABONE a a D Bl l A eS a a a a a Note Logical drives must be assigned to either the primary controller or the secondary controller Note Press Return again to deselect a tagged logical drive 6 When all logical drives to be included in the logical volume have been selected press Escape to display a menu of logical volume options m Write Policy The RAID array write po
386. t logical drive Note Default stripe sizes result in optimal performance for most applications Selecting a stripe size that is inappropriate for your optimization mode and RAID level can decrease performance significantly For example smaller stripe sizes are ideal for I Os that are transaction based and randomly accessed But when a logical drive configured with a 4 Kbyte stripe size receives files of 128 Kbyte each physical drive has to write many more times to store it in 4 Kbyte data fragments Change stripe size only when you are sure it will result in performance improvements for your particular applications See Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 for more information Note Once a logical drive is created its stripe size cannot be changed To change the stripe size you must delete the logical drive and then recreate it using the new stripe size a Choose Stripe Size A menu of stripe size options is displayed If you specified random optimization in addition to Default you can choose among disk stripe sizes of 4 Kbyte 8 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 32 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte and 256 Kbyte a If you specified sequential optimization in addition to Default you can choose among disk stripe sizes of 16 Kbyte 32 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte and 256 Kbyte Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 103 b Choose Default to assign the stripe size per optimization mode or choo
387. ta on it If you remove the reserved space using the view and edit Drives menu the drive status changes to NEW To replace BAD drives or if two drives show BAD and MISSING status refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Note If a drive is installed but not listed the drive might be defective or installed incorrectly Note When power is turned on the controller scans all physical drives that are connected through the drive channels If a physical drive is connected after a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI controller or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI controller completes initialization use the Scan scsi drive menu option view and edit Drives Scan scsi drive to let the controller recognize the newly added physical drive so you can configure it as a member of a logical drive or as a spare drive Channel Status Table To check and configure channels from the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS and press Return The Channel Status table is displayed with the status of all channels on the array 290 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 SID DefSynClk DefWid SS ree eee N AUTO Serial AUTO ES AUTO Serial AUTO i Term Curs yn Clk RNE ETEN cmi ra 3 ei Host 3 3 a pe Chl 1 ey AUTO Seria AUTO La on a a j j m j fs Note Each controller has an RS232 port and an Ethe
388. ta over multiple hard drives improves performance a Using multiple drives properly allows for any one drive to fail without loss of data and without system downtime In the event of a disk failure disk access continues normally and the failure is transparent to the host system Logical Drives Increased availability capacity and performance are achieved by creating logical drives A logical drive is created by combining independent physical drives To the host the logical drive appears the same as a local hard disk drive FIGURE A 1 Logical Drive Including Multiple Physical Drives Logical drives can be configured to provide several distinct RAID levels For descriptions of each RAID level see RAID Levels on page 308 304 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Logical Volumes The concept of a logical volume is very similar to that of a logical drive A logical volume is composed of one or more logical drives The logical drives in a logical volume do not have to be composed of the same RAID level While the ability to create and manage logical volumes remains a feature of Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays for legacy reasons the size and performance of physical and logical drives have made the use of logical volumes obsolete Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Avoid using them and use logical drives
389. ter each five minute interval m 10 min Flush cache to logical drive storage after each 10 minute interval 2 Select a cache flush interval or select Disable to terminate periodic cache flush and then choose Yes to confirm your choice 228 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Host Side Parameters Menu Options The Host Side Parameters menu options are discussed in the following sections Maximum Queued I O Count LUNs Per Host SCSI ID Maximum Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connections Number of Tags Reserved for Each Host LUN Connection Peripheral Device Type Parameters Reserved Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte on Solaris Systems Configuring In Band EI Management Fibre Connection Options FC and SATA Only Maximum Queued I O Count Use Maximum Queued I O Count to configure the maximum number of I O operations per logical drive that can be accepted from servers The predefined range is from 1 to 1024 I O operations per logical drive or you can choose the Auto automatically configured setting The default value is 1024 I O operations per logical drive The appropriate Maximum Queued I O Count setting depends on how many I O operations the attached servers and the controller itself are performing This can vary according to the amount of host memory present the number of drives and their size and buffer limitations To Set
390. tering FC and SATA Only on page 111 for the steps to follow once you choose this menu option Choose Delete Filter Entry to delete the current filter Choose Add Host ID WWN Name List to manually add a WWN Note You can add up to 64 WWNs for an array See LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only on page 111 for the steps to follow once you choose this menu option Chapter8 Host LUNs 165 166 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 9 Physical Drives This chapter provides information about viewing and editing physical drive parameters assigning spare drives recognizing good and bad drives identifying failing drives using SMART detection and media scanning and cloning failing drives Topics covered include Viewing the Status of a Physical Drive on page 168 SCSI Drive IDs SCSI Only on page 169 FC Drive IDs FC and SATA Only on page 171 Viewing Physical Drive Information on page 172 Assigning a Local Spare Drive on page 173 Assigning a Global Spare on page 173 Deleting a Spare Drive on page 174 Scanning Drives SCSI Only on page 174 Adding or Deleting Drive Entries SCSI Only on page 175 Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement on page 176 a Flashing a Selected Physical Drive on page 177 a Flashing All SCSI Drives on page 177 a Flashing All But Selected Drive on page 178 Fa
391. the Optimization Mode From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Caching Parameters Sequential I O is the default optimization mode To accept the optimization mode that is displayed press Escape To change the optimization mode see To Change the Optimization Mode on page 83 To Change the Optimization Mode Once logical drives are created you cannot use the RAID firmware to change the optimization mode without deleting all logical drives You can however use the Sun StorEdge CLI set cache parameters command to change the optimization mode while logical drives exist Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide for more information If you have not deleted all logical drives a notice will inform you of this requirement and you will not be able to change the optimization mode See Deleting Logical Drives on page 81 for the procedure to delete logical drives From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Caching Parameters The Optimization mode that is currently assigned to the array is displayed Choose Optimization for Sequential I O or Optimization for Random I O as appropriate If you have not deleted all logical drives a notice will inform you of this requirement and you will not be able to change the optimization mode Choose Yes to change the Optimization mode from Sequential I O to Random I O or from Ra
392. the controller clears all recorded events To retain event log entries after controller resets you can install and use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 282 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 CHAPTER 14 Maintaining Your Array Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array to see hardware related maintenance and troubleshooting information This chapter covers the following firmware oriented maintenance and troubleshooting topics m Battery Operation on page 283 a Battery Status on page 284 a Battery Support for Cache Operations on page 285 m Checking Status Windows on page 285 a Logical Drive Status Table on page 285 a Physical Drive Status Table on page 288 a Channel Status Table on page 290 m Upgrading Firmware on page 293 Patch Downloads on page 294 Installing Firmware Upgrades on page 294 Controller Firmware Upgrade Features on page 295 Upgrading SES and PLD Firmware on page 296 a Troubleshooting Your Array on page 296 Controller Failover on page 297 RAID LUNs Not Visible to Host on page 297 Rebuilding Logical Drives on page 298 Modifying Drive Side Parameters on page 302 a Additional Troubleshooting Information on page 302 Battery Operation The battery LED on the far right side of the I O controller module is amber if the
393. the list of logical drive options and then choosing Yes to change the initialization mode The assigned initialization mode is displayed in the list of logical drive options You can choose between these two logical drive initialization options m On Line default This option enables you to configure and use the logical drive before initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive while performing I O operations initializing a logical drive online requires more time than off line initialization Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 12 a Off Line This menu option enables you to configure and use the drive only after initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive without having to also perform I O operations offline initialization requires less time than on line initialization Because logical drive initialization can take a considerable amount of time depending on the size of your physical disks and logical drives you can choose online initialization so that you can use the logical drive before initialization is complete Optional Configure the logical drive stripe size Depending on the optimization mode selected the array is configured with the default stripe sizes shown in Cache Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Guidelines on page 28 When you create a logical drive however you can assign a different stripe size to tha
394. the logical drive and leaves some disk space unused b Specify the maximum capacity of each physical drive that makes up the logical drive you are creating e w fo mato sizecnm starus afafa svarosaz na naros 24476 coon i i C Maximum Drive Capacit A Maximum fivailable Drive Capacity NB gt 34476 Maxinum Drive Capacit yCMB gt A logical drive should be composed of physical drives with the same capacity A logical drive can only use the capacity of each drive up to the maximum capacity of the smallest drive 8 Optional Add a local spare drive from the list of unused physical drives by following these steps a Choose Assign Spare Drives to display a list of available physical drives you can use as a local spare Note A global spare cannot be created while creating a logical drive Note An NRAID or RAID 0 logical drive has no data redundancy or parity and does not support spare drive rebuilding The spare chosen here is a local spare and will automatically replace any disk drive that fails in this logical drive The local spare is not available for any other logical drive Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 10 b Select a physical drive from the list to use as a local spare S izeCMB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Yendor and Product ID NI ES 34732 266MB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G a ee FRAT DRU SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 4732 2Q0MB NONE
395. the performance of write operations and the throughput of the controller card Write back cache is enabled by default When you disable write back cache write through cache is automatically enabled The setting you specify becomes the default global cache setting for all logical drives With RAID firmware version 4 11 and later the cache setting can now be individually tailored for each logical drive When you configure a logical drive you can set its individual cache write policy to default write back or write through If you specify default for an individual logical drive the global write policy is assigned to it Then if the global cache write policy that applies to the entire RAID array is changed any logical drive that has been assigned the default setting write policy is also changed If you specify write back or write through for an individual logical drive the cache write policy for that drive remains the same regardless of any changes to the global cache write policy If you have specified a global write back policy you can also configure the RAID array to automatically change from a write back cache policy to a write through cache policy when one or more of the following trigger events occur Controller failure Battery backup unit failure or battery not fully charged Power supply failure 5 E a Fan failure Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Once the condition that led to the trig
396. the port to be assigned an IP address by a DHCP server type DHCP in the text box and press Return To configure the port to be assigned an IP address by a RARP client type RARP in the text box and press Return Note If you prefer to disable the LAN port so that the array cannot be reached by an IP address delete the content of the Address field and press Return to set all three of the selected LAN port s fields to Not Set If you are manually assigning the IP address you will need to know the IP address your system administrator has assigned for this array as well as the netmask and gateway addresses to use a Type an IP address and press Return b Choose NetMask c Type the appropriate netmask and press Return d Choose Gateway e Type the appropriate gateway address and press Return 210 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 6 Press Escape to continue and then choose Yes to change the IP address This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 7 Choose Yes to reset the controller Network Protocol Support For security reasons you can enable only the network protocols you wish to support which limits the ways in which security can be breached v
397. the single controller In a single controller configuration Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 105 if you disable the Redundant Controller function and reconfigure the controller with the Autoconfigure option or as a secondary controller the controller module becomes inoperable and will need to be replaced After a logical drive has been created it can be assigned to the secondary controller Then the host computer associated with the logical drive can be mapped to the secondary controller see Mapping a Partition to a Host LUN on page 109 v To Change a Controller Assignment Optional configurations M Caution Assign logical drives only to primary controllers in single controller 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select the logical drive you want to reassign 3 Choose logical drive Assignments and then choose Yes to confirm the reassignment The reassignment is evident from the view and edit Logical drives screen A P in front of the LG number such as P0 means that the logical drive is assigned to the primary controller An S in front of the LG number means that the logical drive is assigned to the secondary controller Logical Drive Name You can assign a name to each logical drive These logical drive names are used only in RAID firmware administration and monitoring and do not appear anywhere on the host You can also edit th
398. the user applies another forced manual rebuild User applies forced manual rebuild Any local spare Yes drive assigned to the logical drive Rebuild using the local spare drive No Yes Any global spare drive assigned to the logical drive Rebuild using the global spare drive No Has the failed Yes drive been replaced Rebuild using the swapped drive No FIGURE 14 2 Manual Rebuild Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Array 301 Concurrent Rebuild in RAID 1 0 RAID 1 0 allows multiple drive failure and concurrent multiple drive rebuild Drives newly installed must be scanned and configured as local spares These drives are rebuilt at the same time you do not need to repeat the rebuilding process for each drive Modifying Drive Side Parameters There are a number of interrelated drive side configuration parameters you can set using the view and edit Configuration parameters menu option It is possible to encounter undesirable results if you experiment with these parameters Only change parameters when you have good reason to do so See Drive Side Parameters Menu on page 236 for cautions about changing sensitive drive side parameter settings In particular do not set Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time to less than one second and do not set Drive I O Timeout to anything less than 30 seconds for FC or SATA arrays 302 Additional Troubleshooting Infor
399. then choose Yes to confirm Choose Head Ranges to display a list of head ranges Select a value and then choose Yes to confirm Choose Cylinder Ranges to display a list of cylinder ranges Select a value and then choose Yes to confirm Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte on Solaris Systems The Solaris operating system requires drive geometry for various operations including newfs For the appropriate drive geometry to be presented to the Solaris operating system for logical drives larger than 253 Gbyte use the default settings Chapter 11 Configuration Parameters 233 shown below to cover all logical drives over 253 Gbyte These settings work for smaller configurations as well The controller automatically adjusts the sector count and then the operating system can read the correct drive capacity For Solaris operating system configurations use the values in the following table TABLE 11 2 Cylinder and Head Mapping for the Solaris Operating System Logical Drive Capacity Cylinder Head Sector lt 253 Gbyte lt 65536 default variable variable default 253 Gbyte 1 Tbyte lt 65536 default 64 default variable default See To Change Cylinder and Head Settings on page 59 for instructions on how to apply these settings to SCSI arrays See To Change Cylinder and Head Settings on page 96 for instructions on how to apply these settings to FC and SATA arrays Note Refer to your op
400. then displayed as described in Deleting a Spare Drive on page 174 Note The menu options vary according to the drive status Unlike Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays when a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array is powered up the controller scans all physical drives that are connected through the drive channels If you install a physical drive after the SCSI controller completes initialization select the drive and then choose the Scan scsi drive menu option to force the controller to recognize the newly added drive Then you can configure it as a member of a logical drive 168 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Note Newly added drives are automatically scanned on Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays When a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array is powered up it can take approximately 30 40 seconds before the drive speed is displayed correctly Before that happens the drive speed can display as ASYNC A physical drive has a USED status when it was once part of a logical drive but no longer is This can happen for instance when a drive in a RAID 5 array is replaced with a spare drive and the logical drive is rebuilt with the new drive If the removed drive is later replaced in the array and scanned the drive status is identified as USED because the drive still has reserved space data fro
401. tics 310 Advanced RAID Levels 315 Basic RAID Management 317 Advanced Features 318 Caching Operation 319 RAID Expansion 319 Redundant Controller 320 Data Safety 320 xxvi Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 TABLE B 7 TABLE B 8 TABLE B 9 TABLE D 1 TABLE D 2 TABLE D 3 TABLE D 4 TABLE D 5 TABLE D 6 TABLE D 7 TABLE D 8 TABLE D 9 TABLE D 10 TABLE D 11 TABLE D 12 TABLE D 13 TABLE D 14 TABLE D 15 TABLE E 1 Security 321 Environment Management 321 User Interface 322 Logical Drive Parameters View and Edit Logical Drives 332 Logical Volume Parameters View and Edit Logical Volumes 332 Host LUN Parameters View and Edit Host LUNs 332 Drive Parameters View and Edit Drives 332 Channel Parameters View and Edit Channels 333 Communication Parameters gt RS 232 Port Configuration 334 Communication Parameter gt Internet Protocol TCP IP 334 Communication Parameters gt Network Protocol Support 334 Communication Parameter gt Telnet Inactivity Timeout Time 335 Caching Parameters 335 Peripheral Device Type Parameters 336 Host Side and Drive Side Parameters 337 Other Configuration Parameters 339 Peripheral Device Type Parameters View and Edit Peripheral Devices 340 System Function Parameters 342 Categories of Event Messages 346 Tables xxvii xxviii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide e May 2006 gt Preface
402. tion from the controller firmware Note Do not disable PriAgentAl11 m SNMP Enabled means that Simple Network Management Protocol access is enabled SNMP can be used to communicate with external management software m DHCP Enabled means that Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol access is enabled DHCP is used in some networks to dynamically assign IP addresses to systems on the network See Setting an IP Address on page 209 for more information about DHCP m ping Enabled means that ping access is enabled making it possible for hosts on the network to ping the array to see if it is available Setting Telnet Inactivity Timeout Time Set this security measure so that any telnet connection automatically disconnects after the connection has been idle for a configurable period of time The current setting is displayed with the menu option v To Set the Telnet Inactivity Timeout 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Communication Parameters Telnet Inactivity Timeout Time to display the current timeout setting as well as a menu of alternate choices 2 Select a time interval or select Disable and then choose Yes to confirm your choice The new time interval is displayed with the Set Telnet Inactivity Timeout Time menu option SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a widely used network monitoring and control protocol Data is passed from SNMP age
403. to delete a local spare drive 4 Choose Expand logical drive A menu displays the following options m Drive Expand Capacity Choose this option to determine how much of the available capacity to add to the logical drive m Initialize Mode Choose this option to expand the logical drive on line or off line m On Line Choose this option to use the logical drive before initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive while performing I O operations initializing a logical drive on line requires more time than off line initialization Off Line Choose this option to use the drive only after initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive without having to also perform I O operations off line initialization requires less time than on line initialization 5 Choose Drive Expand Capacity The maximum available drive free capacity information is displayed Note The free capacity shown refers to the maximum available free capacity per physical drive based on the smallest physical drive in the logical drive Status 1 2 C a A GOOD Maximum Available Drive Free Capacity 14476MB Maximum Drive Expand CapacitytMB gt gt 14476 6 Press Return to expand the logical drive using all available capacity or enter a value up to the maximum drive expand capacity 132 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 The capacity sho
404. ts as as shown in the following illustrations The following series of screens provide the fan cooling element status for each fan view and edit Logical drives Enclosure Descriptor Help Text Device ooling element rameters Temperature Sensors Voltage sensor H Power Supply E Audible alarm Monvolatile cache STATUS LOCATION SCSI port transceiver PRC Failback Complete SES Device Enclosure Device Channel 2 ID 12 eee ee ee ee 2 Choose one of the elements element 0 1 2 or 3 Accueil PEE Actual Speed view an Device view an Sie ete eh rameters T Element Descriptor v MRE Fo Overall Status a STATUS LOCATION Failback Complete Enclosure Device Channel 2 ID i2 Normal fan speeds are indicated by numbers 1 through 7 indicating speeds in the normal range of 4000 to 6000 RPM The number 0 indicates that the fan has stopped SES Device TABLE 12 1 Fan Status and Fan Speeds Fan Status Fan RPM 0 Fan stopped 0 3999 1 Fan at lowest speed 4000 4285 2 Fan at second lowest speed 4286 4570 3 Fan at speed 3 4571 4856 4 Fan at speed 4 4857 5142 Chapter 12 Peripheral Devices 253 254 TABLE 12 1 Fan Status and Fan Speeds Continued Fan Status 5 Fan at speed 5 Fan RPM 5143 5428 6 Fan at speed at intermediate speed 5429 5713 7 Fan at highest speed 5714 to maximum If a fan fails and the Status field does not display the OK value you must re
405. ts or to attach expansion units Caution If later you reconfigure channels 4 and 5 as host or drive channels you must restore channels 2 and 3 as DRV RCCOM channels or the RAID array will no longer operate To Configure Channels 4 and 5 as RCCOM Only Channels On the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS Select channel 4 Chapter 5 First Time Configuration for FC or SATA Arrays 89 10 11 12 13 14 Choose channel Mode RCCOM and then choose Yes to confirm the change Choose No to decline the controller reset since you have three more channels to reconfigure Select channel 5 Choose channel Mode RCCOM and then choose Yes to confirm the change Choose No to decline the controller reset since you have two more channels to reconfigure Select channel 2 Choose channel Mode Drive Choose Yes to confirm and then choose Yes to confirm the change Choose No to decline the controller reset since you have another channel to reconfigure Select channel 3 Choose channel Mode Drive and then choose Yes to confirm the change This change does not take effect until the controller is reset NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now Choose Yes to reset the controller Host Channel IDs H
406. ult Protection Measures on page 179 Cloning a Failing Drive on page 179 Terminating a Perpetual Clone on page 183 Viewing the Status of a Cloning Operation on page 184 Using SMART Functionality on page 185 Using Media Scan on Individual Drives on page 188 SCSI Drive Utilities Reserved on page 189 a SCSI Drive Low Level Format Utilities on page 190 a Read Write Test on page 191 Changing Disk Reserved Space on page 192 167 Viewing the Status of a Physical Drive The Physical Drive Status table shows you the status of all physical drives in your array v To View the Physical Drive Status Table 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Drives to view your array s physical drives and to edit physical drive parameters Note If a drive is installed but not listed the drive might be defective or installed incorrectly Size Mb Speed LG_ DRV Status Yendor and Product ID L 6 34732 200ME H ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G6 Le ee a e A A 7 34732 200ME a H LIHE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G 34732 20 ME 1 ON LINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 34732 200MB ON LINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G D 34732 20 ME GLOBAL STAND BY SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G Ps SES SUN StorEdge 3510F A 2 Select a drive from the physical drive table if you want to modify its configuration information or view additional information A menu of available options is
407. ver used to send email IP address only do not enter a host name here RECEIVER receiver s email address The receiver s number followed by an mark an email address comma and the number to specify the message severity level The BROADCAST Section BROADCAST section header ENABLED 1 enabled 0 disabled applies to this section only SEVERITY level of severity of the messages to be received 1 notification 2 warning 3 alert 1 covers events of all levels 3 only the most serious events will be broadcast RECEIVER The IP address of the receiver computer Add additional lines to specify multiple receivers Up to four receivers can be configured 226 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 Caching Parameters Caching parameters allow you to configure write back cache write through cache optimization modes and periodic flushing of cache to logical drives Enabling and Disabling Write Back Cache The write back cache function significantly enhances controller performance When write back cache is disabled a write through strategy replaces it The write through strategy is more secure if power failure should occur Because a battery module is installed power will be supplied to the data cached in memory and the cached writes can be completed when power is restored In a single controller configuration disable the Write Back Cache feature to avoi
408. vice _ 366 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Controller Self Diagnostic Events Controller self diagnostic event messages include the following Controller Self Diagnostic Alerts Peripheral Device ALERT Controller FAN_ Not Present or Failure Detected This event refers to the cooling fan in front bezel Check cable connection and see if a fan has failed ALERT Controller FAN_ Low Speed Detected _ RPM This message refers to the cooling fan in controller s front bezel Low rotation speed detected ALERT 3 3V Low Voltage Detected _V The detected 3 3V voltage source is now lower than the preset threshold Controller Self Diagnostic Notifications Boardl Cold Temperature Back to Non Critical Levels Main board temperature restored to within safety range Controller NOTICE Redundant Controller Firmware Updated Firmware updated for both controllers in the dual controller configuration 12V Upper Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits _ _V 12V restored to within upper safety threshold Appendix E Event Messages 367 12V Lower Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits _ _V 12V restored to within lower safety threshold IC Device Events I C event messages include the following I2C Device Notifications NOTICE Fan Module _ Back On Line Fan _RPM Fan module _ back online Fan_ _RPM NOTICE Controller Fan_ Back On Line _RPM Controller fan_ f
409. w one To replace a drive refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide Note To see the progress of cloning press Escape to clear the notification message and see the status bar Detect and Perpetual Clone The controller sends a command to enable all the drives SMART functions If a drive predicts a problem the controller reports the predicted problem as an entry in the event log The controller then clones the drive whose failure has been predicted if a global or local spare drive is available The clone drive still functions as a standby drive If the drive whose failure has been predicted does fail subsequently the clone drive takes over immediately To view the status and drive identities or cancel the cloning process see To View the Status of a Cloning Operation on page 184 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 User s Guide May 2006 Note If the drive whose failure has been predicted continues to work successfully and another drive in the same logical drive fails the clone drive performs as a standby spare drive and starts to rebuild the failed drive immediately This helps prevent a fatal drive error if yet another drive fails Choose Yes to confirm your choice Whenever a drive predicts symptoms of predictable drive failure the controller writes an error message to the event log Assign at least one spare drive to the logical drive either a local spare or global spare S
410. ware Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array However each platform has its own firmware patch When you upgrade your firmware be sure to download and install the proper patch Do not attempt to install a patch meant for one platform on a platform of a different type See Supported Hardware Platforms on page 2 for information about the hardware platforms supported by this RAID firmware release Several Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays are also available without firmware these are connected to a host computer and treated as Just a Bunch of Disks JBODs JBODs are managed directly by the host computer s management software and should not be confused with RAID arrays or RAID expansion units even though their product number designations and appearances may be similar or identical Before using the RAID controller firmware it is important to understand some key concepts underlying the controller s functionality These concepts are relatively common in storage arrays from many vendors but may be implemented differently in the Sun StorEdge 3000 family of RAID arrays This chapter presents an overview of these key concepts More detailed information about the way these concepts are implemented and used appears later in this guide Topics covered in this chapter include a Supported Hardware Platforms on page 2 m Key Concepts on page 4 a RAID
411. wn in the Maximum Available Drive Free Capacity field is the maximum available free disk space per physical drive based on the smallest physical drive in the logical drive The capacity you specify is added to each physical drive in the logical drive As described in the following examples the total amount of capacity that is added to the logical drive is automatically calculated based on the RAID level m RAID 0 Multiply the amount entered in the Maximum Drive Expand Capacity field by the total number of physical drives contained in the logical drive For example 100 Mbyte x 3 300 Mbyte total capacity added to the logical drive m RAID 1 Multiply the amount entered in the Maximum Drive Expand Capacity field by the total number of physical drives contained in the logical drive and then divide by two to account for mirroring For example 100 Mbyte x 4 400 Mbyte 400 2 200 Mbyte total capacity added to the logical drive m RAID 3 and 5 Multiply the amount entered in the Maximum Drive Expand Capacity field n by the total number of physical drives contained in the logical drive and then subtract n to account for parity For example if n 100 100 Mbyte x 3 300 Mbyte 300 Mbyte 100 Mbyte 200 Mbyte total capacity added to the logical drive If you know the total maximum drive capacity by which you want to expand a logical drive perform the following calculations based on the RAID level to determine the amount to enter in th
412. ws 180 33 L0 280 3320 LEUS ala ed OO 323 9 Ad The value for these objects can be obtained via an SNMP GET message on the Object ID A community name of public and a protocol version must be specified with the GET message Protocols 1 and 2c are supported These objects are defined by the MIB for each product All objects are read only See the NET SNMP documentation for the location where MIBs are installed A typical location is snmp mibs Example cp path to mibs SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB txt snmp mibs Using the NET SNMP snmpget command with the MIB the array information can be retrieved as shown in the following example snmpget c public v 2c m SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB 192 168 0 2 ctlrUniqueID 0 SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB ctlrUniqueID 0 STRING 5BF 220 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 The same example showing the Object ID in numeric format snmpget On c public v 2c m SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB 192 168 0 2 ctlrUniqueID 0 oe rbu Lb bet 2 180 3310 Loto 6 QO STRING SBE The m option specifies the MIB to use The snmpwalk command can be used to retrieve all index values of an Object ID in a sequence snmpwalk c public v 2c m SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB 192 168 0 2 1dID SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB 1dID STRING 4FCF8CED SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB 1dID STRING 51342612 SUN STOREDGE 3310 MIB 1dID STRING 38131F15 SUN STOREDGE 3310 M
413. xfs ofofunleofers wane 13943684 Na RAIDS 1023428 coop lel al i n Line Initializing Hotif ication LGi2 Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Creation 104 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 16 The following message is displayed when the initialization is completed o Jujj stacas a 2 a o e min asa aru mme S94EB542 NA RAIDi 34476 coop lel 2 al a On Line Initializing Motif ication l On Line Initialization of Logical Drive 1 Completed Press Escape to dismiss the notification The newly created logical drive is displayed in the status window e w w ratn sizecm sares afefe erarnsaz na narva 24476 coon ee E ee H a ene Se ee 4F342FDA AJRALDS GE 44006 GOOD Controller Assignment By default logical drives are automatically assigned to the primary controller If you assign half of the logical drives to the secondary controller in a dual controller array the maximum speed and performance is somewhat improved due to the redistribution of the traffic To balance the workload between both controllers you can distribute your logical drives between the primary controller displayed as the Primary ID or PID and the secondary controller displayed as the Secondary ID or SID Caution In single controller configurations do not set the controller as a secondary controller The primary controller controls all firmware operations and must be the assignment of
414. y 293 SunSolve has extensive search capabilities that can help you find these patches as well as regular patch reports and alerts to let you know when firmware upgrades and other patches become available In addition SunSolve provides reports about bugs that have been fixed in patch updates Each patch includes an associated README text file that provides detailed instructions about how to download and install that patch But generally speaking all firmware downloads follow the same steps m Locating the patch on SunSolve that contains the firmware upgrade you want m Downloading the patch to a location on your network m Using your array software Sun StorEdge Configuration Service or the Sun StorEdge CLI to flash the firmware to the device it updates Note For instructions on how to download firmware to disk drives in a JBOD directly attached to a host refer to the README file in the patch that contains the firmwate Caution Be particularly careful about downloading and installing PLD firmware If the wrong firmware is installed or the firmware is installed on the wrong device your controller might be rendered inoperable Always be sure to upgrade your SES firmware first before trying to determine if you need a PLD upgrade Patch Downloads 1 Once you have determined that a patch is available to update firmware on your array make note of the patch number or use SunSolve Online s search capabilities to locate and
415. y ID SID that is not already in use You will specify this same SID for Channel 5 as shown below 88 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 10 11 12 13 14 15 M 1 2 Choose No to decline the controller reset since you have another channel to reconfigure Select channel 5 Choose channel Mode Drive RCCOM and then choose Yes to confirm the change Choose No to decline the controller reset since you have another channel to reconfigure Press Enter to return to the menu Choose Secondary controller scsi id Specify the same secondary ID SID that you assigned to Channel 4 This change does not take effect until the controller is reset as described in the message that is displayed NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now Choose Yes to reset the controller Using Channels 4 and 5 as RCCOM Only Channels When only channels 0 and 1 are used for communication with servers another option is to assign channels 4 and 5 as dedicated RCCOM channels and then assign channels 2 and 3 as drive channels This reduces the impact of RCCOM on the drive channels by removing RCCOM from drive channels 2 and 3 In this configuration however channels 4 and 5 cannot be used to communicate with hos
416. y the controller to the host Some applications require that specific IDs be assigned to host channels in order to recognize the array Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array default host channel IDs are shown in TABLE 3 1 under Default Channel Configurations on page 20 Each host ID can have up to 32 partitions which are then mapped to LUNs to create a total not to exceed 128 The default host channel ID settings enable you to map up to a total of 64 LUNs To map up to 128 LUNs you must add host IDs At least four host IDs are required no more than six host IDs are supported For details on mapping 128 LUNs refer to Planning for 128 LUNs on a SCSI Array Optional on page 158 Each host channel has a unique primary and secondary ID available You can m Edit each host ID to change the ID of each controller host channel that is seen by the host To change an ID you must delete it first and then add the new ID m Add host IDs by adding a second host ID to channels 1 and 3 and additional host IDs if you make Channel 2 into a host channel Note Channel ID values range from 0 to 15 v To Add or Delete a Unique Host ID Note To change an ID you must delete the old ID first and then add the new ID 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit channelS lt Main Menu gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit Drives view and
417. ysical drives in the array izeCMB gt Speed LG_DRVU Status Yendor and Product ID REYER ELCHI G ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G ON LINE SEAGATE 1T336753FSUN36G SEAGATE 81336753 FSUN36G SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G A oo nal 34732 200ME 34732 200ME 1 ON LINE 34732 200ME 1 ON LINE 34732 20 ME GLOBAL STAHD BY SEAGATE 1T336753F UH36G UH vtorEdge J510F A jet a B E EG 288 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 15 Users Guide May 2006 TABLE 14 3 Parameters Chl ID Size MB Speed LG_DRV Status Vendor and product ID Parameters Displayed in the Physical Drive Status Window Description Channel that is assigned to the drive ID of the drive Drive capacity in megabytes xxMB Maximum synchronous transfer rate of this drive ASYNC The drive is using asynchronous mode x The drive is a physical drive member of logical drive x COPYING The logical drive is in the process of copying from another drive GLOBAL The drive is a global spare drive INITING The drive is initializing ON LINE The drive is in good condition REBUILD The drive is rebuilding STAND BY Local spare drive or global spare drive If the drive is a local spare the LG_DRV column displays the drive number of the logical drive to which the spare is assigned If the drive is a global spare the LG_DRV column displays GLOBAL NEW DRV The new drive has not been configured to any logical drive or as a spa

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

RAID_Firmware_Users_..

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents